RAM Manual Feb 25 05

RAM Concept
Version 1.4
February 2005
RAM International
2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92008
Telephone: (760) 431-3610
Toll Free: (800) 726-7789
Fax: (760) 431-5214
DISCLAIMER
The software and related documentation, including this documentation, are
protected by both United States copyright law and international treaty
provisions. Any unauthorized copying or reproduction is strictly prohibited
and subject to civil and criminal penalties. You may not sell this software or
documentation or give copies of them away to anyone else.
Possession and use of the Software and Software Documentation is subject
to all rights and duties set forth in the accompanying Software License
Agreement.
Except as expressly warranted in the Software License Agreement, RAM
International and Structural Concrete Software disclaim all warranties,
expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the
software, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying
hardware. All results should be verified to the users satisfaction. The
contents of these written materials may include technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors and may be revised without prior notice.
February 25, 2005
2005 Structural Concrete Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

RAM Concept is a trademark of RAM International.
RAM Concept
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Comparing with traditional methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

RAM Concept options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Structural systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 Looking at the Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
About the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Creating and opening files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Saving a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
About templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Expanding tool buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rearranging toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Using the right mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Undoing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.1 Modeling with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.2 Managing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4 Using Plans and Perspectives

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
5 Drawing and Editing Objects

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Using plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating new plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating new perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
15
16
17
17
22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Precision drawing with snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Drawing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Entering coordinate points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using relative coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Deselecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cutting, copying, and pasting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
i
5.8 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects . . . . . . . . . . . 29

5.9 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.10 Manipulating the model as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.11 Editing object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.12 Setting default properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.13 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes . . . . . . . . . . 33
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables

6.1 Customizing tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7 Choosing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.1 About units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2 Selecting units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3 Specifying report as zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
8 Choosing Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

8.1 Selecting sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
8.2 About plot sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9 Specifying Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Viewing the available materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adding and deleting materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
About post-tensioning systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10 Specifying Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
About default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Viewing the loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Loading properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
About loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Available loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adding and deleting loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
About load pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
11 Specifying Load Combinations

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
ii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
About default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Viewing the load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rebuilding load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Adding and deleting load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Load combination properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
About alternate envelope factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
Using rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rule set design properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of active rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and deleting rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
71
71
72
13 Using an AutoCAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . 77

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
What can be imported from the RAM Structural System . . . . 77

Controlling which concrete members are imported . . . . . . . . . 77
About load importation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Importing a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reimporting a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
15 Defining the Structure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
15.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

15.2 About columns and walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
15.3 Column properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
15.4 Drawing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
15.5 Wall properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
15.6 Drawing walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
15.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
15.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
15.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
15.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
15.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
15.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
15.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
15.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
15.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
15.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
15.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
15.19 About floor areas and members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
15.20 Slab area properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.21 Drawing slab areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.22 About beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.23 Beam properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
15.24 Drawing beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
15.25 Slab opening properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
iii
15.26 Drawing slab openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

15.27 Checking the structure definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

16.1 Generating the mesh automatically
17 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
17.1 Using the Element layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

17.2 About column elements and wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
17.3 Column element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
17.4 Drawing column elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
17.5 Wall element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
17.6 Drawing wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
17.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
17.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
17.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
17.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
17.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
17.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
17.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
17.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
17.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
17.19 About floor areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
17.20 Slab element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
17.21 Drawing the slab elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
17.22 A few final words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
18 Defining Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
18.9
Using the banded and distributed tendon layers . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Tendon properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
About drawing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Drawing single tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Drawing multiple tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Editing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
About jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Jack properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Drawing the jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
19 Drawing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

19.1 About self-weight
iv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9
About superposition of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Point load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing point loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing line loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing area loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 Creating Pattern Loading
139
140
140
141
142
142
144
145
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

20.2 Drawing load patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
20.3 Load pattern filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
21 Defining Design Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

21.1 Definition of a design strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
21.2 Understanding design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
21.3 About design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
21.4 Using the Banded and Distributed Design Strip Plans . . . . . . 155
21.5 Design strip properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
21.6 Drawing design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
21.7 Adjusting design strip widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
21.8 Improving the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
21.9 Additional design strip information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
21.10 About ignore depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
21.11 Drawing design strips for complicated floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
21.12 Irregular column layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
21.13 Using design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
21.14 Design section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
21.15 Drawing design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
21.16 About punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
21.17 Punching shear check properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
21.18 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
21.19 A final word on design strips, design sections and punching shear
checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
22 Using Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
About Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Live Load Reduction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Live Load Reduction Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
197
198
198
199
200
22.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction
23 Calculating Results
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Calculating the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

About analysis errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Recalculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Reviewing the calc log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Decreasing calculation time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
24 Viewing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
Type of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Viewing frequently used results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Viewing other results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Section distribution plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Miscellaneous results information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
25 Plotting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
25.7
Setting the plotted results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Section Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Section Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Punching Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
26 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
How the Auditor can assist the design process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

About the three design steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
About the information displayed by the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . 238
27 Using the Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

27.1
27.2
27.3
27.4
Viewing the estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

What the estimate calculates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Editing the unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
About unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
28 Printing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
28.1 General printing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

28.2 Print setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
28.3 Determining the fit of plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
vi
28.4
28.5
28.6
28.7
Printing the desired perspective viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Previewing the print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
247
248
250
29 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

29.1 Exporting a plan
29.2 Exporting a table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
30 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . 255

30.1
30.2
30.3
30.4
30.5
About the export of reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the export process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About export access and consistency checking . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete . . . . . . . . .
How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept link works
255
257
258
259
..
259
31 Using Strip Wizard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
31.1 Starting Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.2 Specifying general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.3 Entering span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.4 Entering support data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.6 Entering the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.7 Specifying the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.8 Specifying reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.9 Completing Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
262
263
265
266
267
268
270
270
271
271
32 Simple RC Slab Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
277
278
286
33 PT Flat Plate Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

33.1
33.2
33.3
33.4
33.5
33.6
Import the AutoCAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
293
301
311
314
322
vii
34 Mat Foundation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
34.5
Import the AutoCAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
35 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

35.1 Start Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
35.2 Set the general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
35.3 Enter the span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
35.4 Create the supports below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
35.5 Add drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
35.6 Specify the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
35.7 Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
35.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
35.9 Complete the Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
35.10 Proceed with RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
35.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
35.12 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
36 Analysis Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

36.1
36.2
36.3
36.4
36.5
36.6
Review of plate behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Finite element formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Deep beam considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Post-tensioning loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Design strip and design section forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Result categories in RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
37 Section Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

37.1 General Design Approach
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
38 Live Load Reduction Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

38.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule
Sets
viii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Tributary Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Influence Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Mat Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
38.2
38.3
38.4
38.5
38.6
38.7
38.8
38.9
38.10 Special Member Considerations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
39 ACI 318-99 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

39.1
39.2
39.3
39.4
39.5
39.6
ACI 318-99 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACI 318-99 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors . . . . . . . . .
ACI 318-99 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACI 318-99 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACI 318-99 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
428
433
434
436
441
40 ACI 318-02 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

40.1
40.2
40.3
40.4
40.5
40.6
ACI 318-02 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACI 318-02 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors . . . . . . . . .
ACI 318-02 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACI 318-02 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACI 318-02 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41 AS 3600-2001 Design
41.1
41.2
41.3
41.4
41.5
41.6
453
454
460
460
462
467
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
AS 3600-2001 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AS 3600-2001 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AS 3600-2001 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AS 3600-2001 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AS 3600-2001 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
483
484
489
490
492
496
42 BS 8110: 1997 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

42.1
42.2
42.3
42.4
42.5
42.6
BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BS8110 / TR43 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
507
508
511
512
516
522
43 Estimating deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

43.1 About RAM Concepts deflection calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
43.2 About detailed deflection predictions using ECR . . . . . . . . . . 544
43.3 Using RAM Concept to predict deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
43.4 Simplified deflection predictions using contour plans . . . . . . 548
43.5 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for
permanent live loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
43.6 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for
transient live loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
ix
43.7 Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots

554
43.8 Using strip based deflection plots for slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

43.9 Summary of RAM Concepts deflection capabilities . . . . . . . 564
44 Punching Shear Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

44.1 What is a punching shear failure? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
44.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching zone? . . . . . . 567
44.3 How do the building codes handle punching shear? . . . . . . . . 568
44.4 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear? . . . . . . . . . . 568
44.5 About ACI 318-99 code-model punching shear stresses . . . . 570
44.6 About ACI 318-99 code-model allowable punching shear
stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
44.7 Summarizing the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
44.8 Advice on the selection of punching check properties . . . . . . 572
44.9 Some final words of advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
44.10 Worked examples of punching shear for ACI 318-99 . . . . . 574
Chapter 1
1 Introduction
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses the Finite
Element Method for elevated concrete floor systems, or mat foundations.
The floors or mats can be post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete
(RC), or hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). RAM Concept is extremely
powerful and allows you to design an entire floor in one model, or design
individual strips or beams.
In this context, the term design means that:
The user defines the following: structural geometry, loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning layout (if applicable).
RAM Concept calculates (for any number of load combinations): the
required amount of reinforcement for flexure and one-way shear according
to relevant code requirements; stresses for flexure, one-way shear and
punching shear; and deflections.
A model consists of anything from a single simply supported beam or slab to
an entire floor. All models are three-dimensional (even those developed with
Strip Wizard).
RAM Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to replicate
the intent of concrete code rules, and with the Strip Wizard interface.
Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.
1.1 Comparing with traditional methods

Historically, the vast majority of concrete floors have been analyzed by
approximating a region of a slab as a frame (or design strip), and then
analyzing the frame/strip using variations of conventional frame or moment
distribution analysis techniques. There are two limitations to this approach.
First, in irregular structures, the approximation of the real structure into a
frame model could be grossly inaccurate and designing with the analysis
results might not even satisfy equilibrium requirements in the real structure.
The second limitation is that even in regular structures with regular loadings,
the frame analysis approximates the slab/column interaction and provides no
information regarding the distribution of forces across the design strip.
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
RAM Concept enables you to design post-tensioned and reinforced concrete
slabs by using a finite element model of the entire slab. RAM Concept can
predict the elastic behavior of a slab much more accurately than frame
models. In addition, the finite element method guarantees that the analysis
satisfies all equilibrium requirements, regardless of a structures
irregularities.
1.2 RAM Concept options

RAM Concept is available in several configurations.
Start with either, or both, of the following reinforced concrete modes:
RAM Concept for Mats (RC) Analysis and design of reinforced concrete
mat foundations (rafts) of any size and shape.
RAM Concept for Elevated Slabs (RC) Analysis and design of
reinforced concrete floor systems of any size and shape.
Increase RAM Concepts analysis and design capabilities by adding the
Post-tension option to either, or both, of the above:
RAM Concept PT option (post-tensioned option for slabs or mats)
Analysis and design of post-tensioned floors or mats in conjunction with
reinforced concrete.
1.3 Strip Wizard

Strip Wizard uses text input to generate a model. This allows the designer to
perform quick preliminary design in 2-D, or final design of straightforward
structures.
Strips generated by Strip Wizard are three-dimensional, but boundary
conditions are automatically introduced which effectively model 2-D
behavior. All models use the Finite Element method.
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
You can use Strip Wizard to design a beam or one-way slab without many
mouse clicks. It can provide an initial design of tendons and profiles,
negating the need for the designer to start with a guess.
1.4 Structural systems

You can use RAM Concept for models that contain any combination of the
following:
one-way slab systems
two-way slab systems
beams
girders
wide shallow beams (that behave similar to slabs)
ribs (joists)
waffles (two-way rib systems)
mats (rafts)
openings
There may be steps and changes in thickness and elevations for all of these
items.
RAM Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for the
following:
deep beams using the strut and tie method
deep beams that rely on torsion to distribute loads (RAM Concept overestimates torsional stiffness)
I-shaped sections
ramps
concrete sections with internal voids or cells
In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number of steps. The
authors do not recommend that you do this for evaluating post-tensioning
behavior, as it is not particularly relevant.
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1.5 Technical support

RAM International prides itself on the quality of its product support. We
want you to get the maximum benefit from your purchase of RAM Concept.
If you have any questions, please contact us.
For customer support, please contact:
North, Central and South America

RAM International
2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92008
USA
Tel: 1-800-726-7789
Fax: 1-760-431-5214
support@ramint.com
Europe
RAM International (Europe) Ltd.
4 Woodside Place,
Glasgow, G3 7QF
UK
Tel: +44 (0) 141 353 5168
Fax: +44 (0) 141 353 5112
ramsupport@dial.pipex.com
Australia, Asia, Middle East
RAM International (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
60 Wyatt Street,
Adelaide, SA 5000
Australia
Tel: +61 (08) 8365 3673
Fax: +61 (08) 8125 6515
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2 Looking at the Workspace

This chapter provides a basic orientation to the RAM Concept interface.
2.1 About the workspace

When you create a new file, RAM Concept generates layers, plans and
perspectives for you to begin design. As you open windows in the
workspace, RAM Concept activates the relevant toolbars.
Workspace with a plan open:
Figure 2-1 A. Report Contents Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report sections.
B. The active window. C. Menu Bar contains the set of menus for the program. Includes the
File, Edit, View, Specs, Layers, Tools, Calc, Window, and Help menus. D. Standard toolbar for
general editing operations. E. Action Tools for manipulating the current view. F. Snap toolbar
for setting coordinate snaps for the active plan. G. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active
plan window. H. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the current cursor location in plan coordinates. I. Status Bar for program status information.
2.2 Creating and opening files

When you start RAM Concept, you can create a new file or open an existing
file. You can also create a new file based on a template.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2.2.1 Starting a new file

When creating a new file, you make basic decisions about your model in the
New File dialog, which appears when you choose File > New. You specify
the type of slab, code and units to use. You can copy an existing RAM
Concept file or template by clicking Copy File on the New File dialog.
To start a new file:
1 Start RAM Concept and choose File > New.

2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click OK.
To start a new file from a template:
1 Start RAM Concept, and choose File > New.

2 Click Copy File in the New File dialog.
3 Select the file or template you want to copy.
2.2.2 Opening an existing file

Use File > Open to open an existing RAM Concept file. For quick access,
RAM Concept keeps track of the last ten files you opened and lists them at
the bottom of the File menu.
To open a file:
1 Choose File > Open.

2 Select the RAM Concept file you want to open.
2.3 Saving a file

Save your files often. When you save, you ensure that the file is stored on
your computer even in the event of a power failure or system crash.
To save and name a file for the first time:
1 Choose File > Save As (since the file has not yet been saved, you could also
choose File > Save).

2 Select the folder in which to save the file.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
3 Type a name for your file and click Save. RAM Concept adds the filename
extension .cpt if not provided.
To save any open file:
1 Choose File > Save (if you have not yet saved the file, and the Save As
dialog box appears, follow the previous steps for saving for the first time).
To save a file as a template:
1 Choose File > Save Template.

2 Click Continue on the warning message box.
3 Type a name for the template and click Save. RAM Concept adds the
filename extension .cpttmp (if not provided) and saves the file without the
objects.
2.3.1 Saving a copy of a file with a new name or location

Use the Save As command to create a copy of a file and change its name or
location. The original file and the copy are completely separate and any
work you do on one file does not affect the other.
2.3.2 Reverting to a backup copy

For version control, RAM Concept creates a copy of your last save every
time you save your file to allow you to go back to an older version if
necessary. RAM Concept creates the file with the filename extension
.cpt.bak1.
If you need to revert to an older version of a file, use the backup copy
created by RAM Concept.
2.3.3 Restoring an auto-save file

As a safety net, RAM Concept automatically saves a copy of your working
file in the same folder as the original and with the filename extension
.autosave. RAM Concept updates the auto-save file approximately every 2
minutes if you have made changes to your original file. Once you save your
file, RAM Concept deletes the auto-save file since your saved version is up
to date. We recommend that you save often to prevent loss of work.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
If a computer malfunction or loss of power occurs while you are using RAM
Concept, when you restart RAM Concept it detects the last auto-save file and
open it automatically. If you open a second copy of RAM Concept while one
is running, the second copy may detect the auto-save file of the first and
open it. In this case, just close the auto-save file and continue.
2.4 About templates

A template file contains everything a normal file includes (such as
specification settings, plans, etc.) but has no objects. You can create a
template from any RAM Concept file by choosing File > Save Template.
RAM Concept saves a copy of your file without any objects and with the
.cpttmp filename extension. For details on how to save a template, see
Saving a file. Copy an existing template file by choosing File > New and
clicking Copy File to create a new file based on the template. For more
information on starting a new file from a template, see Starting a new file
on page 6.
2.5 Expanding tool buttons

Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner ( ).
This indicates that there are other similar tools available for this button.
Press down on the left mouse button for one second over the tool button to
reveal a pop-up menu. Select a tool from the menu. The selected tool
becomes the new tool for that button.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
Expanding tool button with pop-up:
Figure 2-2 Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the Selection tool reveals
a pop-up menu.
2.6 Rearranging toolbars

You can move the toolbars in RAM Concept to suit your particular work
habits. To move a tool bar, click on the handle of the toolbar and drag the
toolbar to its new location. The toolbar handle is two lines on the right edge
of horizontal toolbars or at the top edge of vertical toolbars. The toolbars
snap to the edges of the application window or can remain floating in the
workspace.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2.7 Using the right mouse button

RAM Concept provides some of the commands available from the menus or
toolbars in a special context-sensitive pop-up menu that appears when you
click the right mouse button. The contents of the menu vary depending on
where you click, what window is active, and whether there is a current
selection.
2.8 Undoing changes

RAM Concept provides multiple levels of undo to correct mistakes or
reverse actions you have taken. RAM Concept limits the amount of memory
used to record undo information. RAM Concept is therefore able to undo
more small operations (deleting 10 objects) than large operations (deleting
1000 objects). Choose Edit > Undo to reverse the last action taken. To redo a
command that has been undone, choose Edit > Redo.
Note: The Undo command cannot reverse the Generate Mesh and Calc All
commands. All changes you have made are committed once you perform one
of these operations.
10
RAM Concept
Chapter 3
3 Understanding Layers
In RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, slab areas, springs, loads,
tendons, design strips, etc.) make up the structural model. Since there are so
many objects involved in modeling a structure, RAM Concept uses layers to
organize these objects.
A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in RAM Concept
resides on one and only one layer. You can handle all of the objects on a
single layer as a group or individually.
3.1 Modeling with objects

Since objects make up the structural model, they are more than a
combination of points and lines. Each object is an individual entity with
properties. Column object properties, for example, include concrete mix,
height, width, depth, and more.
You draw some objects on plans, and RAM Concept creates some objects
automatically when you generate the finite element mesh or run an analysis
calculation. If you have wall, column, and slab area objects on the Mesh
Input layer, RAM Concept creates corresponding wall element, column
element, and slab element objects on the Element layer when you generate
the finite element mesh.
If you want to create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that layer.
When you draw columns on the Standard Plan of the Mesh Input layer, you
are creating objects on the Mesh Input layer. These objects belong to the
layer and not the plan. They are editable by any plan on the Mesh Input
layer, but not by plans on any other layer. Each object is an individual entity
so you can manipulate it both separately and together with other objects on
the same layer.
RAM Concept
11
Chapter 3
3.2 Managing layers

RAM Concept performs most of the layer management automatically.
Almost all of the layers you need to design a structure are already in place
when you start a new file. RAM Concept adds appropriate layers when you
create new Loadings, Load Combinations, and Rule Set Designs.
Note: You can create and edit a separate group of Line Objects, Dimension
Objects, and Text Note Objects on every layer.
Drawing Import Layer
This layer contains all the imported AutoCAD drawing information. RAM
Concept automatically stores any imported drawings on this layer.
Mesh Input Layer
This layer contains the objects that define the geometry of the structure.
RAM Concept uses these objects to generate corresponding finite element
objects on the Element Layer.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column, Wall, Slab Area, Slab Opening, Beam, Point
Support, Line Support, Point Spring, Line Spring, Area Spring.
Element Layer
This layer contains the finite element objects. These objects can be generated
by RAM Concept based on the information on the Mesh Input Layer, or can
be created by hand.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column Element, Wall Element, Slab Element, Point
Support, Line Support, Point Spring, Line Spring, Area Spring.
Tendon Layers (Banded and Distributed)
These layers contain the layout of post-tensioning tendons and jacks for the
structure. Although there are two tendon layers, Banded and Distributed,
there is no requirement to use a banded tendon system. You can draw
tendons on the tendon layers in whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects: Tendon, Jack.
12
RAM Concept
Chapter 3
Loading Layers (Self-dead, Balance, Hyperstatic, Temporary Construction (at
Stressing), Other Dead, Live and User-defined)
These layers contain all the information that defines the loads on the
structure. In RAM Concept, a loading is a set of loads applied as a group,
such as the live loads. The loading layers also contain the loading analysis
results.
RAM Concept provides the self-dead, balance, and hyperstatic loading
layers by default and you cannot delete them.
You can define an unlimited number of loadings and RAM Concept creates a
corresponding layer for each.
Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area Loads.
Note: You cannot edit the load objects on the Self-Dead Loading Layer,
Balance Loading Layer, and Hyperstatic Loading Layer.
Pattern Layer
This layer contains the load patterns for the structure.

Layer-Specific Objects: Load Patterns.
Design Strip Layer
This layer contains the design strips, design sections and punching checks
for the structure.
Layer-Specific Objects: Design Strips, Design Sections, Punching Checks.
Load Combination Layers (All Dead, Dead and Balance, Initial Service, Service,
Sustained Service, Factored, Long-Term Deflection and User-defined)
These layers contain the load combination analysis results.
Note: The Sustained Service Load Combination is specific to ACI318.

Rule Set Design Layers (Minimum, Initial Service, Service, Sustained Service,
Strength, Ductility)
These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design results.
Note: The Sustained Service Rule Set is specific to ACI318.
RAM Concept
13
Chapter 3
Design Summary Layer
This layer contains the summary of all the design results. The summary
information is automatically created by RAM Concept when you Calc All.
You cannot create, edit, or delete the objects on this layer but you can view
them.
14
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
4 Using Plans and Perspectives

Plan windows are used to create, view, and edit objects in two dimensions
while perspective windows provide a three dimensional view of those
objects.
4.1 Using plans

A plan is a view of the geometric model and results. You can view any object
on any plan. You can only create and edit an object on a plan belonging to
the objects layer. For example, a live load can only be edited on a plan
belonging to the live load layer.
Objects are drawn and edited with tools located in Layer-Specific toolbars,
and the Tools menu. The available tools are dependent on which plan is the
active window in the workspace. Once you draw an object on a plan, the
object belongs to that plans layer.
Note: For information on drawing and editing objects, see the following
chapter.
4.2 Creating new plans

Create new plans when you need additional ones to those provided by
default.
To create a new plan:
1 Choose Layers > New Plan.

2 Enter a name for the plan. (RAM Concept automatically prepends the layer
name and appends the word Plan).
3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
RAM Concept
15
Chapter 4
4.3 Viewing perspectives

Perspectives provide a three dimensional view of the model. You can view
the model from any angle by rotating the perspective about the x-, y-, and zaxes. The model can be viewed in parallel projection or perspective
projection and can be modeled as a solid or wire structure.
4.3.1 Setting the projection

You can render the model in either parallel or perspective projection. In
parallel projection, lines that are parallel in the original model are also drawn
parallel in the three dimensional image. In perspective projection, near
objects appear larger than far objects of the same size. The Parallel
Projection (
) and Perspective Projection (
) toggles control which
way the image is rendered. One, and only one, of these toggles is always set.
4.3.2 Selecting the modeling

The Wire Frame Modeling (
) and Solid Modeling (
) toggles control
how the image is rendered. The wire frame is made of only the edges of the
visible objects whereas the solid model shows the visible objects surfaces.
The solid model is more realistic, however the wire frame image is often
useful since it allows you to see through the model. One, and only one, of
these toggles is always set.
4.3.3 Rotating the model

Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
tool (
) and the Rotate about z-axis
) to rotate the model about the screens x-, y-, and z-axes.
To rotate the model:
1 Select the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
tool (
) or the Rotate about z-axis
).
2 Click once on the perspective window to begin and move the cursor until
you position the model as desired.

16
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
3 Click on the perspective again to set the view.
4.4 Creating new perspectives

Create new perspectives when you need additional ones to those provided by
default.
To create a new perspective:
1 Choose Layers > New Perspective.

2 Enter a name for the perspective. (RAM Concept automatically prepends
the layer name and appends the word Perspective).
3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.5 Controlling views

You can manipulate the plan and perspective windows to show the desired
view or information. Zooming and panning allow you to change what
portion of the model you are viewing. RAM Concept usually regenerates the
view automatically. It is sometimes necessary, however, to use the Redraw
command (
) to update the image on the screen.
Plans and perspectives represent unique views of the model. You control
which object types are visible and their colors, font, and line type for each
plan and perspective.
4.5.1 Zooming to magnify or diminish

Use zooming to magnify or diminish the plan or perspective view. If you
have a mouse with a wheel button, roll the wheel to zoom in and out at the
cursor location. Zoom In (
view. Zoom Out (
RAM Concept
) and Zoom Rectangle (
) magnify the
) diminishes the view. You can set the view to
17
Chapter 4
encompass the entire model by using Zoom Extent (

previous zoom ratio use Zoom Previous (
). To get back the
).
To magnify or diminish the view with the mouse wheel button:
1 Place the cursor on a location over the active plan or perspective window.
This is the zoom center point.

2 Roll the mouse wheel button away from you to zoom in, and toward you
to zoom out.
To magnify a specific area in the view:
1 Select the Zoom Rectangle tool (
).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle around the area you want to
magnify.
4.5.2 Panning to reposition

Panning allows you to reposition the view in the plan or perspective window.
If you have a mouse with a wheel button, press down on the wheel over the
view and pan. You can use the Pan tool (
) to move the view as well. In
addition, plans have scroll bars along the bottom and right side of the
window that you can use to reposition the view.
To reposition the view with the mouse wheel button:
1 Press down on the mouse wheel button over the active plan or perspective
window.
2 Pan the view into position and release the wheel button.
To reposition the view with a tool:
1 Select the Pan tool (
).
2 Click once on the plan to begin panning, click again when the view is in
the desired position.
4.5.3 Regenerating
Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs that invalidates
the current view. When you generate the mesh, analyze the model or change
18
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
the settings, the open windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM
Concept automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view is not up
to date, click Redraw (
) to regenerate the view in the active window.
4.5.4 Setting the visible objects

Use the Visible Objects dialog box to set which objects types are visible on a
plan or perspective. Plans and perspectives can show objects from any layer,
but you can only edit objects on a plan from the objects layer.
Figure 4-1 Visible Objects dialog box Mesh Input tab
To show or hide objects on a plan or perspective:

3 Make the plan or perspective the active window.
4 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
5 Click on the tab for the objects layer (the plan or perspectives layer is the
one initially selected).

6 Check boxes to show objects and uncheck to hide objects, then click OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible
Objects command.
4.5.5 Changing colors, font, and line type

Each plan and perspective has an associated appearance scheme that dictates
the colors, font, and line type used for the objects shown. When a plan or
perspective is the active window, you can select and modify its appearance
RAM Concept
19
Chapter 4
scheme using the Appearance dialog. If you change the settings of an
appearance scheme, it affects all the plans and perspectives that use that
scheme. You can create as many appearance schemes as you need to
customize the look of your plans and perspectives. When you create a new
plan or perspective, the window initially uses the default scheme.
Figure 4-2 Appearance dialog
To set the appearance scheme for a plan or perspective:

7 Make the plan or perspective the active window.
8 Choose View > Appearance (
).
9 Select the scheme from the list of schemes on the left side of the
Appearance dialog and click OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the
Appearance command.
To create a new appearance scheme:
).
2 Click New below the list of schemes in the Appearance dialog.

3 Type a name for the new scheme and select the base scheme. The settings
from the base scheme initialize the new scheme.
20
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
To delete an appearance scheme:
).
2 Select the scheme you want to delete from the list of schemes in the
Appearance dialog.
3 Click Delete below the list of schemes to delete the highlighted scheme.
To set a new default scheme:
).
2 Select the scheme you want to make the new default scheme from the list
of schemes in the Appearance dialog.

3 Click Set As Default below the list of schemes to make the highlighted
scheme the new default scheme. RAM Concept uses this scheme to initialize
newly created plans and perspectives.
You can select the color of every drawn object type for each appearance
scheme. You can also set the background, grid and highlight colors. If an
object type has no color selected (
), RAM Concept uses the color setting
for the objects layer. For example, you can set the Tendon object color to no
selection, and then set the Banded Tendon layer to red and Distributed
Tendon layer color to blue. RAM Concept uses the foreground color in the
case that you have selected neither the object type color nor the layer default
color.
To change the colors in an appearance scheme:
).
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is the active
window, the selection is already the scheme set for that window).
3 Select the item from the drop-down list (if changing plotting colors skip
this step).
4 Click on the color selection box for the item and choose a color.
Lines of drawn objects can be set to solid, dashed, or dotted. Reference lines
have Line Type and Line Width properties that are independent of the
appearance scheme setting.
RAM Concept
21
Chapter 4
4.5.6 Changing font size

You can change the font size in two ways. In the appearance schemes, you
can select the font size for all text other then text notes. With the font
buttons, you can temporarily change the font size.
To temporarily change the font size:
1 Click Enlarge Fonts (
) or Shrink Fonts (
).
Note: The font size change only affects the active window and RAM Concept
discards the change when the window is closed.
4.5.7 Changing font scale
You can select the font scale so that the font size either changes or stays
unchanged as you zoom in and out on a plan.
To set the font scale:
).
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is the active
window, the selection is already the scheme set for that window).
3 Enter the font scale and click OK.
Note: A font scale of zero causes the font to stay a constant size regardless
of the plan scale. A non-zero value scales the font to be the same relative size
as you zoom in and out.
4.6 Setting up the grid

A grid can be set up to help you draw objects accurately by providing snap
points at a designated spacing. The Plan Grid Setup dialog allows you to
make the grid visible and to change the spacing, origin, and rotation angle of
22
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
the grid. You can change the grid setting for the active plan window or all
plan windows at once.
To make the grid visible for a plan:
1 Make the plan the active window.

2 Choose View > Grid.
3 Check Show Grid and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid to be visible on all plans then check Set for all
Plans.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Grid.
To change the grid settings for a plan:
1 Make the plan the active window.

2 Choose View > Grid.
3 Enter values in the Plan Grid Setup dialog box and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid settings to apply to all plan windows then check
Set for all Plans.
RAM Concept
23
Chapter 4
24
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
5 Drawing and Editing Objects

Drawing objects is the cornerstone of using RAM Concept. There are many
tools available to make this as straightforward as possible.
To create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that layer. You draw and
edit objects on plans using the tools from the Layer-Specific toolbar.
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps

RAM Concept provides drawing tools and settings to help you work
precisely. Snap tools allow you to snap the cursor to precise points on objects
or locations on the screen.
Using snaps is a quick way to specify an exact location on an object without
drawing construction lines or knowing the exact coordinate. Whenever you
move your cursor over an object, RAM Concept identifies snap points based
on what snaps are active. To turn on a snap, click on its button. Click on the
button again to turn off the snap.
Snap to Intersection (
) snaps to the intersection of any two lines
including polygon vertices.
Snap to Point (
) snaps to any defined point such as the center of a
column, end point of a line, or vertex of a polygon.
Snap to End Point (
vertices of polygons).
) snaps to the end points of lines (including
Snap to Mid Point (
) snaps to the mid points of lines.
Snap Nearest Snapable Point (

object nearest to the cursor.
) snaps to the point on a drawn
Snap Orthogonal (
) snaps orthogonally in the direction of the grids
local x- or y-axis. This need not be parallel with the global x- and y-axes.
RAM Concept
25
Chapter 5
Snap to Perpendicular (
a line.
Snap to Center (
Snap to Grid (
) snaps perpendicularly from the last click to
) snaps the center of polygons and columns.

) snaps to the grid.
5.2 Drawing objects

To draw objects on a plan, first select a drawing tool by clicking on it or
choosing it from the Tools menu. The selected tool will be the active
drawing tool for the plan until you select a new tool. Follow the command
prompts for points to enter. For example, with a Mesh Input layer plan open,
and the Column tool selected, the command prompt will read Enter column
center point:.
If you are drawing with a tool and wish to cancel what you have drawn, click
the right mouse button, or press the Esc key.
If you need to reposition or magnify the view while you are drawing and do
not want to cancel the work you are doing, use the mouse wheel button to
pan or zoom. See Controlling views on page 17 for more information on
how to use the mouse wheel button.
5.3 Entering coordinate points

Each point on a plan is a location represented by coordinate values. Many
tools require you to locate one or more points on a plan. With a tool selected,
you can enter points by clicking at a location on the plan, entering the
coordinates in the command line, entering the relative coordinates in the
command line, or by using snaps.
To enter coordinates:
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the x- and y-coordinates separated
by a comma (e.g. 10, 5).

26
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
5.4 Using relative coordinates

Relative coordinates locate a point on a plan by referencing it to the last
point entered. They can be very useful for moving and copying objects a set
distance.
To enter relative coordinates:
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the letter r followed by the x- and
y-coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. r10, 5).
5.5 Selecting objects

Before you can edit objects on a plan, you must select them. Use the
Selection tool (
) or the Utility tool (
) to select objects on a plan. You
can select objects by enclosing them in a rectangular selection area. For
example, if you have a slab opening (on the Mesh Input layer) in the middle
of a slab, clicking a rectangle around the opening will select both the
opening and the slab area because the rectangle crosses the slab area and
surrounds the opening. If you want to select just the opening, double click on
it. You can select any single object by double clicking on it. To add objects to
the current selection, hold the Shift key down as you select.
To select an object or group of objects:
1 Choose the Selection tool (
).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle. This selects objects within and
crossing the rectangular selection area. (Hold down the Shift key on the first
click to add objects to the current selection.)
To select only a single object:
).
2 Double click on the object you wish to select (Hold down the Shift key as
you click to add the object to the current selection). When you are selecting,
RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle as a double click.
RAM Concept
27
Chapter 5
5.6 Deselecting objects

You can deselect objects from the current selection by holding the Shift key
while you select objects to remove from the selection.
To deselect an object or group of objects from a selection:
).
2 Hold down the Shift key as you click at opposite corners of a rectangle
encompassing the objects in the selection you want to deselect. This deselects
the selected objects within and crossing the rectangular area, and selects any
objects in the rectangular area not previously selected.
To deselect only a single object from a selection:
).
2 Hold down the Shift key as you double click on the object in the selection
you wish to deselect. When you are deselecting, RAM Concept interprets a
very small rectangle as a double click.
5.7 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects

To cut or copy objects, first select the objects then choose the appropriate
command from the Edit menu. RAM Concept places objects that you cut or
copy on the Windows clipboard. The coordinate locations of objects pasted
from the clipboard are the same as the coordinate location from where you
copied or cut them. RAM Concept makes the pasted objects the current
selection, so you can reposition them after you paste.
To cut objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to cut.

2 Choose Edit > Cut (or right-click and choose Cut from the popup menu that
appears).
To copy objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to copy.
28
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy from the popup menu
that appears).
To paste objects from the clipboard:
1 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from the popup menu
that appears).
You can also copy and move, rotate, stretch or mirror an object in one step
by pressing the Shift key while you use the Move tool (
), Stretch tool
(
), Rotate tool (
) or Mirror tool (
). See Moving, rotating,
stretching, and mirroring objects on page 29 for more information.
5.8 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects

An object or group of objects must be selected before using the Move tool
(
), Stretch tool (
), Rotate tool (
) or Mirror tool (
) (See
Selecting objects). If you hold down the Shift key on the first click of a
move, rotate, or mirror, the operation will be performed on a copy of the
selection rather then the selection itself.
To move a selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to move.

2 Choose the Move tool (
).
3 Enter the point from which to move (hold down the Shift key as you click
to move a copy of the selection).

4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group of objects, to
move.
To stretch the selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to stretch.

2 Choose the Stretch tool (
).
3 Snap to the point you want to stretch on the selection (limited to
highlighted control points).
RAM Concept
29
Chapter 5
stretch.
To rotate a selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to rotate.

2 Choose the Rotate tool (
).
3 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key as you click to
rotate a copy of the selection).

4 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to rotate.
5 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an end angle.
To mirror the selection:
1 Select the object or group of objects to mirror.

2 Choose the Mirror tool (
).
3 Enter the two points that create the line across which you would like to
mirror the selected object(s). (Hold down the Shift key as you click to mirror
a copy of the selection.)
5.9 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch

The Utility tool (
) is a multi-purpose tool used for selecting, moving, and
stretching objects. See Selecting objects for information on how to select
objects with the Utility tool. Once you have selected an object or group of
objects, you can move or stretch a grip point by snapping to it on the
selection.
To move an object by one of its grips:
1 Choose the Utility tool (
).
2 Select an object or group of objects.

3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the top half of the snap area
until you see the move cross cursor (

) then click. (Hold down the Shift key
as you click to move a copy of the selection.)
move.
30
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
To stretch an object by one of its grips:
1 Choose the Utility tool (
).
2 Select an object or group of objects.

3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the bottom half of the snap
area until you see the stretch cursor (
) then click.
stretch.
5.10 Manipulating the model as a whole

The Move Model tool (
), Mirror Model tool (
), and Rotate Model
tool (
) work just like the Move tool (
tool (
) except they affect the whole model (all layers). You can also scale
the entire model with the Scale Model tool (
), Mirror tool (
), and Rotate
).
To move the entire model:
1 Choose the Move Model tool (
).
2 Enter the start point.

3 Enter the move point.
To rotate the entire model:
1 Choose the Rotate Model tool (
).
2 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key as you click to
rotate a copy of the model).

3 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to rotate.
4 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an end angle.
To mirror the entire model:
1 Choose the Mirror Model tool (
).
2 Enter the two points that create the line across which you would like to
mirror the model (hold down the Shift key as you click to mirror a copy of the
model).
RAM Concept
31
Chapter 5
To scale the entire model:
1 Choose the Scale Model tool (
).
2 Enter a scale center point.

3 In the Scale Model dialog box, enter the relative scale factors and click
OK.
5.11 Editing object properties

The properties of an object define its individual characteristics. For example,
the properties of a Line object include the Line Type and Line Width. Some
objects properties can be edited together as a group. Specifically, you can
always modify objects of the same type together, and you can often modify
objects of different types but with similar properties together. For example,
you can edit the Concrete Mix and Height properties of Column and Wall
objects together.
To change the properties of an object or group of objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects.

2 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and choose Selection
Properties.
3 Specify the property values in the Properties dialog and click OK.
5.12 Setting default properties

It is useful to set the default properties of object drawing tools so that when
you use the tool the drawn object has the desired properties. This is valuable
when many objects will have the same properties.
To set the default properties for an object drawing tool:
1 Double click on the drawing tool or with the tool selected, choose Tools >
Current Tool Properties.

2 Specify default property values in the Properties dialog and click OK.
32
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
When you now use the tool, it will draw objects with the specified default
properties.
5.13 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text

notes
The Line tool (
), Dimension tool (
), and Text tool (
) are all used
to add information to plans. These objects are not part of the structural model
and RAM Concept does not consider them when generating the mesh or
calculating results. As for all objects, the lines, dimensions and text objects
belong to the layer on which they are drawn.
To draw a line:
1 Choose the Line tool (
).
2 Enter the line start point.

3 Enter the line end point.
To draw a dimension line:
1 Choose the Dimension tool (
).
2 Enter the start point.

3 Enter the end point.
4 Enter the offset point where the dimension line will be located.
To draw text:
1 Choose the Text tool (
).
2 Enter the point.

3 Right click and choose Selection Properties.
4 Enter the text and its properties.
RAM Concept
33
Chapter 5
34
RAM Concept
Chapter 6
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables

A text table shows all the objects of a particular type on a specific layer.
Tables provide a customizable textual view of each objects properties. You
can access text tables from the Tables folder of any layer.
To open a text table:
1 Go to the Tables folder of the object types layer.

2 Open the appropriate text table from the folder.
For example, the text table for Walls Below on the Mesh Input layer can be
opened by choosing Layers > Mesh Input > Tables > Walls Below.
Figure 6-1 Mesh Input: Walls Below Table
6.1 Customizing tables

You can choose which columns and rows are visible in the table, and the
column widths. You can also sort the rows based on a particular columns
values in ascending or descending order.
RAM Concept
35
Chapter 6
6.1.1 Choosing which rows and columns to show

Customize the table columns and rows by clicking on the Customize button
above the table. In the Customize dialog box, you can select which rows and
columns are visible in the table. Check the columns you want to see and
uncheck the columns you want hidden.
To make a table column visible or hidden:
1 Click on the Customize button above the table.

2 In the Customize dialog box, to make a column visible, check the
checkbox. To hide the column, uncheck the checkbox.
3 Click OK.
6.1.2 Sizing table columns

You can resize columns by changing the width of the column header.
To resize the width of the column:
1 Place your cursor on the line between two columns on the table header and
press down on the left mouse button.

2 Drag the table header to its new width and release the left mouse button.
The table will print as seen on screen so the column widths you set will
appear the same way on paper.
6.1.3 Sorting table rows

To sort the table rows according to the values in a column, click on the
column header once for ascending order. Click on the column header again
to sort in the descending order.
36
RAM Concept
Chapter 7
7 Choosing Units
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems: US, SI and MKS.
Some designers refer to the US units system as US customary units, and
others call it Imperial. SI and MKS are metric unit systems, with MKS
using mass rather than weight.
It is up to you which system you use but local practice should dictate your
choice.
The choice of actual units is more subjective. For example, after choosing
the US system, one designer might use the default area load units of pounds
per square feet, and another might change the selection to kips per square
feet.
7.1 About units

Internally, RAM Concept performs all calculations with the SI unit system.
It converts all property values into an equivalent SI unit prior to calculation.
Once complete, it converts the values back into the selected units for
reporting.
It is possible to mix unit systems (e.g. pounds and meters) but this is not
advisable.
7.2 Selecting units

A new file has default units that you can change at any time.
7.2.1 Selecting the default units

The default units depend on how you created the file. When you use a
template or an existing file, the default units are those of the source.
RAM Concept
37
Chapter 7
When you create a file using the New command, you only have a choice of
default units for ACI 318 (US or SI). For all other codes, the default units are
SI.
7.2.2 Changing the units

You can change either the unit system or individual units.
To change the units:
1 Choose Specs > Units.

2 Do one of the following:
Select each unit by accessing the appropriate drop down box.

Select a unit system by clicking on US, SI, or MKS at the top of the
window.
Note: There is often a long list of choices for the units. Scroll down the drop
down menu to view the options.
Figure 7-1 Units Window
38
RAM Concept
Chapter 7
7.3 Specifying report as zero

RAM Concept allows you to filter out trivial results with the Report as Zero
option. For example, column reactions have components for Fr, Fs, Fz, Mr
and Ms. Some of these values, such as Fr and Fs, may be very small and
hence not important. Filtering small values from plan plots can make the
results easier to read.
Note: Using this feature could result in human error, as you might later
assume zeroed values are exactly equal to zero.
You specify Report as Zero in the Units window.
To specify Report as Zero:
1 Choose Specs > Units.

2 Enter one or more Report as Zero values.
RAM Concept
39
Chapter 7
40
RAM Concept
Chapter 8
8 Choosing Sign Convention

RAM Concept allows you to choose the sign convention for loads, analysis
and reactions.
RAM Concept uses the Cartesian coordinate system with the following sign
convention for axes:
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates axes.

Sign convention dictates how you input parameters and how RAM Concept
displays results. For example, the sign convention of an applied load dictates
whether the input value is positive or negative.
Note that changing a sign setting does not change the real value of any
previously specified data. For example if a +10 kips downward load was
specified when RAM Concept had a downward-positive load sign
convention and then the load sign convention was changed to upwardpositive, the load value would now be reported as -10 kip, but the load would
still be a 10 kip downward load. Similarly, a change in sign convention does
not affect the true value of results.
When you add loads after a change in sign convention, you must observe the
new sign convention.
8.1 Selecting sign convention

A new file has a default sign convention that you can change at any time.
8.1.1 Default sign convention

The default sign convention depends on how you created the file. If you use
a template or an existing file then the default sign convention is that of the
source.
RAM Concept
41
Chapter 8
When you create a file (not from a template), the sign convention is as
follows:
Positive loads
Figure 8-1 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).

Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the negative z-direction (see coordinate axes).
Mx (moment about the X-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
My (moment about the Y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Mz (moment about the Z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Positive analysis
Figure 8-2 Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending, Element Axial, Vertical Deflection. Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular
Deflection.
Vertical element shear Positive z-shear on the positive x- and y-faces.

Element bending Tension bottom face.
Element axial Tension.
Vertical deflection In negative z-direction (down).
Horizontal shear Positive y-shear on Positive x-face (equivalent to
Positive x-shear on Positive y-face).
42
RAM Concept
Chapter 8
Twist Positive x-axis moment on positive x-face (equivalent to negative yaxis moment on positive y-face).
Lateral deflection Positive in x- and y-axes directions.
Angular deflection Per right-hand-rule about x- and y-axes.
Positive reactions
Figure 8-3 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).

Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the positive z-direction (see coordinate axes).
Mx (moment about the x-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
My (moment about the y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Mz (moment about the z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Note: The only difference in defaults between Positive Loads and Positive
Reactions is Fz. This is because point loads are usually down if positive, and
vertical reactions are usually up if positive.
8.1.2 Changing the sign convention
You can change the sign convention for any loads or results, but only one at
a time.
To change the sign convention:
1 Choose Specs > Signs.

2 Change each positive sign by clicking the appropriate graphic. The
direction changes.
RAM Concept
43
Chapter 8
Figure 8-4 Signs Window
8.2 About plot sign convention

Line plots show positive results plotted above the axis line. This ensures that
plots do not appear upside down. For axis lines that are parallel to the y-axis
(and hence have no above the axis line direction), line plots show positive
results to the left of the axis line.
Perspectives are plotted with positive results in the global z-direction (what
is considered positive is dependent upon the sign convention of the Value
Plotted). For example, a perspective of deflection shows positive deflection
up.
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates axes.
44
RAM Concept
Chapter 9
9 Specifying Material Properties

RAM Concept uses materials as part of the input and the results. You specify
concrete mixes and post-tensioning systems as part of the input and RAM
Concept reports reinforcement bar requirements as part of the results.
You can use the materials provided or create your own. For example, you
might want to redesign the floor with the actual tested strength of the
concrete poured on site. In this case, you would create a new concrete mix
defined with that strength.
You can delete any of the materials that you find are unnecessary.
9.1 Viewing the available materials

The Materials window shows the names and properties of concrete mixes,
PT systems and reinforcing bars.
To view the materials:
1 Choose Specs > Materials.
Figure 9-1 The Materials window.
RAM Concept
45
Chapter 9
9.2 Material properties

The following is a list of Material properties:
9.2.1 Concrete Mix

Mix Name The label used to identify a concrete mix. The mix name is not
necessarily the concrete strength. The concrete mix is a property of columns,
walls, slabs and beams.
Density The concrete mass density (used to calculate self-weight and
sometimes the modulus of elasticity).
fci The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix at the time of
applying prestress (also known as initial strength).
fc The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix.
Note: fci and fc are used for all codes except BS8110.
fcui The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix at the time of
applying prestress (also known as initial strength).
fcu The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix.
Note: fcui and fcu are only used forBS8110.

Poissons Ratio The negative of the ratio of lateral strains to axial strains
for an axially loaded material. This is usually 0.2 for concrete.
Ec Calc The method used to calculate Youngs Modulus (for both initial
characteristic strength and characteristic strength). This can be according to
one of the code rules listed or a specified value.
User Eci The user defined Youngs Modulus used for initial cross section
analysis.
User Ec The user defined Youngs Modulus used for global analysis,
service cross section analysis and strength design.
46
RAM Concept
Chapter 9
9.2.2 PT Systems
System Name The label used to identify a PT system. It usually describes
the system, such as strand size and bonding.
Type Whether the system has unbonded or bonded strand.
Aps The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is usually comprised
of seven wires then the area is more complicated than d2/4.
Eps The Youngs Modulus of the strand at zero strain.
fse The assumed effective stress in the strand after all losses. Using jacks
overrides this assumption.
fpy The yield stress of the strand.
fpu The ultimate stress of the strand.
Duct Width The width or diameter of bonded tendon duct.
Max Strands Per Duct The maximum number of strands in a bonded
tendon (use 1 for unbonded tendons).
Minimum Radius The minimum vertical radius that allows satisfactory
placement of tendons in the field. You should consult with a local PT
supplier. A value of zero disables radius checking for this PT system.
Jacking Stress / Anchor Friction / Wobble Friction / Angular
Friction / Seating Distance / Long-Term Losses
Friction loss calculations use these properties. They have no effect unless
jacks are used (on a tendon layer). See Jack Properties in the Defining
Tendons chapter.
9.2.3 Reinforcing Bars

Bar Name The label used to identify a reinforcing bar. It usually refers to
the bars diameter.
As Cross sectional area of the bar.
Es The Youngs Modulus of the bar.
RAM Concept
47
Chapter 9
Fy The yield stress of the bar.
9.3 Adding and deleting materials

You can add materials to define properties of concrete mixes, PT systems
and reinforcing bars. You can delete materials as long as at least one material
of each type remains.
To add materials:

2 Click Add Concrete Mix, or Add PT System, or Add Reinforcing Bar.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new material and click
OK.
A new row appears at the bottom of the appropriate table.
4 Enter the property value for each cell in the new row.
To delete materials:

2 Click Delete Concrete Mix, Delete PT System, or Delete Reinforcing Bar.
A dialog box appears with a list of the available materials.

3 Choose the material to delete and click OK.
9.4 About post-tensioning systems

There are two types of systems considered in RAM Concept.
Unbonded systems: greased strand encased in plastic sheathing.
Bonded systems: bare strand within grouted ducts.
Strands are typically comprised of seven wires spirally wound. There are
two dominant strand sizes used in building construction:
0.5 inch diameter (12.7 mm)
48
RAM Concept
Chapter 9
0.6 inch diameter (15.2 mm)
For further discussion on post-tensioning systems, see the Defining Tendons
chapter.
RAM Concept
49
Chapter 9
50
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10 Specifying Loadings
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a group.
You define loading properties in the loadings window. You draw the actual
loads on the loading plans.
Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind).
Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type, as described in
About loading types below).
RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and you define the
factors that control this process in the loading window.
10.1 About default loadings

RAM Concept provides default loadings for self-weight, post-tensioning and
gravity loads. For mat files, RAM Concept provides additional default
loadings for wind and seismic.
Self-Dead Loading
This is the self-weight of the concrete. All other dead loading is

superimposed.
Balance Loading
Post-tensioning tendons and anchors apply internal loads to the concrete

structure. We call this set of loads the Balance Loading because you
normally design the post-tensioning to balance or offset the other loadings
applied to the slab.
Hyperstatic Loading
The hyperstatic loading is a theoretical loading that considers the restraining

effect of the supports on the structure as it tries to deform due to the
application of post-tensioning. Many people use the term secondary in
place of hyperstatic. The loading is not necessarily secondary in nature.
RAM Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects
RAM Concept
51
Chapter 10
(elements, springs, supports, design sections, design strip segments and
punching checks) as described in Post-tensioning loadings on page 390.
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading
This set of superimposed loads applies before stressing of post-tensioning

tendons. This loading is rarely used, and you need not consider it for RC
structures.
Other Dead Loading
This set of superimposed dead loads applies to PT structures after stressing

of post-tensioning tendons. It is simply the superimposed dead loads for RC
structures.
Live (Reducible) Loading
Live (Unreducible) Loading
Live (Storage) Loading
Live (Roof) Loading
Different sets of live loads. See About loading types on page 54 for further
description.
Service Wind North Loading
The set of wind loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Service Wind East Loading
The set of wind loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic North Loading
The set of seismic loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic East Loading
The set of seismic loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
52
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10.2 Viewing the loadings

The Loading window lists the different loadings and their type and pattern
factors.
To view the Loadings:
1 Choose Specs > Loadings.

2 If there are many loadings, scroll down to view them all.
Figure 10-1 Loadings Window
10.3 Loading properties

Loadings have the following properties:
Loading Name The label used to identify the loading.
Loading Type See About loading types on page 54 for more
information.
On-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are located within
the loading pattern when performing pattern-loading calculations. See
About load pattern on page 59 for more information.
Off-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are not located
within the loading pattern when performing pattern-loading calculations.
Note: RAM Concept ignores the pattern factors if both factors are the same
value. Setting both factors to 2.0 is identical to setting both factors to 1.0
RAM Concept
53
Chapter 10
10.4 About loading types

Every loading in RAM Concept has a loading type. RAM Concept uses
loading type to generate the appropriate load combinations from the defined
set of loadings, and to apply appropriate live load reductions.
See Rebuilding load combinations on page 64 for information on how
RAM Concept generates load combinations.
10.5 Available loading types

The available loading types are:
Self-Weight
The structures concrete self-weight loads are always generated with this
loading type. There is always one and only one loading of each of these
types.
Balance
As described in About default loadings on page 51. There is always one

and only one loading of this type.
Hyperstatic
As described in About default loadings on page 51. There is always one

and only one loading of this type.
Stressing Dead
Loadings of this type contain superimposed loads applied before stressing of

post-tensioning tendons.
This loading type is rarely used and is generally not considered for other
loading conditions. You need not consider it for RC structures.
54
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
Other Dead
Loadings of this type contain permanent dead loads other than those from
the self-weight type.
Live (Reducible) Loading
Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are reducible. See
Chapter 38, Live Load Reduction Notes for detailed information regarding
how each live load reduction code handles loadings of this type.
Live (Unreducible) Loading
Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are not reducible
(typically assembly loadings - see About snow, parking and assembly
loads on page 56).
Live (Storage) Loading
Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are reducible using
special storage loading reduction rules. For live load reduction to most
codes, it is appropriate to use this loading type for parking loads (see About
snow, parking and assembly loads on page 56).
Live (Roof) Loading
Loadings of this type contain typical roof live loads - except snow - that are
reducible. RAM Concept never reduces these loads (the RAM Structural
System may reduce these loads).
Other Loading
Loadings of this type contain loads of an unspecified nature. RAM Concept

never considers these loadings except in manually created or edited load
combinations (or load combinations created in previous files). All loading
from FLOOR versions 2.3 and before, and RAM Concept versions 1.3 and
before (except self-dead, balance and hyperstatic) are given this type; it is
often useful to change the loading types of these loadings from earlier
program versions.
RAM Concept
55
Chapter 10
Service Wind Loadings
Loadings of these types contain wind loads at service force levels. Service
Wind Loading N is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Wind Loading N (if it
exists).
Ultimate Wind Loadings
Loadings of these types contain wind loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate
Wind Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Wind Loading N (if it
exists).
Service Seismic Loadings
Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at service force levels. Service
Seismic Loading N is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Seismic Loading N
(if it exists).
Ultimate Seismic Loadings
Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at ultimate force levels.

Ultimate Seismic Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Seismic
Loading N (if it exists).
Most of these loading types are also available in a transfer variation. See
About Transfer Loading Types on page 57 for more information.
Note: All loading types except self-weight, balance and hyperstatic may be
used for more than one loading.
10.5.1 About snow, parking and assembly loads

Snow, parking and assembly loadings deserve special consideration
Snow loads
Snow loads should generally be drawn on a Live (Unreducible) Loading

layer.
Parking and assembly loads
It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw

parking garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer and assembly loads on a Live
(Unreducible) layer.
56
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
Refer to the live load reduction section listed below for detailed information
regarding how a specific code handles loadings of this type:
ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors on page 433
ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors on page 460
AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors on page 489
BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors on page 511
10.5.2 About Transfer Loading Types

Almost all of the loading types previously discussed are available with a
transfer variation. The transfer variations represent loads transferred from
the structure above onto the level under consideration (via columns or
walls). A few loading types are not available with a transfer variation, or
have a somewhat different meaning with a transfer variation. These are:
Self-Weight
There is no transfer variation of this loading type.

Balance
The transfer variation of this loading type is for loads generated by the
tendons in the structure above the level under consideration. Unlike the nontransfer balance type: multiple loadings of this type may exist; the loadings
do not contain loads generated from the tendons; and the loadings of this
type are user-editable. Loadings of this type are considered in the calculation
of hyperstatic effects.
Hyperstatic

Stressing Dead
RAM Concept
57
Chapter 10
10.6 Changing Loading Types

The type of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance and Hyperstatic) may be
changed in the Loadings window.
To change a loading type:

2 Click the loading type of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.

3 Select the new loading type.
10.7 Adding and deleting loadings

At times, you may wish to add loadings such as seismic or snow. Conversely,
you may choose to delete loadings such as Temporary Construction (At
Stressing) Loading.
To add a loading:

2 Click Add Loading.
3 Enter a name for the new Loading in the Add Loading dialog box and click
OK.
The new loading appears in a row at the bottom of the table.
4 Enter the Loading Type for the new loading.
5 Enter the On-Pattern Factor and Off-Pattern Factor for the new loading.
To delete a loading:

2 Click Delete Loading.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current loadings.

3 Choose the loading to delete and click OK.
58
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10.8 About load pattern

In structural engineering, pattern loading refers to a load arrangement that
ignores or reduces loads on selected spans for the purpose of
maximizing moments, shears or reactions. In 2D analysis, it is not difficult
to create an algorithm that determines the important patterns, but this is
extremely difficult for a 3D program, especially for irregular column layouts
and panels. Some people refer to pattern loading as skip loading.
To handle pattern loading, RAM Concept uses the concept of load patterns.
10.8.1 How load patterns work

A load pattern creates a (invisible) pattern loading that contains only filtered
loads for each standard loading. The On-Pattern and Off-Pattern factors
control the filtering.
The inclusion and exclusion of loads within the pattern area defines the
pattern loading. RAM Concept multiplies loads inside the pattern area by the
on-pattern factor and multiplies loads outside the pattern area by the offpattern factor. The actual pattern area is dependent upon the finite element
mesh. See Chapter 20, Creating Pattern Loading, for further explanation.
On-Pattern areas (shaded) for 6-panel slab:
Figure 10-2 Load Pattern for maximum positive moment (about Y-Y) in end span
RAM Concept
59
Chapter 10
Figure 10-3 Load Pattern for maximum negative moment (about Y-Y) at first interior column.
For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the on-pattern factor is 0.8
and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then two pattern loadings are created with a
load of 80 psf on the hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder of
the slab.
RAM Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with the full
loading - to determine the design force envelopes for design strip segments,
design sections and punching checks.
10.8.2 When to use load pattern

Whether you use pattern loading is a matter of which code you are using and
your engineering judgment. Some codes allow you to ignore pattern loading
for certain types of structures and magnitudes of live loading. Common
sense should lead you to logical load patterns that produce very close to the
maximum moments, shears and reactions.
In most circumstances, you only pattern the live loading. There could be
circumstances where you pattern other loadings.
For patterned loads, the on-pattern factor often has a value of 0.75 and the
off-pattern factor often has a value of zero.
For non-patterned loads, both factors should be 1.0. In special
circumstances, the on-pattern factor can exceed a value of 1.0.
60
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
When in doubt, all on-pattern and off-pattern factors should be 1.0. This
results in no pattern loading.
See Chapter 20, Creating Pattern Loading, for further discussion.
10.8.3 How load pattern can approximate moving loads

You can approximate moving loads by using load patterns.
To approximate moving loads:
Specify an on-pattern factor of 10 and an off-pattern factor of zero.

Specify load factors (in the load combinations window) for the moving
loading of one-tenth their actual values.
Define the movement using the load patterns.
Draw the load once in each pattern.
Note: RAM Concept still analyses a load combination with all the loads
present that is included in the envelope. This is the reason for scaling the onpattern, off-pattern and load factors - it diminishes the effect of the all the
loads load combination.
RAM Concept
61
Chapter 10
62
RAM Concept
Chapter 11
11 Specifying Load Combinations

A load combination is a factored linear combination of loadings. Strictly
speaking, we should call it loading combination, but we have adopted the
commonly used terminology.
11.1 About default load combinations

Codes generally specify which loadings you need to consider in the design
of a structure and how you should combine these loadings.
RAM Concepts default load combinations depend on how you created the
file. When you use a template or an existing file then the default load
combinations are those of the source.
When you create a file using the New command the default load
combinations depend on the code selected. These load combinations are
usually appropriate for the selected code, but there may be times when you
need to modify the load factors and add loadings.
The default load combinations for each code are described in detail in the
relevant chapter (Chapter 39, ACI 318-99 Design; Chapter 40, ACI 31802 Design; Chapter 41, AS 3600-2001 Design; Chapter 42, BS 8110:
1997 Design).
11.2 Viewing the load combinations

The Load Combinations window lists the different load combinations and
their design criteria and load factors.
To view the Load Combinations:
1 Choose Specs > Load Combinations.

2 If there are many load combinations, scroll down to view them all.
RAM Concept
63
Chapter 11
Figure 11-1 Load Combination Window
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations

At times, you may wish to rebuild an existing load combination that includes
a new or revised loading. For example, if a loadings type changes, it affects
the load factors and live load reduction process. You can account for these
changes by using the rebuild command.
64
RAM Concept
Chapter 11
RAM Concept will not automatically update load factors when a loading's
loading type changes. RAM Concept only sets the load factors when
rebuilding load combinations.
To view the regenerate load combinations:
1 Choose Specs > Rebuild Load Combos
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify if the load
combinations are for an elevated slab or mat foundation.
2 Select elevated slab or mat foundation
3 Select Rebuild
11.4 Adding and deleting load combinations

At times, you may wish to add load combinations such as seismic plus dead
or snow plus dead. Conversely, you might choose to delete load
combinations such as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) LC.
To add a load combination:

2 Click Add Load Combination.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new load combination
and click OK.
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans that you
want RAM Concept to create (Slab Stress, Slab Deflection and Slab Force).
These plans appear in the new load combinations folder.
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new load combination appears at the bottom of the window.

5 Select the active rule sets.
6 Enter the load factors and the alternative load factors for each loading in
the load combination.

To delete a loading:
RAM Concept
65
Chapter 11
2 Click Delete Load Combination.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current load combinations.

3 Choose the load combination to delete and click OK.
11.5 Load combination properties

Load Combination Name The label used to identify the load
combination.
Active Rule Sets These control which rule sets are used for design
calculations. Up to four active rule sets can be associated with each load
combination. See the following chapter for further explanation.
Load Factor The factor applied to a particular loading in the load
combination.
Alternate Envelope Factor You should only use these if you fully
understand the principle involved. Do not set these factors to zero without
understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the
corresponding load factors. See below.
11.6 About alternate envelope factors

There can be situations where the application of a loading has an
unconservative effect on the results. For example, a cantilever live loading
that reduces the internal span moment. In such circumstances, it is desirable
to analyze the structure both with and without the full loading. While you
could do this by creating an additional load combination, RAM Concept
provides a much simpler solution - Alternate Envelope Factors (AEF).
66
RAM Concept
Chapter 11
Point Load
Area Load
Figure 11-2 This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads (shown). The live loading
reduces the positive span moment. By using an AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you
create a load combination with a reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live
loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
Conceptually, RAM Concept considers alternate envelope factors by

analyzing the load combination 2L times (where L is the number of loadings)
- once for every permutation of load factors and alternate envelope factors
for all of the loadings. RAM Concept then envelopes the design strip forces,
design section forces and punching shear reactions for all of the load
combination analyses. RAM Concept uses these force envelopes later for
design purposes. You can also plot the force envelopes or view them in
tables.
RAM Concept fully considers any pattern loading effects while considering
the load factors.
Note that the general analysis forces that are not used as design forces by
RAM Concept - such as standard slab bending moments and deflections are only stored for the load combination considering the standard load
factors.
As stated above, you should only use alternate envelope factors if you fully
understand the principle involved. Do not set them to zero without
understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the
corresponding load factors.
Note: RAM Concept does NOT consider alternate envelope factors when
calculating tension spring iterations. For this reason, mat foundations
supported on area springs should use alternate envelope factors equal to the
corresponding load factors if there is likely to be lift off. Although lift off
usually occurs only when there are lateral loads, it could happen with gravity
loads.
RAM Concept
67
Chapter 11
11.6.1 Example of Alternate Load Factors

The following graphic shows the suggested way to use the factors for a
strength design of the ACI318-02 Factored LC.
Figure 11-3 Factored LC load factors and alternate envelope factors.
68
RAM Concept
Chapter 12
12 Selecting Design Rules

You design concrete floors manually by calculating the resultants (moments,
shears and axial forces) of a load combination and applying the appropriate
code rules and formula. You select code rules based upon the type of
member (reinforced slab, post-tensioned beam, etc.) and the type of load
combinations. For example, codes intend some load combinations are for
strength design and others for serviceability design.
RAM Concept uses a similar method. It sorts code rules into sets of rules and
applies them to the resultant envelopes of load combinations. Thus, a rule set
design is one or more code rules applied to the resultant envelope of one or
more load combinations.
For example, the set of code formula for bending and shear strength is the
strength rule set. RAM Concept applies this rule set to the envelope of all
factored (or ultimate) load combinations. The strength rule set does not
apply to service load combinations.
You design most floors or members for more than one rule set. For example,
a post-tensioned floor is usually checked for initial service (or transfer)
stresses, service stresses and strength, all with different load combinations.
12.1 Using rule set designs

RAM Concept uses the concept of a design strip to link finite element
analysis with concrete code rules (see Chapter 21, Defining Design
Strips). Each design strips properties include design system (beam / oneway slab / two-way slab) and the considered as post-tensioned option.
Design strips contain design cross sections.
You assign each load combination active rule set designs in the load
combinations window.
How RAM Concept utilizes rule set designs:
1 Load combinations generate envelopes for resultants (moments, shears and
axial forces).
RAM Concept
69
Chapter 12
2 All load combination envelopes with the same rule set design are in turn
enveloped. This is a rule set design envelope.

3 For each rule set design envelope, design strips generate rule set design
force envelopes.
4 Each design strip determines which code rules are appropriate for each rule
set design. Design strip properties impact which particular rules are used.
5 Design and checking rules are applied to the rule set design section
envelopes.
6 A design summary envelopes the reinforcement requirements and section
status for all rule set design section envelopes.

Example:
The following example describes how RAM Concept selects the ACI 318-02
design rules for a post-tensioned beam with live and wind loadings.
Figure 12-1 Example of load combinations and rule sets
70
RAM Concept
Chapter 12
RAM Concepts process is as follows:
The three load combinations generate envelopes for resultants.
The three active rule set designs (strength design, minimum design and
service design) each create envelopes from the load combinations.
Each rule set design envelope creates a rule set design section envelope.
The design strip properties of Structural system: beam and consider as
post-tensioned determines the following rules from ACI 318-99 are applicable:
Strength Design: rules 18.7.2 (flexural strength) and 11.4 and 11.5
(shear strength) are used with the beam clauses.
Minimum Design: rule 18.9.2.
Service Design: rules 18.4.2 (b) and (c).
These rules are applied to the rule set design section envelopes.
The reinforcement requirements and section status for all rule set design
section envelopes are in turn enveloped for a design summary.
12.2 Rule set design properties

The following is a list of rule set design properties:
Name This relates to the rule set design. It most cases it is the same as the
active rules, but there can be exceptions (see adding rule set designs below).
Active Rules This describes the set of rules applied by this rule set.
12.3 Types of active rules

The available ACI 318-02 active rules are:
RAM Concept
71
Chapter 12
Minimum Reinforcement
Rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, detailing, etc.) based upon

geometry rather than stress or moment level. Does not include shear
reinforcement.
Initial Service Design
Checks of PT floor stresses just after application of prestress (when dead

load is minimal).
Service Design
Checks of PT floor stresses due to service loads.

Rules for reinforcement bar based upon bar stress levels.
Sustained Service Design
Checks of PT floor compression stresses due to sustained loads.

Strength Design
Rules to ensure section has sufficient strength in bending and shear for
factored (or ultimate) moments, and minimum shear reinforcement.
Ductility Design
Rules intended to produce ductile behavior.
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs

Adding a duplicate rule set design allows you to separate the results for
different load combinations with the same active rules. For example, if a
strength design is required for three different load combinations (1. Dead
and Live; 2. Dead, Reduced Live and Snow; 3. Seismic) then you could keep
the results separate by creating two new rule set designs with names such as
Snow and Seismic which both use the code strength rules. This way you
can view the strength reinforcement requirements separately.
You can delete non-applicable rule set designs to simplify the file. For
example, in ACI 318-99, initial service design, and long-term service design
72
RAM Concept
Chapter 12
are not required for floors without post-tensioning. Another example is DL +
0.25LL Design is not required if the UBC is not used.
To add a rule set design:
1 Choose Specs > Design Rules.

2 Click Add Rule Set Design.
3 Type a name for the new Rule Set Design in the Add Rule Set Design
dialog box and click OK.

A dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans that you want
created (Top and Bottom Reinforcement, Shear Reinforcement and
Punching).
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new rule set design appears at the bottom of the window.
5 Select the active rules.
To delete a rule set:

2 Click Delete Rule Set Design.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current rule set designs.
3 Choose the rule set design to delete and click OK.
RAM Concept
73
Chapter 12
74
RAM Concept
Chapter 13
13 Using an AutoCAD Drawing

You can define the models geometry very quickly if there is an AutoCAD
file (with .dwg or .dxf filename extension) available to use as a background.
You trace the AutoCAD drawing with object tools to facilitate the finite
element mesh generation. You can also use the AutoCAD drawing to locate
other objects such as loads. Snap tools make tracing the imported AutoCAD
drawing easier.
Note: RAM Concept itself does not recognize the meaning of actual drawing
lines.
It is not necessary, however, to use an AutoCAD file. If the floor is
straightforward, or there is no drawing available, you should skip this
chapter. For strip-like models that do not warrant the use of an AutoCAD
file, it may be better to use Strip Wizard.
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing

To use a background drawing you import the drawing and then verify that it
is at the correct scale.
13.1.1 Importing an AutoCAD file

You can import a drawing at any time. An imported drawing overwrites any
previously imported drawing. RAM Concept can work with either a .dwg or
a .dxf file. It is typically best to use a .dwg file.
To import an AutoCAD file:
1 Choose File > Import Drawing.

2 Select the AutoCAD drawing file you want to import.
The File Units dialog box will appear with a list of units. The units relate to
the AutoCAD file, not the RAM Concept file.
RAM Concept
75
Chapter 13
3 Select the appropriate units and click OK.
Note: Usually the units of the imported drawing will be the same as the
model but it is possible to import an AutoCAD drawing with one set of units
into a model with another set of units.
13.1.2 Checking the imported information
When you import the drawing file, it will be visible on the Standard Plan of
the Drawing Import Layer. You should verify that the plan scale is correct.
To check that the imported drawing is at the correct scale:
1 Choose Layers > Drawing Import > Standard Plan.

2 Click Zoom Extent (
) to ensure that you are viewing the entire
AutoCAD plan.
3 Select the Dimension tool (
) and draw a dimension line between two

snapable points that are a known distance apart. The distance between the two
points will appear as a dimension.
If this dimension is not as expected then the imported file may be in the
wrong scale. Consider importing the drawing with different units to fix this
problem.
13.1.3 Making the drawing visible on other plans

You can make the imported drawing visible on any plan through the Visible
Objects dialog box. Usually you want to make it visible on the Mesh Input
Standard Plan (for defining the floor geometry), and perhaps on some
loading plans (for locations of line and point loads). You may choose to turn
off some AutoCAD layers if they clutter the drawing. If you happened to
bring in an architectural drawing, it is probably a good idea to turn off the
furniture. See Controlling views on page 17 for more information on
making objects visible or hidden.
76
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14 Importing a Database from the RAM

Structural System
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural System is referred
to as RSS.
RAM Concept can import concrete structure information and loads from the
RAM Structural System (Version 9.01 or higher) into a RAM Concept file.
RAM Concept can also export support member forces back to RSS.
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM Structural

System
RAM Concept allows the selective import of concrete members (slabs,
beams, openings, columns and walls), applied loads and member loads from
one story of a RAM Structural System database. Member loads can be from
gravity and / or lateral analyses.
14.2 Controlling which concrete members are

imported
A story defined in the RAM Structural System can have two types of floors:
elevated or mat foundation. The floor type designation determines which
concrete members in the story are imported.
Figure 14-1 and Figure 14-2 show the relationship between the selected
story, the import slab type and the slab area imported. Note that mats are
below the designated story. For example, the 2nd story mat is the mat that
supports the second story elevated floor.
RAM Concept
77
Chapter 14
Figure 14-1 The slab areas shown above (A,B,C,D) will be imported based upon the selections
shown below.
Import Type
Story
Elevated
Mat Foundation
1st
2nd
Figure 14-2 Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type, and the slab area imported.
14.2.1 Definition of the import perimeter

The selected slab areas define the import perimeter. Only RAM Structural
System support members within the import perimeter will be imported. For
example, in Figure 14-1, if the 1st story elevated slab is imported with the
columns above setting, the two furthermost right columns between the 1st
story and 2nd story will not be imported as they are not within the slab
perimeter at 1st story.
The following structural members can be imported:
1 Slabs
78
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
All slabs of the selected slab type.
2 Beams
All concrete beams from the selected story.

3 Openings and Penetrations
All openings and penetrations within the import perimeter.

4 Columns
Any column (below and / or above) whose center point lies inside the import
perimeter.
5 Walls
Any wall (below and / or above) whose center line is contained by or crosses
any part of the import perimeter.
6 Grids
All orthogonal and radial grids.
Note: All structural members are imported into RAM Concepts Mesh
Import layer. Grids are imported into the Drawing Import layer.
14.3 About load importation

RAM Concept imports applied loads and analyzed member forces from the
selected member group.
Certain components of member loads are ignored when importing,
depending on the slab type, the member support, and whether the member
forces are from gravity or lateral loads.
The following table summarizes the force components that are imported
onto a mat foundation and an elevated slab.
RAM Concept
79
Chapter 14
Slab Type
Loading Type
Supported
Unsupported
Mat Foundation Transfer Gravity (not applicable)
Fz, Mx, My
Mat Foundation Transfer Lateral (not applicable)
Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My
Elevated
Transfer Gravity (none)
Fz
Elevated
Transfer Lateral Fx, Fy, Mx, My
Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My
Figure 14-3 Relationship between the slab type, member force type, member support, and imported force components for an elevated slab.
For the purposes of Figure 14-3, RAM Concept considers any column, brace
or wall to be supported if it rests upon a column or wall.
Wall forces are resolved into a point load at each end of the wall. Walls
above a slab may have different supported designations at each end (as
one end may rest on a column or wall and the other may rest on a beam); in
that case the import of each end force considers its end support condition
separately.
The following loads can be imported:
1 Direct gravity loads
Point, line and area gravity loads applied directly to the imported slabs.
Figure 14-4 shows how RSS load cases are mapped to RAM Concept
loading layers.
80
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
RSS Load Case
RAM Concept Loading Layer
Dead
Dead Load
Live
Ignored (imported as 3 individual live loadings)
Live Reducible
Live Reducible
Live Unreducible
Live Unreducible
Live Storage
Live Storage
Live Roof
Live Load Roof
Construction Dead
Construction Dead Load
Construction Live
Ignored
Mass Dead
Ignored
Figure 14-4 Mapping of RSS load cases
2 Transfer gravity loads
RAM Concept imports loads from the RSS members above the imported
slabs. The loads include member self-weight and the transferred gravity
loads. Member loads are imported as point loads into the corresponding
gravity loading layers shown in Figure 14-4.
3 Lateral Member Loads
Lateral member forces (such as wind and seismic) are imported as point
loads into a new loading layer for each analyzed load case in RSS. RAM
Concept determines the name for the new loading layer from the user's label
and the RSS load type.
For example, the name could be mySeismic(EQ_UBC97_X_+E_F).
Note: Mat foundation loads imported from the RAM Structural System will
always be reduced during the import. For this reason you should always
choose the live load reduction code of None in these files.
RAM Concept
81
Chapter 14
14.4 Importing a database

You can import from the RAM Structural System at any time. An import
overwrites some or all previously imported data, and may overwrite
information you have directly input to RAM Concept. Refer to Reimporting
a database for more information.
Note: RAM Concept may not be able to import data correctly if the RSS file
does not pass the Data Check operation in the RAM Modeler module. It is
strongly recommended that your RSS file have no errors before attempting to
import it into RAM Concept.
To import from the RAM Structural System:
1 Choose File > Import RAM Structural System.
If there is no open RAM Concept file the Open RAM Structural System
Database dialog box will appear. Browse and select a RSS database (.ram)
file and click OK.
When a valid RSS database file is selected, the RAM Structural System
dialog box in Figure 14-5 appears.
The RSS filename selected appears after File: at the top of the window.
You may click on the Browse button at the top of the window to select a
different file with the file browser.
Note: If you select a file with a version prior to 8.2, an error will be
displayed and you will be returned to the file browser. Clicking the Cancel
button cancels the import operation.
2 Select the story and slab type.
3 Select the structural members from the check boxes under Structure.
82
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
Figure 14-5 RSS import dialog box
The dialog box makes Columns Below Slab, Walls Below Slab,
Beams and Openings and Penetrations unavailable for a Mat
Foundation.
4 Select the loadings from the check boxes under Loading.
The dialog box makes Direct Gravity Loads unavailable for a Mat
Foundation.
5 Click OK to import the file, or Cancel to cancel the import operation.
RAM Concept
83
Chapter 14
After an RSS file is imported, a RAM Import Status dialog box, similar to
that shown in Figure 14-6, appears with a summary and any warnings.
Figure 14-6 Example of an import summary with warnings
The RSS geometry definitions and loads are now imported into RAM
Concept.
You can now generate the finite element mesh. See Generating the Mesh
on page 109.
Note: If you are reimporting there could be additional dialog boxes that
appear with more warnings.
84
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14.5 Reimporting a database

If the information in the RAM Structural System database changes, the
RAM Concept model will not be automatically updated. You can, however,
reimport the changed information.
Changes to structural members and loads made in RAM Concept can be lost
when importing an RSS file, so care should be taken to avoid losing
information.
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts

If the file to be reimported has RAM loadings that are not in the current
RAM Concept file, a dialog box like that in Figure 14-7 will ask you to
choose a course of action.
Figure 14-7 Choices for dealing with new loadings
RAM Concept will also prompt you to determine if you require rebuilding of
the load combinations and design rules, as shown in Figure 14-8.
You have three choices:
Rebuild: load combinations and design rules in the RAM Concept file are
rebuilt
Dont Rebuild: the new load cases are added to the RAM Concept file, but
not included in the load combinations.
Cancel: RAM Concept returns you to the file browser.
RAM Concept
85
Chapter 14
Figure 14-8 Choices for dealing with new loadings
Note: When reimporting a particular member type, e.g. beams, all entities
of that category are removed from the RAM Concept file before importing.
For example, if beams are imported, all beams in the RAM Concept file are
removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM Concept will be
lost. If beams are not selected for import, then beams in the RAM Concept file
will not be affected when the file is reimported.
Note: If any loading categories are selected, then ALL loads in reimported
loading layers are removed. Any loads you have added manually on a loading
layer being reimported will be lost.You have the option whether to regenerate
load combinations or not.
RAM Concept always asks you to confirm a reimport operation, because it
may lead to loss of information. It warns you if the data to be reimported
would be significantly different from the previously imported data, or if
significant information will be lost. For example, RAM Concept warns you
when reimporting a mat foundation after previously importing an elevated
slab, or vice versa.
To reimport from the RAM Structural System:
1 Choose File > Import RSS.
A file dialog box will open with the name of the last RSS file you imported
into this RAM Concept file.
2 Select the RSS file and click OK.
The file can be a different RSS file which may have a significant (and
possibly negative) effect on the RAM Concept model.
86
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
The RAM Structural System Import dialog box will appear with a list of
options. The default options will be the story and slab type from the last
import.
3 Select the story, slab type, structure and loading and click OK.
A New Loadings confirmation box may appear that describes loadings in the
RSS file that are not in the current RAM Concept file. Click Replace, Add or
Cancel.
A confirmation box appears that warns about differences from previously
imported data.
Figure 14-9 Examples of warnings for an import operation with different levels and structure
type
4 Click Replace or Cancel.
A RSS Import Status dialog box will appear with a summary and any
warnings.
5 Click OK.
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions

14.6.1 Limitations
Not all information stored in a RAM Structural System database can be
transferred into RAM Concept.
RAM Concept
87
Chapter 14
RAM Concept models RAM Structural System data using either the ACI
318-99, ACI 318-02, or BS 8110: 1997 building code. A RAM Structural
System database that uses either BS 6399 or Eurocode will be imported
using the BS 8110: 1997 building code; otherwise the appropriate ACI code
is used.
RAM Concept does not model beam fixity.
RAM Concept models a column end as fixed if the RAM Structural
System column is fixed along either its major or minor axis.
RAM Concept only models walls of constant height. RAM Concept will
create a wall with the average height of the RAM Structural System wall.
The lateral loads applied to the structure in RAM Frame Analysis are not
imported.
14.6.2 Defaults
RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties that are not defined
in the RAM Structural System.
Beams
Surface elevation is 0.0.

Columns
Compressible is true.
Roller is false, except above mat foundations.
Columns above mat foundations are pinned at the top regardless of the
setting in the RAM database.
Walls
Neither the top nor the bottom is fixed.

Modeled as a Shear Wall.
Modeled as compressible.
The RAM Structural System cracked section factor is ignored.
88
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14.6.3 Assumptions
All loads are applied to the surface of the slab.
Wall member forces are applied as two point loads at the endpoints of the
wall that are statically equivalent to the wall forces and moments.
Refer to Figure 14-10 and Figure 14-11 for mapping of RAM load cases and
types to RAM Concepts loadings and force levels.
RSS Load Type
RAM Concept
Loading
RAM Concept
Loading Force
Level (Limit State)
Wind
Wind
Service *
Seismic
Seismic
Ultimate *
Other
Seismic
Ultimate *
Virtual
Ignored
Figure 14-10 RAM Modeler Force Level Assumptions
Note: * denotes assumed
RAM Concept
89
Chapter 14
RSS Load Case

Type
Sub-Type
RAM Concept RAM Concept

Loading
Loading Force
Level (Limit
State)
Wind
User defined story forces
Wind
Service *
Wind
all others
Wind
Service
Seismic
Seismic
Ultimate *
Seismic
UBC 94
Seismic
Service
Seismic
all others
Seismic
Ultimate
Dynamic
Eigen solution
Ignored
Dynamic
all others
Seismic
Ultimate *
Seismic
Ultimate *
Center of rigidity
Ignored
Virtual Work
Ignored
Figure 14-11 RAM Frame Load Cases
Note: * denotes assumed
90
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15 Defining the Structure

The easiest and recommended way to define the concrete structure is to use
RAM Concepts automatic meshing facility. This approach requires that you
define supports, slabs (of varying thickness), beams and openings with
objects that Mesher uses to generate the finite element model. You do this on
the Mesh Input Layers Standard Plan.
15.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer

There is no set order in which you must define objects. Some people choose
to draw supports first, whereas others draw the slab outline first. You can
edit whatever drawn objects later.
If you have imported an AutoCAD drawing, make it visible on the Mesh
Input Plan before drawing the structure.
15.2 About columns and walls

RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you define columns
and walls below and above the slab. Supports above the slab do not provide
vertical support, only horizontal support and bending resistance.
15.3 Column properties

RAM Concept column properties are separated into two categories: general
and live load reduction.
RAM Concept
91
Chapter 15
15.3.1 General column properties
Figure 15-1 Column properties: general
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification).

Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of column.
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the floor.
Width Measured along the columns r-axis. Set to zero for round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the columns s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. It
determines the columns r-axis (and is usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending stiffness without
changing the dimensions or height. For example, you may expect an edge
column to crack and rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to increase a
columns stiffness, but this is an unlikely scenario.
92
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in column.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) between
column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) at far end;
otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-direction according
to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible columns usually
produce results that are more accurate.
15.3.2 Live load reduction column properties

See Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters on page 200.
15.4 Drawing columns

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two columns cannot
have the same coordinates unless one is above and one is below.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not the Element
layer.
To draw a column:
1 Choose the Column tool (
).
2 Click at the column center.

To copy columns from below to above:
1 Select the columns and choose Edit > Copy.

2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column objects in the same
location as the original column objects. The pasted columns are the active
selection.
RAM Concept
93
Chapter 15
3 Change the Support Set property from below to above in the Column
Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation then there are duplicated columns that do not allow the model to run properly. If you have copied
a large number, it is tedious to delete the second column at each location (one
by one).
15.5 Wall properties

Wall properties are similar to column properties though instead of width,
depth and angle there is thickness. The fixity settings are somewhat
different, and there is no Bending Stiffness Factor.
The following is a list of RAM Concept wall properties:
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of wall.
Support Set Defines the wall as below or above the floor.
Thickness
Shear wall Locks the wall to the slab horizontally and thus restrains it;
otherwise, the slab can slide over the wall.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between wall and slab about the
walls r-axis; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the walls r-axis at far end;
otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for the wall to elongate in the z-direction according
to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible walls usually
94
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15.6 Drawing walls

The wall tool is very similar to the column tool except that it uses a line
rather than a point. A wall can pass through a column, or intersect another
wall.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not the Element
layer.
Note: The Wall tool (
), Right Wall tool ( ) and Left Wall tool ( )

share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool
buttons on page 8.
To draw a wall:
1 Choose the Wall tool (
).
2 Click at the wall end center points.

To copy walls from below to above:
1 Select the walls and choose Edit > Copy.

2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall objects in the same location
as the original wall objects. The pasted walls are the active selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from below to above in the Wall
15.7 About point and line supports

The result of defining a point support is a single support at a finite element
node. The result of defining a line support is one or more line supports that
are each located at a finite element edges. RAM Concept uses the thickness
of the lowest numbered element in determining the support elevation. For
this reason, it is not advisable to locate point supports or line supports at slab
steps.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be placed at the mid-depth
of the slab or they may cause an unintended arch action in addition to their
horizontal rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation
above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth).
RAM Concept
95
Chapter 15
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point and line
supports, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the xand y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc
Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal support
is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled without bracing members
(perhaps something other than a concrete wall provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in z-direction for
point supports and Translation in z-direction fixed for line supports. For
point supports, fixing the point support in the r- or s-direction could result in
arch / membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab translation along
or across the support could result in arch / membrane action.
15.8 Point support properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point support properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the point support
and the soffit.
Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Allows you to set the local axes.
Fixed in r-direction Prevents movement along the local r-axis.
Fixed in s-direction Prevents movement along the local s-axis.
Fixed in z-direction Prevents movement along the global z-axis.
Rotation about r-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the local r-axis.
Rotation about s-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the local s-axis.
96
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15.9 Drawing point supports

Each point support is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point
supports cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Support tool (
) and Line Support tool (

) share the
same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on
page 8.
To draw a point support:
1 Choose the Point Support tool (
).
2 Click at the point support location.
15.10 Line support properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line support properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the line support
and the soffit.
Translation along support fixed (OFF for line of symmetry)
Prevents the slab from moving along the support axis.
Translation across support fixed (ON for line of symmetry)
Prevents the slab from moving across the support axis.
Translation in z-direction fixed (OFF for line of symmetry)
Prevents the slab from deflecting up or down at the support axis.
Rotation about support axis fixed (ON for line of symmetry)
Prevents rotation of the slab about the supports longitudinal axis.
Rotation about perp.-to-support fixed (OFF for line of sym)
Prevents rotation of the slab about the supports transverse axis.
RAM Concept
97
Chapter 15
15.11 Drawing line supports

You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is very useful if a
floor is symmetrical and you wish to model only half of it. Be aware that line
supports could prevent post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.

) share the
same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on
page 8.
To drawing a line support:
1 Choose the Line Support tool (
).
2 Click at the support end points.
15.12 About springs

The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a finite element
node. The result of defining a line spring is one or more line springs that are
each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the spring elevation. For this
reason, it is not advisable to locate springs at slab steps.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed at the mid-depth
horizontal stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation
above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth). For slabs with varying
centroid elevations, it can be difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to
the slab when using lateral springs and supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as RAM Concept
automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn
this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One situation
where you might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against
sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps soil friction
provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force constant. R- and sforce constants could result in membrane action.
98
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15.13 Point spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point spring properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the point spring
and the soffit.
Spring Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows
spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local r-axis.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local s-axis.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis.
R-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis.
S-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis.
15.14 Drawing point springs

Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point springs
cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Spring tool (
), Line Spring tool (

), Tri-Area Spring
tool (
), and Quad-Area Spring tool (
) share the same button on the
Layer Specific toolbar. See Expanding tool buttons on page 8.
To draw a point spring:
1 Choose the Point Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the spring location.
15.15 Line spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line spring properties:
RAM Concept
99
Chapter 15
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the line spring and
the soffit.
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan
shows spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local r-axis at
each end.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local s-axis at
each end.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis at
each end.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis at
each end.
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis at
each end.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform you need to enter
only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two values separated by a comma
(ends 1 and 2). This allows linear variation of the force constant (or moment
constant).
15.16 Drawing line springs

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool except that it uses
a line rather than a point.

), Tri-Area Spring
tool (
To draw a line spring:
1 Choose the Line Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
100
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15.17 Area spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept area spring properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the area spring
and the soffit.
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan
shows spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the r-axis.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the s-axis.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis.
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform you need to enter
only one value.
Note: The force constant (or moment constant) can linearly vary in any
direction.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) varies you need to enter
three values, separated by commas (corners 1, 2 and 3). This allows linear
variation of the force constant (or moment constant) in two directions. See
Figure 15-2.
Note: If you use the Quad-Area Spring tool to specify a varying force
constant (or moment constant), Concept calculates the unique value of the
fourth corner (three points define a plane).
RAM Concept
101
Chapter 15
Figure 15-2 Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units at the first three corners. For quad areas, Concept calculates the fourth corner value.
15.18 Drawing area springs

You use the Tri-Area Spring tool (
and locate the spring area corners.
) or the Quad-Area Spring tool (

), Tri-Area Spring
tool (
To draw a Tri-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Tri-Area Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the three corner point locations of the area spring.
102
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
To draw a Quad-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Quad-Area Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.
15.19 About floor areas and members

Objects representing slabs, beams and openings define floor areas and
members. Often these objects overlap.
15.19.1 The priority method

At any floor location, only one thickness (depth) is used, and the object with
the highest priority defines that thickness.
The thicknesses of overlapping objects do not add to define the thickness.
For example, you would expect the overall thickness of a drop panel located
at a column to take priority over the slab thickness. By assigning a Priority to
each object, the automatic mesh generator understands how to generate the
finite elements.
RAM Concept
103
Chapter 15
The lowest Priority is 1. This is so that you can keep adding beams,
thickenings and slab areas with higher priorities. There is no limit to the
highest priority (other than your computer and text overflow).
Note: Overlapping objects for slabs, beams and openings must have
different priorities. Priority numbers need not be sequential.
Note: Supports do not have priorities.
Figure 15-3 Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input Standard Plan
Figure 15-4 The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from Figure 15-3.
104
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15.20 Slab area properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept slab area properties:
Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps and drop panels,
by specifying an increased thickness.
Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical elevation as 0. Setting
the elevation to a very large value (such as 100) may result in round off
errors in the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using different
surface elevations for different areas.
Priority Generally, the typical slab thickness has a Priority of 1.
15.21 Drawing slab areas

Use the Slab Area tool (
) to define the slab area by clicking on each
consecutive point (vertex). To close the polygon, click on the first polygon
point or type c and hit Return.
To draw a slab area:
1 Choose the Slab Area tool (
).
2 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.

3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or type c and hit
Return).
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight edges.
15.22 About beams

In RAM Concept, you model beams as thickened slabs with the beam tool.
RAM Concept
105
Chapter 15
15.23 Beam properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept beam properties:
Thickness is the same as beam depth.
Width The beam width appears to scale automatically.
Priority Generally, beams have higher priorities than slabs.
15.24 Drawing beams

You draw a beam by clicking the start and end points of its centerline using
the Beam tool (
). Each beam has six control points. The four additional
points are automatically located so that the beam-ends are perpendicular to
the sides. You can stretch the corner grip points to define mitered corners.
To draw a beam:
1 Choose the Beam tool (
).
2 Click at the each end of the beam centerline.

To define mitered corners on a beam:
1 Select the beam and choose the Stretch tool (
).
2 Snap to the beam corner grips and stretch them into position.
15.25 Slab opening properties

There is only one slab opening property:
106
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
Priority Generally, openings have the highest priorities in the floor.
15.26 Drawing slab openings

The Slab Opening tool (
) defines an opening in the slab.
To draw a slab opening:
1 Choose the Slab Opening tool (
).
2 Click at each slab-opening vertex consecutively.

Return).
Note: You approximate curves with a series of straight edges.
15.27 Checking the structure definition

After you have fully defined the structures geometry, you should check for
obvious errors. RAM Concept flags illegal modeling when generating the
mesh. A list of possible errors appears in Chapter 16, Generating the
Mesh.
Once you have drawn all the support and floor objects on the Mesh Input
Plan, you must generate the actual finite element mesh. The structure does
not exist until you generate the mesh.
RAM Concept
107
Chapter 15
108
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16 Generating the Mesh

There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in RAM Concept:
Using the automatic meshing facility that uses the mesh input objects
described in Chapter 15, Defining the Structure.
Using the manual meshing tools.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the recommended method
for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh intensity. The mesh size
can be more widely varied in different areas of the floor, but editing is more
difficult. Instructions for the second (manual) method are in Chapter 17,
Manually Drawing the Finite Elements.
16.1 Generating the mesh automatically

Finite elements do not exist (and hence there is no structure) until the mesh
has been generated. You need to have defined the mesh input objects (using
the procedure described in the preceding chapter) before generating the
mesh.
It is preferable to generate the mesh as soon as possible, although it is
possible to draw additional objects on other layers (such as loads) before
generation.
16.1.1 Deciding what mesh element size to use

When generating the mesh you need to decide what element size to use. The
maximum is 32.8 feet (10 meters).
To speed the analysis, it is useful to choose a coarse mesh for preliminary
design and a fine mesh for final design.
A coarse mesh might have an element size of span length / 6. A fine mesh
might have an element size of span length / 12. If in doubt, you should
investigate the effects of different mesh element sizes.
RAM Concept
109
Chapter 16
To generate the mesh automatically:
1 Click Generate Mesh (
).
The dialog box shown in Figure 16-1 will appear.
Figure 16-1 Generate mesh dialog box
2 Specify the Element Size in the Generate Mesh dialog box.

3 Click Generate.
The time taken to generate the mesh depends upon the size of the floor and
the specified mesh element size. For most models, the mesh generates in less
than 15 seconds.
Note: Every time you generate a mesh, RAM Concept deletes any existing
mesh and generates a new one.
16.1.2 Limitations of the automatic meshing
The main automatic meshing limitation is that the minimum element size is
0.164 feet (50 mm). RAM Concept can usually overcome this limitation by
adjusting the mesh input objects to generate a mesh. Concept moves mesh
input line objects (for example, walls, line supports) to accommodate point
objects (for example, columns, point supports).
RAM Concept automatically adjusts the mesh input objects if:
Two control points are closer than the minimum element size.
A control point is closer to a line than the minimum element size.
110
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
Note: RAM Concept generates warnings during the meshing if it was

necessary to make adjustments. You can stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue, you should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are
satisfactory.
Note: Concept generates a warning if two slab areas (or beams or openings)
with the same priority overlap. You can stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue you should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are
satisfactory as the choice of which slab area (or beam) governs the elements
is effectively random.
Note: Concept moves two columns to the same point that you draw closer
than the minimum element size.
A mesh generates but the model does not run properly if:
A column or point support is outside of the slab areas.
A wall or line support is partially outside the slab areas.
An area spring is completely outside the slab areas.
Two columns or walls are duplicated (intersecting walls are allowed).
To avoid mesh warnings:
Do any one of the following:

1 Adjust objects on the Mesh Input plan so that the minimum element size
dimension (or more) separates them.
2 Edit priorities so that slab areas, beams and openings with the same prior-
ities do not overlap.
16.1.3 Viewing the finite element mesh

You can view the finite element mesh on any plan, but the Standard Plan of
the Element layer is the preferred plan to use.
To view the finite element mesh:
1 Open Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
111
Chapter 16
The mesh generated at this stage appears to be somewhat random. This is
normal and in fact, for sensible mesh sizes it produces highly satisfactory
design results. At times, however, such a mesh (adversely) affects the
contour plots.
The mesh improves significantly once design strips are drawn and the mesh
elements regenerated. Accept the random mesh for now.
The following diagrams show the differences.
Figure 16-2 Mesh before Design Strips
Figure 16-3 Mesh after drawing Design Strips and Regenerating.
112
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements

Note: In most cases, you do not need to draw the finite element mesh
manually. If you have used the automatic method, there is no need to read this
chapter
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in RAM Concept:
Using the automatic meshing facility that uses the mesh input objects,
described in Chapter 16, Generating the Mesh.
Using the manual meshing tools described in this chapter.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the recommended method
for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh intensity: the mesh size
can be more widely varied in different areas of the floor. The method is,
however, more prone to user error and editing is more difficult.
Do not use the manual method to supplement a mesh made with the
automatic meshing facility. This is because manual elements would be lost if
you used the mesh generation facility. For example, if you added a column
element above in the element layer it would be lost when you regenerated.
17.1 Using the Element layer

There is no set order in which you must define objects. Most people choose
to draw supports first.
If you have imported an AutoCAD drawing, make it visible on the Element
Standard Plan before drawing the structure.
17.2 About column elements and wall elements

RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you define columns
and walls below and above the slab. Supports above the slab do not provide
vertical support, only horizontal support and bending resistance.
RAM Concept
113
Chapter 17
17.3 Column element properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept column element properties:
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of column.
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the floor.
Width Measured along the columns r-axis. Set to zero for round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the columns s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. It
determines the columns r-axis (and is usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending stiffness without
changing the dimensions or height. For example, you may expect an edge
column to crack and rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to increase a
columns stiffness, but this is an unlikely scenario.
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in column.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) between
column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) at far end;
otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-direction according
to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible columns usually
114
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17.4 Drawing column elements

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two columns cannot
have the same coordinates unless one is above and one is below.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw column elements
at slab element nodes.
To draw a column element:
1 Choose the Column Element tool (
).
2 Click at the column center.

To copy columns from below to above:
1 Select the column elements and choose Edit > Copy.

2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column elements in the same
location as the original column elements. The pasted column elements are the
active selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from below to above in the Column
Element Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation then there are duplicated column elements that do not allow the model to run properly. If you
have copied a large number, it is tedious to delete the second column element
at each location (one by one).
17.5 Wall element properties

Wall element properties are similar to column element properties though
instead of width, depth and angle there is thickness. The fixity settings are
somewhat different, and there is no Bending Stiffness Factor.
The following is a list of RAM Concept wall element properties:
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of wall
element.
RAM Concept
115
Chapter 17
Support Set Defines the wall element as below or above the floor.
Thickness
Shear wall Locks the wall element to the slab horizontally and thus
restrains it; otherwise, the slab can slide over the wall.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between the wall element and
the slab about the wall elements r-axis; otherwise pinned
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall elements r-axis at
far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for wall element to elongate in the z-direction
according to Hookes law; otherwise incompressible. Compressible walls
usually produce results that are more accurate.
17.6 Drawing wall elements

The wall element tool is very similar to the column tool except that it uses a
line rather than a point.
A wall element can pass through a column element, or intersect another wall
element.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw wall elements
along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of the wall elements must be at
slab element nodes. Wall elements cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw wall elements on slab elements:
1 Choose the Wall Element tool (
).

To draw wall elements where there are no slab elements:
1 Choose the Wall Element tool (
).

3 Specify the number of elements in the Wall Element Tool dialog box and
click OK.
116
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
To copy walls from below to above:
1 Select the wall elements and choose Edit > Copy.

2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall elements in the same
location as the original wall element objects. The pasted wall elements are the
active selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from below to above in the Wall
Element Properties dialog box.
17.7 About point and line supports

The result of defining a point support is a single support at a finite element
node. The result of defining a line support is one or more line supports that
are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of
the lowest numbered element in determining the support elevation. For this
reason, it is not advisable to locate point supports or line supports at slab
steps.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be placed at the mid-depth
horizontal rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation
above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth).
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point and line
supports, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the xand y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc
Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal support
is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled without bracing members
(perhaps something other than a concrete wall provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in z-direction for
point supports and Translation in z-direction fixed for line supports. For
point supports, fixing the point support in the r- or s-direction could result in
arch / membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab translation along
or across the support could result in arch / membrane action.
RAM Concept
117
Chapter 17
17.8 Point support properties

See Point support properties on page 96 for more information on point
support properties.
17.9 Drawing point supports

You draw point supports by clicking at their location with the Point Support
tool (
).

same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.
) share the
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw point supports
at slab element nodes.
To draw a point support:
1 Choose the Point Support tool (
).
2 Click at the point support location.
17.10 Line support properties

See Line support properties on page 97 for more information on line
support properties.
118
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17.11 Drawing line supports

You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is very useful if a
floor is symmetrical and you wish to model only half of it. Be aware that line
supports could prevent post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.

same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.
) share the
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw line supports
along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of the line supports must be at
slab element nodes. Line supports cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To drawing a line support on slab elements:
1 Choose the Line Support tool (
).
2 Click at the support end points.
17.12 About springs

The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a finite element
node. The result of defining a line spring is one or more line springs that are
each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the spring elevation. For this
reason, it is not advisable to locate springs at slab steps.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed at the mid-depth
horizontal stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the Elevation
above slab soffit to be one-half of the slab depth). For slabs with varying
centroid elevations, it can be difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to
the slab when using lateral springs and supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as RAM Concept
automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn
this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One situation
where you might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against
sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps soil friction
provides the bracing).
RAM Concept
119
Chapter 17
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force constant. R- and sforce constants could result in membrane action.
17.13 Point spring properties

See Point spring properties on page 99 for more information on point
spring properties.
17.14 Drawing point springs

Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point springs
cannot have the same coordinates.

), Tri-Area Spring
tool (
Layer Specific toolbar.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw point springs at
slab element nodes.
To draw a point spring:
1 Choose the Point Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the spring location.
17.15 Line spring properties

See Line spring properties on page 99 for more information on line spring
properties.
120
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17.16 Drawing line springs

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool except that it uses
a line rather than a point.

), Tri-Area Spring
tool (
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw line springs
along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of the line springs must be at
slab element nodes. Line springs cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw a line spring:
1 Choose the Line Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
17.17 Area spring properties

See Area spring properties on page 101 for more information on area
spring properties.
17.18 Drawing area springs

You use the Tri-Area Spring tool (
and locate the spring area corners.
) or the Quad-Area Spring tool (

), Tri-Area Spring
tool (
To draw a Tri-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Tri-Area Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the three corner point locations of the area spring.
RAM Concept
121
Chapter 17
To draw a Quad-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Quad-Area Spring tool (
).
2 Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.
17.19 About floor areas

You define floor slabs and beams manually with the slab meshing tools.
Drawing elements manually requires more thought on the drawing process.
Poor decisions could require a significant amount of editing and duplication
of work.
Drawing elements manually also requires careful application of the tools to
ensure that the side of each element is the same length as the adjacent
element. In other words, each element node must be at the corner of any
element that touches it. Elements cannot overlap.
You model beam elements as thickened slab elements with the same slab
element tools. You model openings as empty spaces in the mesh.
17.20 Slab element properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept slab area properties:
Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps and drop panels,
by specifying an increased thickness.
122
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17.21 Drawing the slab elements

You can draw slab elements one or more at a time. Usually you would
attempt to draw as many as practical in one operation using the Rect Slab
Mesh Elements tool (
) or the Poly Slab Mesh Elements tool (
). This
would often mean drawing slab panels (with columns in the corners) in one
operation.
Note: The Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool (

Elements tool (
) and Poly Slab Mesh

) share the same button on the Element layer toolbar.
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight edges.

To draw a rectangular slab mesh area:
1 Choose the Rect Slab Mesh Elements (
) tool.
2 Click at two opposite corners of the rectangle.

3 Specify the element size in the Rect Mesh Tool dialog box and click OK.
To draw a polygon slab mesh area:
1 Choose the Poly Slab Mesh Elements (
) tool.
2 Click at each slab panel vertex consecutively.

Return).
4 Specify the element size in the Poly Mesh Tool dialog box and click OK.
To draw a single mesh element:
1 Choose one of the single element tools (
).
2 Click at each of the three (or four) slab panel vertices consecutively.
Return).
RAM Concept
123
Chapter 17
17.22 A few final words

Do not click Generate Mesh (
) after drawing the mesh elements
manually. It deletes all the elements that you have drawn.
124
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
18 Defining Tendons
Note: You should bypass this chapter if you are designing a structure with
only bar reinforcement.
There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning that provides a
satisfactory PT design. This is particularly true with partial prestress design
where the emphasis is on strength, deflection and crack control rather than
hypothetical service stresses.
Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable service stresses to
drive their algorithms for providing a PT solution. This is fast losing favor;
some codes have all but abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a
design criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in that
direction. Some computer generated tendon layouts are not practical for real
design.
Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a workable tendon design
based upon spans, sections and loads, the possible randomness of supports
makes this extremely difficult in 3D.
Thus, in RAM Concept, it is necessary for you to define the tendons by
drawing them in plan and specifying parameters such as profile and number
of strands. For guidance, you should use one of the following for your first
estimate:
your experience
a preliminary run with Strip Wizard
a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A) considerations
a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag incorrect guesses, and
you can use The Auditor for help in iterating)
18.1 Using the banded and distributed tendon layers

RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called banded and distributed. In a
number of countries, it is common to use the banding technique for
detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding means concentrating the
RAM Concept
125
Chapter 18
tendons over support points in one direction, and distributing them
uniformly in the orthogonal direction.
Note: Distributed is also referred to as the uniform direction.

By using RAM Concepts two tendon layers, you can separate tendons into
two groups. Separating orthogonal tendons allows for easier editing and a
clearer presentation. You could also separate PT systems (say, bonded and
unbonded tendons) on the two layers. If you had a beam and one-way slab
system, you might draw the beam tendons on the Banded Tendon Standard
Plan, and the slab tendons on the Distributed Tendon Standard Plan.
Note: Banded and distributed are just names, and there is no need to adopt
the banding technique in drawing the tendons or in your design. You could
draw all tendons, which might be at various plan angles, on one plan.
18.2 Tendon properties

Before you begin drawing tendons, specify the default properties for the
tool(s) you will use. The default values are set in the Default Properties
dialog box. Double click one of the tendon drawing tools (Half Span Tendon
(
), Full Span Tendon (
Tendon Panel (
), Half Span Tendon Panel (
), or Full Span
)) to edit its properties.
Note: Setting the default properties for one tendon drawing tool sets
properties for all the tendon drawing tools.
The following is a list of RAM Concept tendon properties:
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for each tendon. The
label is not necessarily the size and type of strand. The Materials
Specification defines the PT system properties. It is possible to mix systems
in a single tendon layer.
Strands per Tendon Specifies the number of strands in the selected
tendon(s). It need not be an integer value.
In RAM Concept and in post-tensioned construction a strand is the unit of
post-tensioning reinforcement, similar to a reinforcing bar being the unit of
RC reinforcement. In practice, the PT industry defines a tendon as a group of
126
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
strands that share a common anchorage. The group may be just one strand,
as is the case with most unbonded systems, or monostrand.
While the total number of strands in RAM Concept and the real structure
must match, the grouping of strands into tendons need not be the same in
RAM Concept as in the real structure. It is usually not necessary to model
each real tendon as a RAM Concept tendon - fewer RAM Concept tendons
(with a larger number of strands per tendon) are often used.
Profile (Profile at end 1 and Profile at end 2) The tendon profile is the
vertical distance between the slab soffit and the centroid of the tendon.
Another name for the tendon centroid is cgs (center of gravity of strand).
The dimension from the floor soffit (at that exact plan location) to the cgs is
the profile point dimension. Thus, if a profile point is located over a slab
thickening (drop cap, beam etc.) then the thickening should be taken into
account. RAM Concept does not use dimensions to the underside of duct, or
cover, to determine profiles.
The path of a tendon along with the number of strands determines the forces
the tendon exerts on the concrete. Profile points (that are usually the tendon
high and low points) define this path. If necessary, you can introduce
intermediate profile points.
Tendons are comprised of segments. For elevated floors, each segment has a
high point (end 1) and a low point (end 2). For mats, the reverse is generally
true.
Most spans have a tendon with two segments. Cantilevers and some spans
have tendons with one segment
Selections should consider cover and load balancing. Profiles typically vary
according to span lengths.
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from end 1 to the point
where the tendon curvature changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the
ratio of x to the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of 0.2 places the
inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end 2 is at midspan.
This is a commonly used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple parabola.

Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight profile (as
opposed to a parabolic profile).
RAM Concept
127
Chapter 18
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads
If two tendon segments in one span have different values for end 1 then the
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option moves the low point
in plan to equilibrate the uplift during an analysis calculation.
Note: Do not select this option when the end 1and end 2 profiles are at the
same elevation. A segment with such profiles would have zero uplift and so
the formulation does not work.
18.3 About drawing tendons

You can draw tendons in a number of ways:
A single tendon one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon tool
(typically used for cantilevers).
A single tendon one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon tool.
A single tendon with numerous spans using the Tendon Polyline tool.
A number of tendons one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon
Panel tool.
A number of tendons one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon Panel
tool.
You use these tools in different situations. You might find drawing one
tendon and then copying it is quicker than using the polyline and panel tools.
18.4 Drawing single tendons

The following instructions are relevant for elevated floors where the tendon
has a high point at supports and a low point near midspan. For mats, the
reverse is generally true.
128
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
18.4.1 Drawing a half-span tendon

You might use the half-span tendon tool for cantilevers and short end spans.
For such uses, the Profile at End 2 value would commonly be half the slab
thickness or the beam centroid dimension.
To draw a half-span tendon:
1 Select the Half Span Tendon tool (
).
2 Click at the tendon high point.

3 Click at the tendon low point.
Note: The order of mouse clicks is very important when drawing half-span
tendons because the tool measures the inflection point from the high point
(end 1).
18.4.2 Drawing a full-span tendon
You typically use the full-span tendon tool for conventional spans.
To draw a full-span tendon:
1 Select the Full Span Tendon tool (
).
2 Click at the two tendon high points. The low point (End 2) automatically
locates at the midpoint of the tendon.
Note: The low point can be adjusted with the Stretch tool (
) or the
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option in the Tendon
18.4.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the tendon

polyline
The Tendon Polyline tool (
) allows you to draw a series of full span
tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
To draw a tendon polyline:
1 Select the Tendon Polyline tool (
).
2 Click a series of tendon high points. The low points (End 2) automatically
locate at the midpoint of high points.

RAM Concept
129
Chapter 18
3 Right-click after clicking the last high point.
4 Click Enter
18.5 Drawing multiple tendons

You can draw a group of tendons in one operation with the tendon panel
tools. You designate the panel to lay out the tendons, along with the desired
tendon spacing, and RAM Concept draws the tendons.
The drawing process requires you to draw the panel points sequentially in a
clockwise or counter-clockwise manner to form a quadrilateral.
18.5.1 Tendon panel layout options

Layout The choices are Parallel and Splayed.
130
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
Figure 18-1 Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five feet.
RAM Concept
131
Chapter 18
Figure 18-2 Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five feet.
Tendon Spacing The choices are Fixed, Equal and Auto Connect.
Fixed draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing distance apart. It is
not available with splayed tendons.
Equal (not to exceed maximum) draws tendons an equal distance apart
that is at most the spacing value.
Auto connect (based on last edge) draws tendons connected to the profile
points on the last edge of the tendon panel area.
Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge tendons.
132
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
Figure 18-3 Tendons after Auto Connect.
RAM Concept
133
Chapter 18
Figure 18-4 Tendons after Auto Connect.

To draw a Half-Span Tendon Panel:
1 Select the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
).
2 Click at the tendon high and low points of the first tendon in the tendon
panel area.
3 Click at the tendon low and high points of the opposite edge of the tendon
panel area.
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
To draw a Full-Span Tendon Panel:
1 Select the Full Span Tendon Panel tool (
134
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
2 Click at the tendon high points of the first tendon in the tendon panel area.
3 Click at the tendon high points of the opposite edge of the tendon panel
area (following a clockwise or counterclockwise direction).

The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
Note: A low point (End 2) automatically locates at the midpoint of each

tendon.
18.6 Editing tendons

As with any object, you can edit tendons after they are drawn. In particular,
you can adjust profiles manually or use the Calc Profile tool (
automatic adjustment.
) for
Too much uplift in a tendon can cause deflection reversals that may crack the
slab. For this and other reasons, it is a good idea to have the amount of uplift
or load balance somewhat consistent from span to span.
To edit a tendon based on uplift:
1 Select a tendon segment.

2 Click the Calc Profile tool (
).The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box

appears and reports the current balance load.
3 Input the desired balance load (values are typically negative) in the Calc
Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.

The low point (end 2) adjusts to provide the desired uplift
You can select two segments in the same span and RAM Concept calculates
the low point based on average uplift
It is generally not necessary to balance exactly the same amount of load in
each span. It is not advisable to have an excessive number of different low
points. Manually rounding the profile values can produce a more practical
design.
RAM Concept
135
Chapter 18
If the desired balance load is too high then RAM Concept could calculate a
negative profile that causes an error when calculating the results.
Note: RAM Concept does not check cover violations
18.7 About jacks

RAM Concept calculates the force losses in a tendon if you draw jacks at
live (stressing) ends. If you draw a jack at each end of a tendon then it is
double end stressed. If only one jack is drawn then the other end of the
tendon is a dead end. If you draw a single jack on a tendon layer then every
tendon on that layer must have at least one jack attached.
18.8 Jack properties

Set the default jack properties in the Default Jack Properties dialog box by
double clicking the Jack tool (
). You can choose to ignore the jack
property values in the Jack Properties dialog and instead use the PT System
values.
The following is a list of jack properties:
Jacking Stress The stress in the strand at the jack at jacking.
Anchor Friction Coefficient Loss of stress due to friction in the
anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You would enter a 2% loss as 0.02.
Most PT suppliers recommend a value of zero for unbonded tendons. You
might consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded tendons.
Wobble Friction Coefficient Friction calculations use this property (k) to
estimate losses due to accidental curvature (in the horizontal and vertical
136
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
planes). It is the product of the angle friction coefficient and the accidental
angular change per unit length.
Note: Some engineering communities use a definition of wobble coefficient

that is the accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can
calculate the wobble coefficient that RAM Concept uses, k, with the following
relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
Angle Friction Coefficient Loss due to deliberate curvature (in the
horizontal and vertical planes). Most designers know it as mu.
Seating Distance The distance that the wedges recede into the anchorage.
This occurs when the field operator releases the tension in the jack.
Long Term Losses The sum of losses such as creep and shrinkage of
concrete, and relaxation of strand. It also includes the loss due to elastic
shortening of the concrete even though it is a short-term loss.
18.9 Drawing the jacks

You draw jacks with the Jack tool (
stressed ends of the tendons.
) by clicking a rectangle around the
To draw tendon jack(s):
1 Select the Jack tool (
).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing the tendon live ends.
Note: You can delete a single jack by double clicking it. To delete multiple
jacks, consider making all objects except the jacks invisible, then select and
delete the jacks.
RAM Concept
137
Chapter 18
138
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
19 Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area loads and moments on
any loading plan. These loads can be in the directions of the global x-, y- and
z-axes and the moments can be about the global x- and y-axes.
Each load belongs to a loading layer, such as Live Loading. You define each
loading in the loadings window, and draw the loads on plans.
There is no limitation to the number of loads defined.
Loads are independent of the finite element mesh and have no effect on the
automatic mesh generation. This is satisfactory for most loads. For very
heavy point or line loads (such as on a mat or transfer slab), however, the
loads should correlate with the finite element mesh nodes. You can do this
by drawing pinned columns and walls above the floor, and drawing the loads
at these locations with the help of snaps.
Horizontal loads may cause applied moments depending upon the elevation
above the slab surface of the loads. If a load is located at a slab surface step,
RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered slab element in
determining the load elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate
point or line loads at steps.
Importing an AutoCAD drawing may assist you in drawing loads.
19.1 About self-weight

RAM Concept automatically calculates the floors self-weight for the SelfDead Loading.
19.2 About superposition of loads

Point loads cannot be at the same location on the same loading layer.
Area Loads can overlap but cannot have the exact same shape and location
on the same loading layer.
RAM Concept
139
Chapter 19
Overlapping loads are additive.
19.3 Point load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point load properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the point load
and the slab surface.
Fx Point force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
Fy Point force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal force).
Fz Point force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical force).
Mx Point moment about the global x-axis.
My Point moment about the global y-axis.
Note: Although point loads need not be located at a finite element node, you
should consider locating very large loads at nodes. Point loads must be
located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Specs > Signs.

Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments unless the
Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the load at the slab centroid.
19.4 Drawing point loads

Each point load is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
To draw a point load:
1 Choose the Point Load tool (
).
2 Click at the load location.
140
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
19.5 Line load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line load properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the line load
Fx Line force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
Fy Line force in the direction of global y-axis at each end (horizontal force).
Fz Line force in the direction of global z-axis at each end (vertical force).
Mx Line moment about the global x-axis at each end.
My Line moment about the global y-axis at each end.
Note: If the line force (or moment) is uniform you need to enter only one
value. Otherwise you need to enter two values separated by a comma (ends 1
and 2). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment). See Figure
19-1.
Note: Although line loads need not be located at a finite element node, you
should consider locating very large loads at element edges. Line loads must
be completely located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you
violate this rule.

RAM Concept
141
Chapter 19
Figure 19-1 Line load properties varying from 10 to 20 units.
19.6 Drawing line loads

The line load tool is very similar to the point load tool except that it uses two
points rather than one point.
To draw a Line Load:
1 Choose the Line Load tool (
).
2 Click at the load end points.
19.7 Area load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept area load properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the area load
142
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
Fx Area force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
Fy Area force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal force).
Fz Area force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical force).
Mx Area moment about the global x-axis.
My Area moment about the global y-axis.
Note: If the area force (or moment) is uniform you need to enter only one
value.
Note: The area force (or moment) can linearly vary in any direction. The
area force variation could be for snowdrift, or sloping soil.
Note: If the area force (or moment) varies you need to enter three values,
separated by commas (corners 1, 2 and 3). This allows linear variation of the
line force (or moment) in two directions. See Figure 19-2.
Note: If you use the Quad-Area Load tool to specify a varying area force (or
moment), Concept calculates the unique value of the fourth corner (three
points define a plane).
Note: Area loads must be at least partially located on finite elements;

Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule. Concept ignores any part of
an area load not on a finite element.
RAM Concept
143
Chapter 19
Figure 19-2 Area load properties varying from 10 to 20 to 30 units at the first three corners. For
quad areas, Concept calculates the fourth corner value.
19.8 Drawing area loads

Use the Tri-Area Load tool (
locate the area load corners.
) or the Quad-Area Load tool (
) and
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it is satisfactory to
make the load oversize. RAM Concept ignores any part of an area load that
is not on a floor element. Exaggerating the size too much affects the
automatic printing and zooming bounds.
To draw a tri-area load:
1 Choose the Tri-Area Load tool (
).
2 Click at the three corner point locations of the area load.

To draw a quad-area load:
1 Choose the Quad-Area Load tool (
144
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
2 Click at the four corner point locations of the area load.
19.9 Copying loads

You can copy loads from one Loading plan to another. This is convenient
since in practice most loads have values for more than one loading.
To copy a load from one loading to another:
1 Select the load and choose Edit > Copy.

2 Open the loading plan to which you wish to paste.
3 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new load in the same plan location as
the original load. The pasted load is the active selection.

4 Edit the properties of the new load.
Note: You can copy, paste and edit multiple loads simultaneously.
RAM Concept
145
Chapter 19
146
RAM Concept
Chapter 20
20 Creating Pattern Loading

RAM Concept generates pattern loadings based upon the load patterns that
you draw. About load pattern on page 59 explains the principle of load
pattern.
20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use

Mathematically, there could a large number of floor pattern loadings, which
would all have different results. For practical reasons, the maximum number
of load patterns is ten. This allows you to draw five load patterns in each
direction.
Typical pattern loading configurations are:
Figure 20-1 Beam Pattern Loadings. Note that these will not necessarily produce the maximum
negative moments, but they will produce moments that are very close to the maximum and represent a practical solution in most situations.
RAM Concept
147
Chapter 20
20.2 Drawing load patterns

You draw load patterns as part of the pattern loading process.
To Draw Load Patterns:
1 Choose Layers > Pattern.

2 Open one of the load pattern plans (from Load Pattern 1 through Load
Pattern 10).
3 Double click the Pattern Load tool (
).
4 Specify which pattern number you wish to use (the number should corre-
spond to the load pattern plans number).

Draw the on-pattern areas with a polygon.
5 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.
Return).
7 Repeat for all patterns.
Note: Regardless of which load pattern plan you are using, the pattern
number will be the last one specified. You will need to change this for each
different pattern plan.
20.3 Load pattern filtering

Internally, RAM Concept resolves a pattern loading by determining which
slab and beam finite elements are partially or wholly within the related load
pattern. The loads on these elements (the element loads) are multiplied by
the on-pattern factor. For elements totally outside the pattern, the element
loads are multiplied by the off-pattern factor.
Thus, RAM Concepts calculation pattern areas approximate the pattern
areas that you draw. You should consider this when drawing load patterns
and choosing mesh size as it will affect the actual pattern loadings generated.
148
RAM Concept
Chapter 20
20.3.1 Effect of mesh on load pattern

The finite element mesh regularity and intensity has an effect on the load
pattern process. The following example best explains the process.
Load pattern for four-panel slab
Figure 20-2 To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this load pattern.
RAM Concept
149
Chapter 20
Actual pattern areas for an irregular coarse mesh
Figure 20-3 The point load and some additional area load will be included in the pattern loading.
150
RAM Concept
Chapter 20
Actual pattern areas for an irregular fine mesh
Figure 20-4 With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and there will be less additional area load in the pattern loading.
RAM Concept
151
Chapter 20
Actual pattern areas for a regular coarse mesh
Figure 20-5 This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that closely resembles the load
pattern.
Drawing design strips significantly improves the mesh. See Chapter 16,
Generating the Mesh for more information on improving the mesh.
Note: The mesh becomes more regular if you generate or regenerate after
design strips are drawn.
152
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21 Defining Design Strips

Note: Design strips are perhaps the most important tool in RAM Concept. It
is highly recommended that the designer takes the time to fully understand
what a design strip does, and how to use them. If you use design strips
improperly then the results will be meaningless.
Finite element analysis often produces high peak moments and stress
concentrations which are inappropriate for calculation of reinforcement and
evaluating performance. Code rules are generally intended for strip methods
that assume an averaging (or smearing) of moment and shear across a
designated width, such as a column strip. RAM Concept uses design strips
and design sections to link finite element analysis with concrete code rules.
21.1 Definition of a design strip

A design strip is an object that integrates forces and moments for all load
combinations, across its own width, at specific locations.
21.2 Understanding design strips

You normally draw a design strip for a span, or part of a span, with a logical
tributary width.
Each individual design strip has a user specified number of internal
divisions. RAM Concept subdivides each individual design strip segment
according to the number of internal divisions and locates a design strip cross
section at the start of each division, plus one at the end. The location of the
first and last cross section is dependent upon the Support Width properties.
The length of each cross section equals the width of the design strip at that
location.
The moments, shears and axial forces for each load combination are
integrated along the length of each design strip cross section (and hence
across the width of the design strip). Based upon the properties of the design
RAM Concept
153
Chapter 21
strip, RAM Concept determines which code rules are applicable and applies
them to the integrals of each load combination for all rule sets.
Figure 21-1 Design strips shown with cross sections visible.
Figure 21-2 Moment about the x-axis (Mx) plotted across one design strip cross section.
154
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.3 About design strips

You draw design strips on the Design Strip layer. Usually you draw them
from support to support and the width is one of the following:
nominal tributary or strip width for one-way slabs
nominal tributary or panel width for two-way slabs that are not designed
with column and middle strips (such as for post-tensioned designs based on
ACI 318 or British Technical Report 43)
column strip width, or middle strip width for two-way slabs
flange width of beams
You might find that design strips are difficult to define for complicated
structural geometry. In such cases, you can supplement design strips with
design sections (see Using design sections on page 192).
21.4 Using the Banded and Distributed Design Strip

Plans
RAM Concept separates design strips into two sets named after the tendon
directions: banded and distributed. This grouping is simply a matter of
convenience. As with tendons, you can draw each design strip in any
direction.
There is no requirement to model tendons for design strips to be drawn.
Note: As with all plans, you can rename the Banded Design Strip Plan and
Distributed Design Strip Plan by choosing Layer > Rename.
21.5 Design strip properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept design strip properties:
RAM Concept
155
Chapter 21
Figure 21-3 Design strip segment properties - general
Top Ignore Depth The top concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear
design. See About ignore depths on page 167 for more information on this
important issue.
Bottom Ignore Depth The bottom concrete ignored in flexural and oneway shear design. See About ignore depths on page 167 for more
information on this important issue.
Support Width The dimension of the support parallel to the design strip.
The support width determines where the first and last design strip cross
sections are located. Their locations are at half the support width (measured
in the direction of the span) from the ends of the design strip. This is to
facilitate reduction of moments to face of supports (it is thus important to
start and end design strips at the center of supports). It is conservative to
enter the support width as zero.
Span Set Determines the set the design strips belong to: banded or
distributed.
156
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Internal Divisions for Design Determines how many design cross
sections per span.
For N divisions there are N+1 design cross sections. It is generally advisable
to make N an even number. The upside of more divisions is greater design
accuracy; RAM Concepts ability to find critical design locations and length
of reinforcement is a function of the number of divisions. The downside of
more divisions is that calculating takes longer; for large models, you might
consider using a small number of divisions (say, 4) and then increasing the
number for final design. There is no reason for all design strips to have the
same number of divisions. Should you be designing a transfer beam within a
flat plate it would probably make sense to have more divisions for the beam
design strip.
Consider End 1 as Support These checkboxes allow Concept to
determine your interpretation of spans in the structure. This determination
of spans affects how Concept applies code rules that are span-related,
including determining support regions, span regions and areas used in live
load reduction.
Consider End 2 as Support Similar to above.
Figure 21-4 Design strip segment properties - design parameters
RAM Concept
157
Chapter 21
Design System The design system (beam / one-way slab / two-way slab)
for the design strip.
Minimum reinforcement and other rules are dependent upon what type of
system is in use in the span. For example, the minimum requirements for
beam stirrups are different to those for a one-way slab.
Min. Reinforcement Location Determines the face for minimum
reinforcement.
The choices are:
Elevated Slab: Some minimum tensile reinforcement code rules do not
consider flexural stress conditions; they determine minimum reinforcement
based solely on geometry and the expected tensile face. For example, ACI
318-99 Rule 18.9.3.3 stipulates that the minimum reinforcement at a column
in an elevated slab should be in the top face. This setting ensures RAM
Concept uses that face.
Mat Foundation: Similar to above, you would expect the minimum
reinforcement at a column in a mat to be in the bottom face.
Tension Face: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the tensile
face, or the face with the least amount of compression.
Top: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the top face,
regardless of the concrete stresses.
Bottom: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the bottom face,
regardless of the concrete stresses.
None: No minimum reinforcement is detailed.
Torsion Design The method used for torsion design.
The methods considered are:
Beam
Considers torsion by designing with code beam torsion equations.
As Shear
Assumes torsion is carried entirely by varying shear across the
cross-section core length L.
The shear force per unit length is v = 6 T / L2
158
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
The design shear force is Vd = V +/- 6 T / L
As Bending
Considers torsion by adding the torsion to the bending moment and
designing bending for the combined total Md = M +/- T.
None
Torsion is not considered in any way.
Environment The environment setting affects which service rules RAM
Concept selects in some codes. For example, RAM Concept correlates the
class designations in BS8110 with environment. Refer to the appropriate
code discussion chapter for more information.
This setting has no effect for ACI 318.
Consider Axial Force in Strength Design Uses the net section axial
force in bending design.
This is a very important setting related to the effect of axial force resultants
(not necessarily axial loads) in a floor. If such resultants subject parts of a
floor slab to net tension and other parts to net compression, then there may
be an additional couple (moment) that should be included in design strip
cross section calculations. We generally recommend the consideration of
axial forces in strength design. It usually results in increased design
reinforcement.
Consider as Post-Tensioned Enables RAM Concept to decide which
code rules are used.
This determines if the design strip segment is checked for initial service
design code rules (for the Initial Service LC) and whether RC or PT code
rules are used (some codes do not make this distinction).
Note: If consider as post-tensioned is not used then RAM Concept ignores

tendons in strength calculations.
RAM Concept
159
Chapter 21
Figure 21-5 Design strip segment properties - reinforcement
Top Bar The label used to identify the top face reinforcing bar used for
flexural design.
Bottom Bar The label used to identify the bottom face reinforcing bar used
for flexural design.
Shear Bar The label used to identify the reinforcing bar used for one-way
shear design.
The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar labels (and their
properties) are specified in the Specs > Materials. It is possible for different
design strips to have different bars.
After completing the calculation process, RAM Concept reports design strip
reinforcement requirements based upon the bars specified in the design strip
properties. You can view the required reinforcement area in plots and tables.
Top Cover Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars.
Bottom Cover Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars.
160
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Legs in Shear Reinforcement Determines the area of vertical shear
reinforcement by multiplying the number of legs by the Shear Bar area.
Figure 21-6 Design strip segment properties - live load reduction
Max live Load Reduction See Chapter 38, Live Load Reduction Notes
for information on RAM Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
User specified LLR parameters See Chapter 38, Live Load Reduction
Notes for information on RAM Concepts implementation of live load
reduction.
21.6 Drawing design strips

It is advisable to draw one set of design strips on the Banded Design Strips
Plan, and the other on the Distributed Design Strips Plan.
Design Strips are located by a spine that has a start point and an end point.
RAM Concept
161
Chapter 21
The design strip tools create an initial width of L/4 where L is the distance
between the start and end points. You can adjust this width.
To draw a single design strip:
1 Choose the Design Strip Segment tool (
).
2 Click at the segment spine start point.

3 Click at the segment spine end point.
To draw multiple design strips:
1 Choose the Design Strip Polyline tool (
).
2 Click at the first segment start point.

3 Click at the first segment end point.
4 Click at the second segment end point.
5 Continue to click segment end points until all related segments are drawn.
6 Right click to close the operation.
Note: Start and end points are normally supports. There are, however,
exceptions, such as a design strip used for a pour strip to discriminate
between PT and RC areas.
21.7 Adjusting design strip widths

The width of a design strip is significant and in most cases the default width
is not appropriate. It will thus be necessary to adjust the design strip widths.
You can do this automatically (with auto-width tools) or manually (with
stretch tools).
21.7.1 Automatically adjusting widths

You should not rely on the auto-widening tools without reviewing the widths
they produce. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust strip widths manually
(after using the auto-widening tools) to produce a design strip with logical
widths.
Two tools are available to automatically adjust the design strip widths.
162
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
The Auto Strip Width with Options tool (
) widens design strips
according to various parameters, and is the more powerful tool.
The following parameters are available to adjust the width of each side of the
design strip:
Half-way to adjacent strip or support Moves the strip edge to a line
half-way from the strip spine to the adjacent strip spine (or to a line half-way
to a wall center line).
Meet adjacent strip edge Moves the strip edge to the adjacent strip edge.
Slab edge Moves the strip edge to the nearest slab edge.
L/x Adjusts each side of the strip to be a fraction of the strip length. For
example, if both sides are set to x = 8 then the strip width will be one quarter
of the length.
x*t Adjusts each side of the strip to be a multiple of the slab thickness.
Fixed width Adjusts each side of the strip to be a specified value.
To set the design strip width parameters:
1 Double click the Auto Strip Width with Options tool (
RAM Concept
).
163
Chapter 21
The Auto Strip dialog box appears.
2 Check the parameters you want to affect the strip width (the minimum
width of all checked boxes will be used).

To adjust a design strip width automatically:
1 Select the design strip(s).

2 Click the Auto Strip Width with Options tool (
). This widens the left

and right side of each Design Strip to the minimum value defined by the width
parameters.
The Auto Strip Width tool (
) uses adjacent design strips and walls to
calculate strip widths. It divides the distance between design strip spines and
walls by two. The widths may not be appropriate for beam flange widths and
two-way slab column strips. Irregular geometry can produce impractical
strips. Check that the revised widths are satisfactory.
The Auto Strip Width tool (
) merges design strips to a common
boundary. It is useful for one-way slab design, or post-tensioned two-way
slabs that use the ACI 318 or TR 43 approach.
To merge a design strip using the Auto Strip Width tool:

2 Click the Auto Strip Width tool (
). This widens each Design Strip to

half the distance to the adjacent strip, or wall.
164
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-7 Design strips with default widths of L/4.
Figure 21-8 Design strips after auto-widening.
RAM Concept
165
Chapter 21
21.7.2 Manually adjusting widths

Each design strip has six control points. You can use the stretch tool to adjust
the width by stretching the corner points. The minimum stretched distance
between the center and corner control points is 6 inches (152 mm).
To adjust a design strip width manually:

2 Use the Stretch tool (
) to drag each corner (one at a time) to the desired
position.
Note: The corner points will always define lines orthogonal to the strip
spine. Design Strips can be trapezoidal. You can use relative coordinates to
define exact widths. You can draw User Lines to provide snap points to define
exact widths.
21.8 Improving the mesh

The presence of design strips can significantly improve the regularity of the
finite element mesh. We recommend that once you have completed the
design strips, you regenerate the mesh. See Chapter 16, Generating the
Mesh for more information.
21.9 Additional design strip information

If there is a lot of repetitive geometry in a floor then it should not be
necessary to draw design strips everywhere. You should only use as many as
required to adequately design the floor. For example, if a floor has many
beams of the same loading, tributary area, span and size then there is no need
to draw design strips for each similar beam. This is just as you would not
perform hand calculations for each of twenty identical beams. Not
withstanding, although slabs or beams may appear identical, continuity
effects and other considerations may have a significant influence and the
results could be different.
166
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
When in doubt, draw a design strip, but keep in mind that the number of
design strips affects the calculation time. Some engineering judgement is
always a good thing.
Keep in mind that any area without strips will not have the finite elements
improved when you regenerate the mesh.
In general, design strips for one span set (banded or distributed) should not
overlap.
For beam and slab systems, you might consider placing design strips parallel
and in between the beams. This is because the beam strips only collect the
moments and shears over the width of the strip. If the beams are not
significantly stiffer than the slab, there may be design reinforcement
required for the slab.
21.10 About ignore depths

Design strips use the full concrete section available unless overridden by
Top Ignore Depth or Bottom Ignore Depth.
In many instances, it is inappropriate to use the full concrete cross-section
properties of a design strip segment for flexural and one-way shear design
since some concrete is not effective.
21.10.1 When to use ignore depths

It is sometimes obvious when to use ignore depth. Often, however,
engineering judgement is required to determine the use of ignore depth.
You should decide if the concrete is effective based on code rules and a
practical assessment of the situation. There are too many permutations of
concrete form to lay down rules, and, as such, the following is for discussion
purposes only.
RAM Concept
167
Chapter 21
21.10.2 Examples of concrete form that should use ignore

depth
The following are examples of when design strips should ignore part of the
concrete cross-section:
A two-way slab thickening that the building code deems does not comply
as a drop panel. That is, a drop cap. You should ignore the incremental
thickness of the drop cap below the slab. RAM Concept then only uses the
drop cap for punching checks.
Figure 21-9 Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flexure
A beam or slab that deepens abruptly and the full depth of the concrete
could not be mobilized for flexure. You should enter an appropriate
Bottom Ignore Depth value.
Figure 21-10 One-way slab supported by deep beam that is not fully effective for slab bending.
168
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
A beam or slab that supports an upstand that is not an effective part of the
concrete section. You should enter an appropriate Top Ignore Depth
value.
Figure 21-11 Beam with upstand to be ignored.
21.10.3 How ignore depth works

For every design strip segment, RAM Concept determines a segment
elevation zone that lies between the top and bottom datums.
The datums are determined by the locations of the first and last design cross
sections, and the ignore depth settings, as shown in the following figures.
Figure 21-12 Segment elevation zone for ignore depths set to zero.
RAM Concept
169
Chapter 21
Figure 21-13 Segment elevation zone with appropriate ignore depth settings (for removing the
top plinth and bottom drop cap).
Using logical values of ignore depth define appropriate segment elevation

zones.
21.10.4 Viewing a perspective of design strip cross

sections
Viewing a graphic of the design strip cross sections is a useful way of
checking the validity of the design strip settings.
To view the banded design strip cross section perspective:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Banded Cross Sections Perspective
Figure 21-14 Design strip cross section perspective (for the model in Figure 21-16)
170
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.10.5 More examples of using ignore depth for flexural

considerations
Example 1
The following figures (21-15 to 21-16) show a slab span with a number of
irregularities. Using a single design strip segment with ignore depth values
of zero would produce an inappropriate and unconservative design.
Figure 21-15 Slab span with a single design strip segment.
RAM Concept
171
Chapter 21
Figure 21-16 Cross sections (vertical lines) of the design strip segment. Ignore depths are zero
and support widths equal to the column size. Refer to Figure 21-14 for a perspective of the cross
sections.
Using only one design strip segment will not allow removal of the drop caps
at both columns, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21-17 Segment elevation zone with ignore depth settings removing the top plinth and the
end 1 drop cap, but not the end 2 drop cap.
Using multiple design strip segments allows removal of the drop caps at both
columns and reduction of the sectional depth of the slab in the step.
172
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-18 Possible layout of design strip segments. Segment 2 would be utilized if a tendon
was transitioning through the step.
Example 2
RAM Concept locates reinforcement based upon the covers and segment
elevation zone. Ignore depth settings can ensure that reinforcement bars are
designed at the appropriate depth.
Figure 21-19 Using ignore depth to locate reinforcement bars at the correct elevation.
Example 3
Slabs supported by beams require consideration of support width and ignore

depth.
RAM Concept
173
Chapter 21
Figure 21-20 shows bending moments in a slab perpendicular to a beam. For
such an arrangement the designer needs to decide if the slab should be
designed for the bending moment at the face of the beam, or within the
beam.
Figure 21-20 Slab bending moments
174
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment at the face of beam, then
it is a matter of entering support widths to locate the first design cross
section at that location, as shown below.
Figure 21-21 Support width settings for designing a slab to the face of a beam.
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment within the beam then the
user should consider the actual depth that could be mobilized for bending.
Figure 21-22 Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.
RAM Concept
175
Chapter 21
Figure 21-23 Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for slab bending. Ignore
depth should be used for the slab design strip to utilize a shallower section.
21.10.6 Using ignore depth for shear considerations

RAM Concept may sometimes report unexpected one-way slab shear
reinforcement. In many instances, this is due to the way RAM Concept
designs for shear.
When a concrete cross-section has multiple depths, RAM Concept defines
the shear cross-section, or shear core, as B*D where D is the largest depth
and B the associated width. The shear design calculation uses the entire
shear force and the shear core. This is the desired result for beams, but for
slabs with thickenings, it can produce unrealistic shear calculations. In such
cases, you should consider ignoring some top or bottom depth, as shown in
the following figure.
176
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-24 Using ignore depth to adjust shear core
21.11 Drawing design strips for complicated floors

It is relatively straightforward to rationalize the layout of design strips when
the support arrangement is rectilinear. Geometry that is more complicated
requires further consideration of layout to produce a rational design.
The following discussion does not cover all geometric scenarios but
addresses some common situations.
21.12 Irregular column layouts

Laying out design strips for irregular column layouts requires consideration
of a number of issues.
These include:
RAM Concept
177
Chapter 21
1 Skew angles:
whether banded and distributed design strips should be strictly orthogonal

if not orthogonal, determining a maximum angle deviation
2 If tendons components from two directions are affecting the design strip.
3 Reporting of reinforcement
The following sections discuss these issues.
21.12.1 Design Strip Skew Angles

The following two figures show design strip layouts for non-rectilinear
grids.
Figure 21-25 Design Strips with a maximum skew of 7.5 degrees
178
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-26 Design Strips with a maximum skew of 15 degrees.
It is intuitive that there would be a limit on the skew angle of design strips.
One reference guideline is the Eurocode (EC2: 4.3.1.1 P(8)): For slabs,
deviations between the direction of the principal stress and the main
reinforcement of less than 15 degrees may be ignored.
This suggests that flat slabs / flat plates should be designed for two
directions that are between 75 and 105 degrees apart, which means the skew
angle should not exceed fifteen degrees.
RAM Concept
179
Chapter 21
The following two figures show skewed strips, and possible alternative
layouts.
Figure 21-27 Alternative rectilinear layout for column and middle strips.
180
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-28 Alternative rectilinear layout for design strips for PT slab (designed to ACI 318
or TR 43).
Note: The alternatives shown in Figures 21-27 and 21-28 do not have the
exact strip widths of the skewed layouts.
21.12.2 Effect of tendon components on design strip cross

sections
In many instances the banded and distributed tendons may be detailed
and constructed in a non-orthogonal manner. This is often ignored in hand or
strip calculations but it is a real issue that can affect design criteria such as
service, strength and ductility.
RAM Concept
181
Chapter 21
RAM Concept considers the force components of all tendons that cross a
design strip cross section (or a design section). The following figures show
an example.
Figure 21-29 A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The banded tendons are
not orthogonal to the distributed tendons.
182
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-30 Perspective shows the central cross section is perpendicular to the banded tendons
which are at the low point. Due to the layout the strip collects a component of the distributed tendon which is at its high point. This configuration may cause design issues.
21.12.3 Reporting of reinforcement

The location of design strips affects the way reinforcement is reported. This
may be impact your decisions on how to lay out strips, but is not as
significant as the other issues mentioned.
RAM Concept
183
Chapter 21
Figure 21-31 Reinforcement results for skewed strips (left) and offset strips (right).
21.12.4 Issues with drop panels and other changes in

section
It is usually desirable to check a slab or beam at a change in section. You can
usually do this in two ways:
Adjust the number of internal divisions for design so that one is located
just outside the section change
Draw two design strip segments to meet at the section change
The first option can be tedious to get the right number of divisions. The
figure below shows the second option.
184
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-32 A slab with drop panels that shows (left) how a single segment per span can miss
designing at the section change, and (right) using multiple segments to design at the section
change.
Note: When you terminate design strips exactly at a change in section, RAM
Concept will automatically move the end design strip cross section so that it
does not cross a node.
Note: The end cross sections of a design strip segment never get auto-moved
outside of the design strip segment.
Note: We recommend that you check the design strip cross sections with the
cross sections perspective. Refer to Viewing a perspective of design strip
cross sections on page 170.
Note: RAM Concept will automatically move a design section (not to be
confused with design strip cross section) so that it does not cross a node, but
the resulting cross section location is unpredictable.
21.12.5 Drop panel slabs with skewed design strips
Skewed design strips can present problems at changes in section. This is
because the design cross sections are perpendicular to the design strip spine
RAM Concept
185
Chapter 21
and can create very small shear cores. (See Using ignore depth for shear
considerations on page 176 for further discussion).
The figure below shows a design strips cross section just clipping a drop
panel and creating a very small shear core.
Figure 21-33 A drop panel slab with skewed design strips.
Figure 21-34 Cross sections perspective showing shear cores (light color contrasting with dark)
186
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
You could avoid the problem highlighted above by staggering the strips and
using the stretch tool.
Figure 21-35 Flat slab with design cross sections parallel to drop panels
Note: Some code rules are dependent upon span length. RAM Concept
determines span lengths by measuring the distance between two segment ends
set as Consider end as support joined by one or more segments with
contiguous spines. You should consider this when defining the design strips.
21.12.6 Splitting of design strips
Sometimes a grid layout terminates rows of columns, and requires special
treatment of design strips.
The following figures show two possible solutions using multiple segments
and the stretch tool.
RAM Concept
187
Chapter 21
Figure 21-36 Grid layout showing nominal tributaries.
188
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-37 Two possible layouts for split design strips for a PT slab (designed to ACI 318
or TR 43). Adjacent design strip segments are shaded differently.
21.12.7 Drawing design strips near walls

There are some considerations for drawing design strips near walls.
Omission of design strips parallel to walls
Since a wall is a continuous support, there is usually no need to design a

floor over, and parallel to, a wall for strength.
You may, however, be interested in the minimum reinforcement
requirements and so a design strip could be warranted.
Strips over or under walls will occasionally have unrealistic stress peaks as
the forces and moments are continually transferred back and forth between
the wall elements and the slab elements. For this reason, some designers
eliminate strip segment over and under walls.
RAM Concept
189
Chapter 21
Figure 21-38 Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
Walls with skewed design strips
Skewed design strips are not desirable near walls because they may be
integrating resultants either side of the wall with unconservative results.
Figure 21-39 Design cross sections of skewed design strip straddling the wall. THIS IS NOT
A GOOD SOLUTION.
You could avoid the problem of the straddling cross sections by staggering
the strips and using the stretch tool, as shown in Figure 21-40.
190
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-40 Design strips with cross sections parallel to wall.
21.12.8 Changing from PT to RC design

It is quite common for a floor to have a mixture of PT and RC areas. For
example, a pour strip (an area with no post-tensioning that joins two posttensioned slabs).
For most codes, PT design rules are different from those for RC. As such,
you should use multiple design strip segments in one span. The figure below
shows a pour strip design segment (in gray) that would have the Consider
as Post-Tensioned box unchecked. The box would be checked for the
adjacent design strip segments. For such a scenario, RAM Concept will
design the PT areas for service stress rules and check initial stresses, but not
for the RC areas.
RAM Concept
191
Chapter 21
Figure 21-41 Multiple design strip segments used to model RC pour strip.
21.13 Using design sections

Design sections are the equivalent of one design strip cross section. You
draw design sections manually to supplement design strips.
There are situations where you may choose to use design sections rather than
design strips. This would include:
In some areas, you may only require design information at one cross
section rather than for an entire span.
A design strip may not provide sufficient design information.
A design strip may be inappropriate. For example, a slab step may not be
orthogonal to the span and design strip. In this case, you might draw a
design section parallel to the step.
192
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.14 Design section properties

Design sections have similar properties to design strips. See Design strip
properties on page 155 for definitions and explanations.
Note: RAM Concept reports only reinforcement areas for design sections.
The bar diameter is used to determine effective depth. It is possible for
different design sections to have different bars.
The following properties are unique to manual design sections:
Span Length Used to calculate the following:
Minimum reinforcement rules for some codes.
The upper bound on fps for unbonded tendons based upon the selected
codes criteria (these criteria often include a span length parameter).
Span Ratio Determines the location of the design section relative to
supports and midspan. If the ratio is less than 0.25 then RAM Concept
applies any code rules specific to supports.
21.15 Drawing design sections

When using design sections it is advisable to draw one set on the Banded
Design Strips Plan, and the other on the Distributed Design Strips Plan.
Design sections are located by a line that has a start point and an end point.
To draw a design section:
1 Choose the Design Section tool (
).
2 Click at the design section start point.

3 Click at the design section end point.
Note: You can use relative coordinates to define exact lengths. Alternatively,
you can draw User Lines to provide snap points to define exact lengths.
RAM Concept
193
Chapter 21
21.16 About punching shear checks

RAM Concept can calculate punching failure planes and the punching shear
stresses due to column reactions (Fz, Mx, My).
RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical
sections. For unusual geometries, RAM Concept may not check the
appropriate section and / or may check inappropriate sections that give
higher than appropriate stress ratios. You should review RAM Concepts
selections of potentially critical sections and use engineering judgment to
decide if RAM Concepts selections and the application of the ACI 318
model are appropriate.
21.17 Punching shear check properties

The following is a list of Punching Shear Check properties:
Maximum Search Radius The radius that defines the area RAM Concept
searches for potential failure locations. The analysis is conservative when
you set a very large radius, but this has two detrimental effects: RAM
Concept will need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer to
check that punching location. More importantly, RAM Concept will
consider slab openings that are far from the column in determining the
potentially critical section that may result in a smaller critical section than is
appropriate.
Cover to CGS The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the
top reinforcement. Usually this is the distance from the top of the slab to the
bottom of the top bar. RAM Concept subtracts this distance from the slab
thickness to determine the d distance.
Angle This is the angle of the first ray measured counter-clockwise from the
global x-axis.
Initial Number of Search Rays This determines how many rays RAM
Concept draws to find potential failure locations. A resolution of 30 is
usually appropriate, but if RAM Concept misses an opening or a section
change within the punching zone radius, you may want to increase the
number of rays.
194
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Edge Treatment This determines how RAM Concept treats edges and
openings.
An edge treatment of Sector Voids is always conservative. For columns near
a slab edge, however, the Sector Voids setting stops the critical section
before reaches the slab edge (at a ray from the column center to the slab edge
that has a length equal to the search radius) RAM Concept.
An edge treatment of Failure Planes probably produces better results for
critical sections at edge and corner locations. This setting, however, requires
you to review the results more carefully to ensure that RAM Concept has
checked all the appropriate sections.
An edge treatment of Ignore Edges is generally unconservative. You may
want to try this setting to see if RAM Concept finds a critical section that it
missed with the other settings.
Connection Type This determines which column classification RAM
Concept uses for calculating allowable stresses.
A Corner type uses corner column rules (post-tensioning is ignored).
An Edge type uses edge column rules (post-tensioning is ignored).
An Interior type uses interior column rules (RAM Concept considers the
section as post-tensioned if the P/A exceeds 125 psi).
An Auto type determines if the column is corner, edge or interior type based
upon the total void angle around it. If the void angle is less than 90 degrees
then the column is an interior type. If the void angle is between 90 and 180
degrees then the column is an edge type. If the void angle is 180 degrees or
more then the column is a corner type.
21.18 Drawing punching shear checks

You can draw punching shear checks for all columns simultaneously.
To draw punching shear checks:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.

2 Select the Punching Shear Check tool (
RAM Concept
).
195
Chapter 21
3 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle around the columns. A circle of the
prescribed radius appears at each column in the rectangle.
21.19 A final word on design strips, design sections

and punching shear checks
Design strips, design sections and punching shear checks are extremely
powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you
understand the calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine
the appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under consideration,
and so you can set the tools parameters correctly.
196
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
22 Using Live Load Reduction

RAM Concept can automatically perform live load reduction calculations on
columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design sections per the
requirements of the selected live load reduction code.
22.1 About Live Load Reduction

Most design codes allow the design of members supporting large areas to
ignore a fraction of the live load effects on the member. This live load
reduction is allowed because the probability of all of a large supported area
being simultaneously fully loaded is small. While each code has its own
rules, the common approach is that the larger the supported area, the larger
the allowed reduction, up to a limit.
22.2 Live Load Reduction Options

RAM Concept currently allows six different live load reduction calculation
options:
ASCE 7-02 Reduction using ASCE 7-02, section 4.8.
IBC 2003 Reduction using IBC 2003, section 1607.9.
UBC 1997 Reduction per UBC 1997, section 1607.5.
AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Reduction per AS/NZS 1170.1, section 3.4.2.
BS 6399-1:1996 Reduction per BS 6399, sections 6.1 through 6.3.
None No live load reduction is performed.
RAM Concept
197
Chapter 22
22.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Code

You choose the live load reduction code in the Calc Options.The default live
load reduction code is None, causing no reductions to be used.
To set the live load reduction code:
1 Choose Calc > Calc Options

2 Choose the live load reduction code, as shown below.
Figure 22-1 Calc Options Window
22.4 Live Loading Types

RAM Concept allows four different live loading types. These types are
affected by live load reduction in different ways, depending upon the design
code. The types are:
Live (Reducible) Loading Standard live load reduction is performed
Live (Unreducible) Loading No live load reduction is performed
Live (Storage) Loading Special storage live load reduction is
performed if allowed in the specified code.
Live (Roof) Loading No live load reduction is performed.
198
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
These loading types are specified in the Loadings window. See section 10.2
though section 10.6 of Chapter 10, Specifying Loadings for more
information.
Note: Live (Roof) Loading is reducible in the RAM Structural System, but
not in RAM Concept.
22.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters

RAM Concept uses up to six parameters to determine the allowed reduction
factors:
Loading type - Only certain loading types may be reduced (as is discussed
above)
Member type - Most codes have special reduction rules for certain member
types (such as columns)
Maximum allowed reduction - The user may specify a maximum
reduction value for each member.
Number of levels supported - Most codes consider the number of levels
supported when calculating the allowed reductions. If RAM Concept's
automatic calculation of areas is used, then the number of levels supported is
assumed to be one.
Tributary area - Most codes use the tributary area of the member as the
primary live load reduction parameter.
Influence area - RAM Concept has options for two codes that use the
influence area of the member as the primary live load reduction parameter.
RAM Concept calculates the last three parametric values. You can view the
values on plan as described in To view the column element LLR results
and To view the banded design strip LLR results on page 214.
You can override the calculation by specifying the parameters values. The
next section describes how to edit these values.
RAM Concept
199
Chapter 22
22.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters

You can specify live load reduction values for columns, punching checks,
design strip segments and design sections.
To specify overriding values for number of levels supported, tributary area, and
influence area:
1 Open the appropriate plan

2 Select the object(s)
3 Choose Edit > Selection properties
4 In the Default Properties dialog box (see Figure 22-2):
Click the Live Load Reduction tab

Check the Use Specified LLR Parameters box
Set the values for LLR Levels, Trib Area, and Influence Area.
5 Click OK.
200
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-2 Live Load Reduction Properties
22.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction

See Chapter 38, Live Load Reduction Notes for information on RAM
Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
RAM Concept
201
Chapter 22
202
RAM Concept
Chapter 23
23 Calculating Results
You generally calculate results many times during the modeling and design
process. You can calculate as soon as elements have been generated (e.g.
self-weight deflection) or wait until modeling is close to finished.
It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until all tendons, loads
and design strips are drawn. It makes sense, however, to run the file during
modeling to check for errors. That way you could avoid repeating the same
modeling error.
23.1 Calculating the results

Before you run the calculation, there are a number of options to select. When
you click Calc All (
), the Calc All dialog box appears. You can edit the
settings before clicking Calculate. These same settings are also available any
time in the Calc Options dialog box which you can access by choosing Calc
> Calc Options.
The following describes the calculation options:
23.1.1 General
Auto-stabilize structure in x- and y-directions Auto-stabilization
introduces a small horizontal brace for structures that have no horizontal
restraint. This is only suitable for structures with no external horizontal
loads.
Create viewable self-dead loading This setting controls whether RAM
Concept creates loads that are viewable in plans and perspectives for the
self-dead loading. This setting has no effect on the actual loading
calculations. You would normally leave this unchecked.
Include supports above slab in self-dead loading This includes the
weight of supports (columns and walls) as loads. You should consider that
RAM Concept bases punching shear calculations at columns below on the
total column reaction that includes any loads applied directly above.
RAM Concept
203
Chapter 23
23.1.2 Design code

You can switch design codes during the design process. Note that switching
codes does not automatically change the load factors.
23.1.3 Zero tension iterations

If a mat is flexible or there are large overturning loads then the springs may
initially be resisting tension. You can reduce this tension by iteration.
Zero tension iterations use an accelerator factor to make convergence
faster. An accelerator value of 1 results in no acceleration, while a value that
is too large may result in wild oscillations instead of convergence. RAM
Concept calculates the accelerator value as follows:
accelerator = (Tj / Ti)power maxAccelerator
where
Tj = the tension force offset in iteration j (j = i+1)
Ti = the tension force offset in iteration i
power = the user-controlled Accelerator Power (typically 1.0)
maxAccelerator = the user-controlled maximum allowed acceleration
(typically 1.5)
Iterations to use The number of iterations used in calculations. The higher
the number of iterations, the closer the tension is to zero.
Accelerator Power The power in the above formula; typically this is 1.
Max. Acceleration The maximum allowed acceleration.
23.1.4 Effective curvature ratio

RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio (ECR) at every cross
section:
ECR = Ce / Cg
Where
204
RAM Concept
Chapter 23
Ce = the effective cross section curvature
Cg = the gross section curvature
RAM Concept calculates Ce by the approximate formula:
Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 BSR) Cccs)
where
kc = the concrete material creep factor (often 3.45) = total strain / elastic
strain
BSR = Bransons Stress Ratio
Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and
shrinkage.
See Chapter 37, Section Design Notes for further explanation.
Creep factor kc as defined above.
Shrinkage strain The shrinkage value used to determine long-term
curvature in cross sections.
To calculate results:
1 Choose Calc > Calc All (
).
2 Select options in the Calc All dialog box and click Calc.
Modeling errors are common and you may encounter error messages when
calculating results. If the file runs successfully without errors, the Calc All
icon becomes grayed-out. If errors occur then the calculator does not become
grayed-out.
23.2 About analysis errors

Two types of errors can occur during calculation: fatal and non-fatal. RAM
Concept generates an Analysis Error message if an error occurs.
RAM Concept
205
Chapter 23
If a fatal error occurs, analysis cannot continue. You must correct the
problem, then recalculate. For example, if the structure is unstable then
RAM Concept cannot triangularize the stiffness matrix.
After non-fatal error occurs, you can choose whether to continue the analysis
calculation or not. For example, if a point load is not located on the structure,
you can do one of the following:
continue the analysis and ignore the point load
fix the problem and continue calculation
stop the analysis
23.3 Recalculating
Some or all of the calculation analysis information becomes out-dated when
you edit the model. Click Calc All (
the Calc All option is grayed-out (
) to run a new analysis calculation. If

), the analysis results are current.
When you recalculate, the analysis starts from the point where the
information is no longer valid. For example, if you were to add a load, it
would not affect the stiffness matrix. The recalculation would start with the
analysis of loads and then move on to design. If you were to edit the concrete
elements however, the calculation would start from the beginning.
23.4 Reviewing the calc log

After RAM Concept calculates results, you can review the calc log to check
for detected errors.
To open the Calc Log:
1 Choose Calc > Calc Log.
206
RAM Concept
Chapter 23
23.5 Decreasing calculation time

The time it takes RAM Concept to calculate results is dependent upon a
number of parameters. You have control over some of these parameters.
Desired Element Size
The time to analyze the stiffness matrix is a function of the number of finite
element nodes. You can speed up the analysis time by using larger finite
elements for preliminary work. This means specifying a large Desired
Element Size when generating the mesh.
Design Strip Internal Divisions for Design
The time to design the slab is a function of the number of design strip
segment cross sections and design sections on the slab. Each design strip
segment with n internal divisions produces n+1 design cross sections.
You can speed up the analysis time by using a small number of internal
divisions for preliminary design.
Enveloping
Load patterns and alternate envelope factors produce additional calculations.

The RAM Concept algorithms for enveloping are quite efficient and so do
not slow down the calculations very much. You could, however, speed up the
calculation time by eliminating load patterns and setting alternate envelope
factors to the same as load factors in the Load Combinations window
(Choose Specs > Load Combo to open the Load Combinations window).
Detailed Section Analysis
A cracked section analysis takes significant time. If you are not interested in
these results or they are not appropriate then you can turn the detailed
section analysis off.
To turn off Detailed Section Analysis:

2 Uncheck the Include detailed section analysis boxes.
RAM Concept
207
Chapter 23
208
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24 Viewing the Results

RAM Concept produces a large volume of results from the model analysis.
Taking the time to understand how RAM Concept calculates results and
makes them accessible will make RAM Concept a much more powerful tool
in your workplace.
24.1 Type of results

You can view the results generated via text tables, plans, and perspectives on
layers of the following types:
Loading
Load Combination
Rule Set Design
Design Summary
To locate a particular result, you need to know on which layer it belongs.
Only that layer contains the plans, perspectives and text tables that show
those results. For example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on
the Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the Service LC layer.
24.2 Viewing frequently used results

In general, using plans is the most useful way to view results. Most results of
interest relate to the following:
reinforcement quantities
status
deflections
support reactions
precompression
RAM Concept
209
Chapter 24
load balance
bending moment contours
section stresses (for some codes)
punching shear
bearing pressures
This section explains how to find such results.
Note: When you create a new file without using a template, the file has RAM
Concepts default new file setup. The default new file setup provides preconfigured plans to show some of the results in an organized way. You can change
these plans by editing the visible objects and plots. Keep in mind that this may
void or make irrelevant some of the instructions below.
24.2.1 Viewing reinforcement results

RAM Concept stores the envelope of all required reinforcement for all rule
set designs in the Design Summary folder. There are a number of plans
available to show different reinforcement. The names of reinforcement plans
in the default new file setup match the visible reinforcement.
To view reinforcement
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Reinforcement Plan.
If this plan shows more information than you require, consider using an
alternate plan such as the Distributed Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
To view distributed direction bottom reinforcement
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Distributed Bottom Reinforcement
Plan.
24.2.2 Viewing status

It is possible for a concrete member not to comply with code irrespective of
the reinforcement provided. For example, there is a limit on how much shear
a member can resist. RAM Concept reports a violation when the shear
exceeds the limit.
210
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
Status refers to code violations. When a design strip complies with all code
rules in a rule set design then its status is OK. If there are violations then
the status is Failed or Exceeded (depending on the rule) and RAM
Concept identifies the code rule.
RAM Concept stores the envelope of status for all rule set designs in the
design summary layer folder.
To view the status
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Status Plan.
24.2.3 Viewing deflections

You may be interested in a number of different deflection plans. Usually
these are for vertical deflection but RAM Concept does calculate lateral
deflections and hence these are viewable.
All deflection contour plots use uncracked section (Igross) results. See
Chapter 43, Estimating deflections for more information.
Note: Some deflections are for a loading and others for a load combination.
To view live loading deflection
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Deflection Plan.
To view dead loading deflection
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC > Deflection Plan.
To view service deflection
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection
Plan.
24.2.4 Viewing support reactions

Support reaction plans are available by default for most loadings and some
load combinations.
RAM Concept
211
Chapter 24
Filtering can make trivial reactions invisible.
To view self-weight reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Self-Dead Loading > Reactions Plan.
To view live load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Reactions Plan.
To view dead load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC > Reactions Plan.
To view factored load reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC > Reactions Plan.
24.2.5 Viewing post-tensioning precompression (P/A)

Precompression plans can be useful for viewing the level of tendon prestress
and the effect of restraining supports. The default plans are for the x and y
directions.
To view the precompression in the x-direction
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Balance Loading > Fx Precompression Plan.
24.2.6 Viewing balanced load percentages

You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning
within design strips.
To view the balanced load percentages on the banded design strips plan
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Banded Design Strips Plan
).
3 Check the Balanced Load Percentages box, and click OK.
Note: See Calculating the balanced load percentages on page 393 for
more information.
212
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24.2.7 Viewing bending moment contours

Bending moment contour plans can be useful for understanding the flexural
behavior of complicated floors. The Bending Moment Distribution tool
(
) increases the usefulness of the plan.
To view the factored moments about the x-axis
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC > Mx Plan.
24.2.8 Viewing section stresses

Some codes have concrete stress limits for post-tensioned floors. You may
want to know these stresses for the Initial Service Design and Service
Design. Usually you want to view stresses based upon the design strips
rather than contours, as the design process rarely uses peak stresses derived
from contours.
To view the strip-based initial top stresses
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service Design > Top Stress
Plan.
To view the strip-based initial bottom stresses
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service Design > Bottom
Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based service top stresses
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Top Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based service bottom stresses
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
Note: If too much information is visible then edit the plot. You could make
the capacities invisible, or limit the range of strip numbers
RAM Concept
213
Chapter 24
24.2.9 Viewing punching shear results

RAM Concept does not design reinforcement for punching (or two-way)
shear but calculates the stresses at each vertex of a potential failure plane.
ACI-318 designs compare the calculated stresses to allowable values.
To view the punching shear status
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Punching Shear Status Plan.
To view the punching shear stresses
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Punching Shear Stress Plan.
24.2.10 Viewing live load reduction results

You can view live load reduction results for each member (columns,
punching checks, design strip segments and design sections) and some
loadings.
To view the column element LLR results
1 Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan.

).
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.

To view the banded design strip LLR results
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Banded Design Strip Plan.
).
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
24.2.11 Viewing soil bearing pressures

Files created with Mat foundation checked in the New File dialog box
have bearing pressure plans provided.
When you create a new file with Elevated floor checked in the New File
dialog box or from a template, you can add soil bearing pressure plans.
To view live loading soil bearing pressure
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
214
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
To view service soil bearing pressure
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Soil Bearing
Pressure Plan.
24.3 Viewing other results

There are times when the result you seek is not visible on the default plans.
The following describes how to show such results.
24.3.1 Changing which result objects are visible

In the default new file setup, specific objects are visible by default. You can
modify the visible objects to show less or more results.
To change the visible objects:
).
2 Choose options in the Visible Objects dialog box and click OK
Note: See Controlling views on page 17 for more information.

24.3.2 Changing which results plot
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The
default file setup has specific plot settings for particular plans or
perspectives. You may decide to change the settings to suit your
requirements, or to make the plan easier to read.
To change a plot setting:
1 Choose View > Plot (
).
The Plot dialog box appears.
RAM Concept
215
Chapter 24
2 Make changes and click OK.
Note: The way plans and perspectives are named is often a reflection of the
plot settings used. If you change the plot settings, you might make the names
inaccurate.
Note: You must first open the plan or perspective before you can use the plot
command.
You can modify the plot settings to view different results.
The following example demonstrates plotting the bending moment envelope
on the Strength Design: Reinforcement Plan:
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design > Reinforcement
Plan.
Choose View > Plot (
).
On the Strip tab, check Active.

Select Bending
Check Maximum Moment, and Minimum Moment.
Click OK.
24.3.3 Creating new result plans

You can create new plans for results that are not available in the plans in the
default new file setup. See Creating new plans on page 15 and Creating
new perspectives on page 17 for more information on how to create new
plans and perspectives.
The following example demonstrates creating a Service LC reactions plan:
Choose Layers > New Plan.
Enter a name such as Reactions.
RAM Concept automatically appends the word plan to the name and
prepends the layer name.
Select the Service LC layer, and click OK.
The Visible Objects dialog box appears.
Click OK.
216
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
Choose View > Plot (
).

Select the Reaction tab.
Check Active.
Select Standard.
Check the supports (under Value) for which you want to view reactions.
24.4 Section distribution plots

RAM Concepts section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of
analysis values across any line drawn on the structure. These distribution
plots can be very helpful in understanding the behavior of the structure
(especially for moments and deflections), but they are not intended to be
used for quantitative design purposes.
24.4.1 Distribution plot values

Distribution plots are created using the Bending Moment Distribution tool
(
), Vertical Shear Distribution tool (
), Axial Force Distribution tool
(
) and Selected Plot Distribution tool (
). These plots display
predictions of values along the lines drawn across the slab. RAM Concept
bases these predictions on the calculated results of the individual elements.
RAM Concepts calculation method guarantees that the results for design
strip segments and design sections are in equilibrium with the nodal loads.
The results for plots across elements are not necessarily exact, however, and
can be much less accurate for coarse meshes or elements with high aspect
ratios. Even though RAM Concepts calculation method guarantees stored
elastic energy of the stresses in each element is equal to the energy of the
loads applied to the element, for some oddly shaped elements (such as pointy
triangles), the energy formulation can result in local fictitious stress spikes.
Note that this limitation does not affect design strip segments or design
sections and does not affect RAM Concepts reinforcement calculations.
RAM Concept
217
Chapter 24
24.4.2 Moment distribution plots

You can create moment distribution plots using the Bending Moment
Distribution tool (
). The plot displayed along the drawn line shows the
distribution of bending moment about the axis of the line. The values in the
main 2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot (
) dialog box have no effect
on the moment distribution plot. The integrated moment value shown below
the moment distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot, but does not
include the bending moment that is due to axial forces and variations in the
centroid elevation of the slab (such as the bending moment caused by axial
forces in the web and flanges of a T-beam). You should use design strips and
design sections to determine design quantities as they capture both
components of the bending moment.
The figure below shows a moment distribution plot for My moments drawn
on a contour plot for Mx moments. The distribution plot shows My moments
because the line drawn on the plan is parallel to the y-axis. The distribution
plot has an integrated value of 657 kip-ft and a peak value of 73.9 kips (or
-73.9 kip-ft/foot). The contour plot values have no effect on the distribution
plot values. If you used the Selected Plot Distribution tool (
) instead of
the Bending Moment Distribution tool (

), the contour plot and the
distribution plot would display the same values.
218
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
Figure 24-1 Moment distribution plot showing My moments on an Mx contour plot.
24.4.3 Shear distribution plots

You can create shear distribution plots using the Vertical Shear Distribution
tool (
). The plot displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of
vertical shear force across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any)
controlled by the Plot (
) dialog box have no effect on the shear
distribution plot. The integrated shear value shown below the shear
RAM Concept
219
Chapter 24
distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design
sections provide a more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
24.4.4 Axial force distribution plots

You can create axial force distribution plots using the Axial Force
Distribution tool (
distribution of axial (horizontal) force across the line. The values in the main
2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot (
) dialog box have no effect on the
axial force distribution plot. The integrated axial force value shown below
the axial force distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. Design
strips and design sections provide a more accurate calculation of this
integrated value.
24.4.5 Selected distribution plots

You can create selected distribution plots using the Selected Plot
Distribution tool (
distribution of the values shown in the main 2D plot (controlled in the Plot
(
) dialog box). The integrated value shown below the distribution plot is
the sum of the area of the plot. This integrated value may or may not be
useful depending upon the plotted quantity (for example, the integration of a
top-stress plot is a force/length value, which is largely useless).
You need to take special care when using the Selected Plot Distribution tool
(
) with the max and min axis contour plots (such as a Service LC
Max Bottom Stress Plan). The max and min stress plots show the
maximum or minimum principal value at every point in the slab. At each
point along a selected plot distribution of the principal values, the principal
axes may be different. The integrated value for the distribution plot has
mathematical meaning, but does not have any structural meaning.
If you want to see the distribution of stresses (or moments, etc.) about a
particular axis, you can use the Plot (
) dialog box to set the contour plot
axis (using the Value Plotted Axis) to be the axis of the results you want to
220
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
view. The Selected Plot Distribution tool (

that axis.
) then shows the values for
24.4.6 Effects of averaging

Distribution plots display the calculated results of the individual elements.
At the shared edge of two elements, RAM Concept uses simple averaging.
This produces reasonable results in most cases, but can cause distortions of
the integrated result when RAM Concept averages a small elements result
with a large elements result. The selected distribution plots are additionally
affected by the plan averaging that occurs in the 2D plot controlled by the
Plot (
) dialog box.
This distortion caused by averaging is another reason why you should

always use design strips and design sections to determine design quantities.
24.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of analysis values
across any line draw on the structure. These distribution plots are very
helpful in understanding the behavior of the structure, but you should not use
them for quantitative design purposes. You should always use design strips
and design sections to determine design quantities
24.5 Miscellaneous results information

The following sections are for clarification of some results.
24.5.1 Top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement

RAM Concept shows longitudinal reinforcement on plan with the following
parameters:
number of bars
bar type (as defined as a design strip property)
RAM Concept
221
Chapter 24
length of the bars
The following shows top reinforcement at a column. There are two callouts
because the design strips terminate at the column. The required
reinforcement is different on each side, as often happens. You need to
rationalize this information and detail the bars in a logical manner. The left
hand reinforcement is nine bars, of type #5, each 6.5 ft. long.
Figure 24-2 Design Summary: Banded Top Reinforcement Plan
The following shows bottom reinforcement. The reinforcement is three bars,

of type #4, each 11 ft. long.
Figure 24-3 Design Summary: Bottom Reinforcement Plan
24.5.2 Reinforcement bar lengths

RAM Concept calculates the reinforcement bar lengths by determining
termination points. The termination points are located at design strip
segment cross sections where the bars are no longer required for any rule set
design.
The bar lengths shown on plan do not include development or embedment
lengths.
222
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24.5.3 Shear reinforcement

RAM Concept shows shear reinforcement zones on plan with the following
parameters:
number of spaces in the zone
number of legs per shear reinforcement set
spacing of the sets
length of the zone
The following shows two callouts for shear reinforcement. The first zone is
16.2 ft. long and has 14 spaces with two #4 legs @ 13.9 centers. The second
zone is 6.88 ft. long and has nine spaces with two #4 legs @ 9.17 centers.
Figure 24-4 Design Summary: Shear Reinforcement Plan
24.5.4 Punching Shear Results

Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 44, Punching Shear Design
Notes.
Non-Standard Sections
Some times the punching shear status is Non-Standard Section. This is a

warning, not an error. Non-Standard Section means that at least one of the
critical sections that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not
perfectly fit one of the three ACI cases: interior, edge and corner.
When you get a Non-Standard Section, you need to inspect the critical
sections that RAM Concept has defined, and use your engineering judgment
to determine if you feel they fit the ACI punching model (you should always
visually inspect the critical sections, even if RAM Concept does not flag
RAM Concept
223
Chapter 24
them as non-standard). RAM Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections.
224
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
25 Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The
default file setup has specific plot settings for particular plans and
perspectives. You can customize these settings or create new plans and
perspectives that show your desired plots.
Plot settings are controlled via the Plot dialog which is accessed through the
Plot command (
).
25.1 Setting the plotted results

You may decide to change the settings to suit your requirements.
To change a plot setting:
1 Open the plan or perspective you want to change.

2 Choose View > Plot (
).

3 Select a tab and check Active to make that plot active.
4 Make changes and click OK.
Note: The name of a plan or perspective is often a reflection of its plot

settings. If you change the plot settings, you may want to rename the plan or
perspective.
25.2 Slab
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to display and control
various slab analysis plot quantities such as moment, shear, axial, torsion,
deflections, and area spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or in-plane
shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value. Other plot values
are not dependent upon depth.
RAM Concept
225
Chapter 25
We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without curve
smoothing, contours will be plotted element by element, which can make it
difficult to observe the results of a larger region (also, for some plotted
quantities, nothing will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM
Concept allows you to define a resolution for the selected plot value. Finer
plot resolutions require longer screen regeneration times.
For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the contour lines by
unchecking Use default magnitudes and entering the desired contour
value. For color contour plots, you can set the upper and lower limits of the
contour values by entering the minimum and maximum values.
Slab plots are only available for loading and load combination layers.
.
Figure 25-1 The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
25.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to display and
control analysis reaction quantities. Selecting the Standard context button
226
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
displays reactions corresponding to the standard results (more information
about standard and enveloping results is available in Chapter 36, Analysis
Notes). For the standard results, you can display any number of reactions
for column above/below, wall above/below, point spring/support, line
spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the punching checks. If a
column above and below occur at the same location in plan, and both
Column Above and Column Below boxes are checked, the sum of the
reactions is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls above and
below.
The other buttons in the Context group are for the enveloped results.
Concept displays reactions for columns (above/below) and punching checks
for the envelope result of the selected context. Wall reactions will be
enveloped and available for plotting in future versions.
The standard reaction context values are only available for loading and
load combination layers, while the six enveloped contexts are available for
loading, load combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 25-2 Plot dialog reaction tab
RAM Concept
227
Chapter 25
228
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
25.4 Strip
Checking the Active box in the Strip tab allows you to display analysis
results for the design strips. Each plot value represents the variation of the
selected value at each design strip segment cross section (along the axis of
each strip selected). Plots related to the maximum and minimum moments
and shears can be displayed, enabling the envelope for a particular plot value
to be displayed.
The Torsion value is the torsion about the centroid of the design strip
segment, in equilibrium with the element nodal forces. The Twist value is
the component of the torsion due to the slab twisting moment (Mxy for
design strips parallel to the x- or y- axes) calculated from the element stress
predictions (and is not necessarily in equilibrium with the element nodal
forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use in torsion design.
Definitions of other values can be found in Chapter 36, Analysis Notes.
The standard strip context values are only available for loading and load
combination layers, while the four enveloped contexts are available for
loading, load combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 25-5 Plot dialog reaction tab.
RAM Concept
229
Chapter 25
25.5 Section Analysis

Checking the Active box in the Section Analysis tab allows you to display
analysis and design results for the design strips including moments, shears,
stresses, crack width, and effective curvature ratio. The plotted analysis
results are for the envelope results. They can be plotted against the design
capacity resulting from RAM Concepts final design. Note that some
quantities may not have capacity values defined.
Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design layers.
Figure 25-6 Plot dialog section analysis tab.
25.6 Section Design

Checking the Active box in the Section Design tab allows you to plot top,
bottom, and shear reinforcement quantities corresponding to RAM
Concepts final design or a design for a particular rule set.
Section design plots are only available for rule set design and the design
summary layers.
230
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
Figure 25-7 Plot dialog section design tab
25.7 Punching Analysis

Checking the Active box in the Punching Analysis tab allows you to display
information about the punching analysis including stresses for each critical
section for any of the enveloped force sets. The values displayed are for the
selected critical section(s) with the selected force set, and are not necessarily
the worst case for the column. The most critical punching case can always be
displayed by selecting the Max Stress Ratio button and checking Section 1.
Punching analysis plots are only available for rule set design and the design
summary layers.
RAM Concept
231
Chapter 25
Figure 25-8 Plot dialog punching analysis tab
25.7.1 Punching Shear Results

Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 44, Punching Shear Design
Notes.
There is discussion of Non-Standard Section in Punching Shear Results
on page 223.
232
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
26 Using the Auditor

There will be times when a design result calculated by RAM Concept may
be confusing or unexpected. This could be due to incorrect input, an unusual
set of resultants (for example: a negative moment at mid-span), or a code
rule interpretation. The Auditor assists in displaying design information for
you to review.
26.1 How the Auditor can assist the design process

The Auditor is a tool that displays input data, parameters, resultants and code
specific results for design strip cross sections in text format.
The Auditor displays information that could be useful for:
1 Checking input data such as reinforcement bar cover.

2 Checking calculated data such as the elevation of the center of a
reinforcement bar.
3 Reviewing the rule set designs (service, strength etc.)
4 Checking the envelope of resultants (moment, shear force, axial force etc.).
5 Revising the number of strands in a tendon to satisfy code stress limits.
26.2 About the three design steps

RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its Pass 1 selection of reinforcement. For
most rule sets this is the entire design.
Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its Pass 2 selection of reinforcement
needed in addition to that summarized in step 1b. For most rule sets nothing
happens in this step, but for some rule sets such as shear design and
RAM Concept
233
Chapter 26
ductility design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be known
before the design can be performed.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in
this step) and final analysis.
The Auditor reports the three steps as the following:
Pass 1
Pass 2
Final check
26.3 About the information displayed by the Auditor

The information displayed by the Auditor is for a single cross section of one
design strip.
The Auditor displays the following:
1 Strip and cross-section number

2 Concrete components for a cross section
number of concrete blocks

top and bottom elevation of each block
depth and width of each block
initial and final strengths (cylinder and cube)
initial and final Ec (modulus of elasticity) values
density
inclusion or exclusion of block from shear core
See Concrete Core Determination on page 415 for discussion of shear
core.
3 Reinforcement properties for each bar type
elevation
234
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
yield stress
Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
bar area
bar diameter
4 Tendon properties for each tendon type
elevation of cgs (center of gravity of strand) above datum

ultimate strength (stress)
yield stress
effective stress
Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
area of strand
bonding
R-component [the component of the tendon parallel to the design strip
cross section (perpendicular to the design strip spine)]
S-component [the component of the tendon perpendicular to the design
strip cross-section (parallel to the design strip spine)]
Z-component [the vertical component of the tendon across the crosssection (only used for hyperstatic calculations)]
length
initial concrete strain
duct width
number of strands per duct
cross sectional area per strand
number of ducts
5 Base design envelopes (for each Rule Set Design):
The envelopes for maxima and minima of moment and shear force are
displayed. These are modified, as appropriate, for torsion and axial force
design. The envelopes list the following resultants:
Vr (horizontal shear)
RAM Concept
235
Chapter 26
Ps (axial tension)
Vz (vertical shear)
Mr (bending)
Ts (torsion)
Mz (diaphragm bending)
6 Reinforcement (for each Rule Set Design):
Depending upon the rule set, RAM Concept adds reinforcement to the cross
section.
As Top
As Bot.
As Shear Density
As Shear Spacing
As Shear (density multiplied by spacing)
Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule governed.
7 Cross Section Forces (Analysis)
Depending upon the rule set, the Auditor displays cross section forces and
other information.
Cross Section Strains
curvature
top, centroid and bottom strains
Concrete Forces for each block
top and bottom stress
force
force elevation
Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar
elevation
strain
stress
bar area
236
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
force
Post-tensioning forces for each tendon
elevation
cross-section strain
component cross-section strain (considers tendon angle)
Tendon Force (effective force in cross section plane)
26.4 Using the Auditor

The Auditor can be used for specific rule set designs, or for the design
summary.
To use the Auditor for a rule set design:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design > Selected Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool (
).
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section you wish to audit.
The Auditor window will open.

4 Maximize the window and scroll to find the information you require.
Note: You may find it convenient to make the design cross sections visible
for the purpose of selecting the correct one.
Note: The Auditor will select the nearest cross-section to the point you click.
The selection is independent of whether cross-sections are visible.
Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been performed.
Note: The Auditors results may not be current if the analysis is not current.
(If the Calc All option is grayed-out (
), the analysis results are current).
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Selected Plan.

2 Follow instructions for rule set design above.
RAM Concept
237
Chapter 26
26.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on posttensioning

Certain codes limit the service stresses and designers are required to comply
with the limits. The Auditor displays advice on how much additional posttensioning strand is required in a design strip to satisfy certain code clauses.
This information is accessible from many plans, but the instructions below
are for using the Service Rule Set Design.
To use the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Status Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool (
).
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section which has failed a stress
criterion and for which you require guidance.

The Auditor window will open.
4 Maximize the window and scroll to the text bordered by two lines of
asterisks (top and bottom) near the bottom of the audit.

If the maximum tensile stress is within code then no information will be
displayed. If the calculated concrete tensile stresses exceed the allowable
limit then the Auditor suggests the percentage increase in strand required to
satisfy the stress limit.
238
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Figure 26-1 Auditor text indicating percentage increase required to comply with code.
Note: The precompression and balance effects of a tendon are not necessarily limited to the area (and design strip) where the tendon is located. Due
to the diversion of prestress (bleed of P/A) beyond the design strip the
suggested percentage increase may not be exact.
Note: If there are tendons intersecting the cross-section at an angle other

than ninety degrees then the suggested percentage increase may be
inaccurate.
RAM Concept
239
Chapter 26
240
RAM Concept
Chapter 27
27 Using the Estimate

When preparing a design, it can be useful to know the amount and cost of the
materials used in the model. The estimate window serves this purpose.
The estimate is particularly useful for comparing preliminary schemes. You
can also use it to compare changes made to a design.
RAM Concept automatically calculates material quantities. Specified unit
costs allow supply and installation costs to be calculated
27.1 Viewing the estimate

The Estimate window lists the different material quantities and their unit
costs for supply and installation (labor).
To view the Estimate:
1 Choose Specs > Estimate.
27.2 What the estimate calculates

The material quantities calculated are:
Concrete
The volume of the concrete floor excluding supports.

Formwork
The area of soffit formwork.

Post-Tensioning
The weight of strand based upon tendon plan length. This does not include
stressing tails or allowance for drape.
RAM Concept
241
Chapter 27
Mild Steel Reinforcing
The weight of reinforcement based upon design strip calculations. This does
not include laps, bends, or other bars such as detailing, tendon support or
miscellaneous. The calculation is only as good as the design strips drawn.
As such, consider the quantities judiciously.
27.3 Editing the unit costs

You can only edit unit costs. The estimate separates unit costs into materials
and installation (labor).
To edit the unit costs:
1 Choose Specs > Estimate.

2 Enter the costs for each material.
Note: The costs update when you hit Enter or Tab.
27.4 About unit costs

Unit costs can vary for many reasons, including the following:
Region (labor availability and skill).
Size of the floor and the project.
Formwork system (usually flat slabs are more economical to form than
beams).
Post-tensioning costs are not the same for different systems. Unbonded
systems are often less expensive in some countries, but this may not be true
if large tendons are used in beams.
Large diameter reinforcing bar is generally less expensive than small
diameter bar for materials and labor.
242
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
28 Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization options to help
you create professional printouts and reports. You control the information
included on a page and in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be
printed individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes the printing
features you can use to achieve the result you want and offers techniques for
printing efficiently.
Note: See Determining the fit of plans on page 245 for more information
on setting the print scale of plan windows.
To print a window:
1 Make the window you want to print the active window.

2 Choose File > Print Window.
3 Select the printing options you want. See General printing options on
page 243 for more information.

4 Click Print.
To print the report:
1 Choose File > Print Report

2 Select the printing options you want. See General printing options on
page 243 for more information.

3 Click Print.
Note: To make sure you get the desired printing results, preview the print job
before you print. See Previewing the print job on page 247 for more information.
28.1 General printing options

The Print settings tell RAM Concept what printer to use, which pages to
print, and how many copies you need. Update these settings every time you
print a window or report.
RAM Concept
243
Chapter 28
28.1.1 Printer selection

Specify the printer you want RAM Concept to print on in the Select Printer
section of the Print dialog. With the latest compatible drivers installed, RAM
Concept can print on any Windows printer or plotter connected directly to
your computer or connected via a network. Consult your printer
documentation for information on setting up your printer and selecting the
appropriate printer driver.
28.1.2 Page range

In the Page Range section of the Print dialog box, select which pages to
print:
Use the All option to print all the pages in the report, or all the pages that
are required to print the active window.
Specify the range of pages you want to print. Type a hyphen between two
numbers to print the pages in that range (inclusive). You must type the
numbers separated by hyphens in ascending order (4-7, not 7-4).
28.1.3 Number of copies

In the Print dialog box, the Number of copies option indicates the number of
printed copies of the print job you want. Enter a value from 1 to 9999.
28.2 Print setup options

In the Page Setup dialog box, you can set the printer, page size and source,
default orientation, and margin size for your printed pages. These settings
are stored on your system and are used as the default settings every time you
print.
To change the print setup options:
1 Choose File > Print Setup.

2 Select the print setup options you want.
3 Click OK.
244
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
28.2.1 Printer selection

Click on Printer to select a printer from the Printer section of the Page Setup
dialog. RAM Concept can print on any printer with the appropriate printer
drivers installed.
28.2.2 Paper size and source

Select the paper size and paper source the printer uses from the Paper section
of the Page Setup dialog box. The printer selection dictates the options for
the size and source.
28.2.3 Default orientation

In the Orientation section of the Page Setup dialog, select the default page
orientation:
Use Portrait for a vertical page orientation.
Specify Landscape for a horizontal page orientation.
Page orientation is also customizable for each individual printed window in
the Report Contents window. See Printing optimizations on page 248 for
more information.
28.2.4 Margin size

Set the page margins in the Margins section of the Page Setup dialog. If the
left, right, top, or bottom margin sizes you select overlap, or they are off the
paper, an alert message appears.
28.3 Determining the fit of plans

Plans print according to their Print Area and Print Scale settings. Everything
within the printing area boundary prints using as many pages as necessary to
print at the desired scale.
RAM Concept
245
Chapter 28
To specify the print scale:
1 Select the Print Scale tool (
).
2 Enter the scale in the Print Scale dialog and click OK.
Note: Typically, you want to check Set for all plans in the Print Scale
dialog if you are printing a report.
To specify the printed area on the plan:
1 Select the Print Area tool (
).
2 Click at two opposite corners to identify the rectangular boundary.

To specify the printed area with coordinates:
1 Choose View > Print Area or double click on the Print Area tool (
).
2 Uncheck the option to Automatically calculate printing area and enter
the left, right, top, and bottom coordinates in the Printing Area Setup dialog.
Check Set for all plans if you want this printing area to be used by all plans.
3 Click OK.
28.4 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint

The saved print viewpoint determines how a perspective window prints.
Sometimes a viewpoint that looks good on screen may not appear as desired
in print due to the dimensions of the page. Remember to examine the print
preview carefully after setting the print viewpoint to verify that the scale and
orientation of the model fit on the page as intended.
Use the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
) to save the print viewpoint to what is
visible on screen. This viewpoint does not change unless you reset it. You
can manipulate the model on screen without affecting the saved print
viewpoint. To display the saved print viewpoint, use the Show Print
Viewpoint tool (
).
To set the print viewpoint:
1 Adjust the on screen viewpoint by:
246
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
Setting the relative scales of the coordinate axes using the Scale
tool (
).
Rotating the model with the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
and the Rotate about z-axis tool (
).
Zooming to show the desired portion of the model.

Setting the projection to Parallel Projection (
) or Perspective
Projection (
) and the modeling to Solid Modeling (
Modeling (
).
2 Click Set Print Viewpoint (
) or Wire
).
To show the set print viewpoint on screen:
1 Click Show Print Viewpoint (
).
28.5 Previewing the print job

Preview the print job before you send it to the printer to ensure the images
and text fit as desired on the chosen paper with the specified margin, and
orientation settings. See Print setup options on page 244 for more
information on how to change the page setup.
To preview the active window print job:
1 Choose File > Preview Window.

2 Examine the preview as described in the following sections and click
Close.
To preview the report print job:
1 Choose File > Preview Report.

2 Examine the preview as described in the following sections and click
Close.
RAM Concept
247
Chapter 28
28.5.1 Zooming
Scale the print preview by setting the zoom percentage in the print preview
window. You can choose a zoom factor of 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%,
50%, 25%, 10%, Fit Page or Fit Width, or you can type a numeric percentage
of your choice (between 5% and 500%).
28.5.2 Viewing multiple pages at once

You can view the print preview one, two, or four pages at a time. Use One
Page (
) to view one page of the print job at a time. Click Multi Page
(
) and select 2-up to view two pages at a time or 4-up to view four pages
at once.
28.5.3 Paging through the print job

The print preview automatically opens to the first page in the print job. Use
Next (
back.
) to page forward through the print job and Previous (
) to page
28.6 Printing optimizations

To achieve the best possible results when printing, you may need to
customize the page orientation and appearance settings for the individual
report items (or windows).
28.6.1 Customizing page orientation

You can print each window or report item in RAM Concept in Portrait or
Landscape orientation. The default page orientation is set in the Page Setup
dialog box. See Print setup options on page 244 for more information on
setting the default orientation. You may want some items in a report or a
specific window to print in a different orientation than the rest. Use the
Orientation column of the Report Contents window to specify the orientation
248
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
of an item. Choose Default to use the Page Setup settings, or Portrait or
Landscape to override the Page Setup orientation.
To set the orientation of a particular window or item:
1 Make sure the Orientation column is visible in the Report Contents
window. You may need to widen the window or scroll horizontally.

2 Click on the Orientation column value for the item to toggle between
Default, Portrait and Landscape. A value of Default in the Orientation column

sets the orientation to the default orientation set in the Page Setup dialog box.
28.6.2 Customizing the printed appearance of plans and

perspectives
In the same way that you change the colors, font, and line type of plan and
perspective windows on the screen, you can customize their appearance in
print.
Use the Print tab for schemes in the Appearance dialog to set the appearance
settings for a plan or perspective you wish to print. See Changing colors,
font, and line type on page 19 for more information about appearance
schemes and changing appearance settings.
If you want the printed plan or perspective to have the same appearance
settings as what you see in the respective window, click Set Same As Screen
on the Print tab. In most cases, you want:
background color in printing to be white (no printed background)
print font size to be smaller then the screen font
print line scale to be larger then on screen
To change the printed appearance of a plan or perspective:
1 Make the Plan or Perspective the active window.

2 Choose View > Appearance.
3 Specify options on the Print tab of the Appearance Settings dialog box and
click OK.
RAM Concept
249
Chapter 28
28.7 Changing the report contents

The contents of the report are customizable to suit your specific needs. You
have control over what plans, perspectives and text items are included in a
report and their order and orientation. You change the report contents
through the Report Contents window.
Figure 28-1 In the Report Contents Window, you can change the order of report items, set whether an item is included in the report, and change the printed orientation or an item.
28.7.1 Including items in the report

Any window can be included as an item in the report. Modify the selection
of plans, perspectives and tables to be included in the report via the Report
Contents window. Toggle the Include column value to specify whether an
item is included in the report or not.
For something to print in the report, it requires that its Include value is Yes
and every item above it in the report hierarchy is also Yes. For example, if
you want the Standard Plan on the Banded Tendon Layer to be included in
the report, the plan itself should have an Include value of Yes, the Banded
250
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
Tendon layer should be Yes and the Layers folder should be Yes.
Likewise, with an Include value of No for the Specs folder, RAM Concept
does not include anything in that folder in the report.
This functionality is especially useful if you want to omit everything on a
particular layer from the report. You can do so with one click, rather then
changing the Include value of every plan, perspective, and text table on that
layer to No.
To include or exclude a report item:
1 Make sure the Include column is visible in the Report Contents window.
You may need to widen the window or scroll horizontally.

2 Click on the Include column value for the item you wish to include or
exclude to toggle between Yes and No. A value of Yes in the Include column
includes the item in the report printout while a value of No excludes the item.
Note: If you want to include an item in the report, make sure every item in
the hierarchy above it is also included.
The following is an example list of windows you might include in a report
for an elevated PT slab using the ACI 318 design approach:
Report Cover
Units
Signs
Materials
Loadings
Load Combinations
Design Rules
Estimate
Element: Standard Plan
Element: Slab Summary Plan
Element: Structure Summary Perspective
Banded Tendon: Standard Plan
Distributed Tendon: Standard Plan
Temporary Construction (at Stressing) Loading: All Loads Plan (if used)
RAM Concept
251
Chapter 28
Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
Live (Unreducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
[other live loadings (Storage, Roof) if used]
Service LC: Deflection Plan
Factored LC: Mx Plan
Factored LC: My Plan
Factored LC: Reactions Plan
Long Term Deflection LC: Deflection Plan
Design Summary: Status Plan
Design Summary: Punching Shear Checks Plan
Design Summary: Banded Top Reinforcement Plan
Design Summary: Banded Bottom Reinforcement Plan
Design Summary: Banded Shear Reinforcement Plan
Design Summary: Distributed Top Reinforcement Plan
Design Summary: Distributed Bottom Reinforcement Plan
Design Summary: Distributed Shear Reinforcement Plan
28.7.2 Reordering report items

The order of report items in the Report Contents window is the order they
print in the report. You can reorder items that are within the same folder or
layer by dragging them to a new position. You cannot move items outside
their folder or layer. For example, you can move the Units item to a new
location inside the Specs folder but you cannot move it into the Layers
folder.
To change the location of a report item:
1 In the Report Contents Window, press down on the left mouse button over
the report item you want to move.

2 Drag the report item to its new location and release the left mouse button.
(RAM Concept does not allow you to move a report item outside of its folder
or layer)
252
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
29 Exporting Plans and Tables

You can export any plan or text table in RAM Concept. RAM Concept
supports export of plans as .dwg or .dxf files in AutoCAD R12 through
AutoCAD 2000 format. Tables export as text files, which you can open with
most spreadsheet software.
29.1 Exporting a plan

RAM Concept exports a plan with whatever information is visible at the
time. You need to open a plan and make it the active window before
exporting. You make a plan the active window by clicking on it.
To export the active plan:
1 Choose File > Export Drawing.
The Export Drawing dialog box appears.

2 Choose a name and type for the AutoCAD file and click Save.
The File Units dialog box appears.

3 Select the units for the AutoCAD file and click OK.
29.1.1 Selecting the text size

The exported text size depends on the visible text size on the screen. You can
change the text size to suit the export.
To choose a text size:
1 Choose View > Appearance.

2 In the Font section of the Appearance dialog box, click AaBbZz to select a
font.
The point size of text is 72 times the actual size. Thus, 9 points is one-eighth
of an inch.
3 In the Select Font dialog box, choose the font size and click OK.
RAM Concept
253
Chapter 29
4 Set the font scale to zero and click OK.
Note: Do not change the text size with Enlarge Fonts (

Fonts (
) and Shrink
) before exporting.
29.2 Exporting a table

Text tables export to tab-delimited text files that you can open with most
spreadsheet software.
To export a text table:
1 Open the text table you wish to export.

2 Click Export (at the top of the window).
3 Enter a name for the text file and click Save.
254
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural

System
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural System is referred
to as RSS.
RAM Concept has a function that exports wall and column reactions to the
RAM Structural System.This export capability allows RSS to use Concept's
accurate load distribution to calculate wall, column and foundation gravity
forces. The export capability also allows RSS to consider the effects of floor
tendons on columns and walls for post-tensioned structures.
This export capability only applies to elevated slab models created in RAM
Concept by importing from the RAM Structural System.
Note: The RAM Structural System requires RAM Concrete to consider the
exported Concept reactions.
30.1 About the export of reactions

The RAM Concept force export function transfers column and wall reactions
to the RAM Structural System database.
The export only sets the wall and column reactions for the end of the
columns and/or walls that are touching the elevated slab. Exporting of
reactions does not affect the support axial force of walls and columns above
the slab. The structure above the column or wall determines the axial force.
RAM Concept only exports reactions from gravity loadings imported from
RSS back to RSS. For example, if you add Swimming Pool Loading to a
RAM Concept
255
Chapter 30
Concept file, the export function will not transfer reactions from that loading
to RSS.
Note: RAM Concept does not export Construction Dead Loading reactions,
as they would have no further use in RSS.
Note: RAM Concept never exports lateral loadings (imported from RSS or
otherwise) to RSS.
Note: Loadings in RAM Concept are analogous to load cases in RSS.

30.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead Loading and the
Balance Loading during export
Concept adds the Self-Dead Loading reactions to the Dead Load
reactions during export. This ensures that the RAM Concrete Analysis of the
structure considers the self-weight of the slab.
Note: The RAM Structural System provides the option to have beam and slab
self-weights calculated automatically, or input manually as part of the dead
load case. Conversely, RAM Concept always automatically includes beam
and slab self-weights in its analysis. We recommend that, when using RSS in
combination with Concept, you have RSS automatically calculate the beam
and slab self-weight loads. That will eliminate any confusion regarding
whether self-weight loads are included in the analysis or need to be manually
specified as part of the dead load case, even when some levels are designed
with RSS and some levels are designed with Concept.
RAM Concept does not currently export Transfer loading reactions to
RSS. When analyzing a building with a transfer slab, RSS uses its own
internal distribution of the transfer forces in the slab rather than forces from
Concept's floor analysis. Concepts exported Direct loading reactions will
be used by RSS, if you so direct. See Using RAM Concept reactions in
RAM Concrete on page 259 for further information.
RAM Concept exports the balance loading reactions to a hyperstatic load
case that is only visible in RAM Concrete. Generally, balance forces and
hyperstatic forces are not the same, but for a support that contains no
tendons, however, the balance forces are equal to the hyperstatic forces.
Note: See Post-tensioning loadings on page 390 for a discussion of

balance and hyperstatic loadings.
256
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30.2 About the export process

You can export reactions to RSS at any time after you perform a Calc All
operation and you save the file.
To export to the RAM Structural System
Choose File > Export to RAM Structural System.

A dialog box, as shown in Figure 30-1, opens with a list of RSS story names
to which you can export reactions. Concept labels one story name as Source
Story. This is the RSS story previously imported to create this Concept file.
Concept lists other stories in the RSS file with the same floor type, and
labels them Identical Story or Compatible Story. A story is compatible
with, but not identical to, the source story if it has a different story height,
member sizes, or (for the top story of the type) any columns above it have
different orientations.
Select any combination of stories, and click OK. RAM Concept displays a
log detailing the results of the export operation when the export is
completed.
Figure 30-1 Export to RAM Structural System dialog box
RAM Concept
257
Chapter 30
30.3 About export access and consistency checking

RAM Concept performs consistency checking before the actual export
operation to ensure that it can export reactions correctly. RAM Concept
performs the checks before and after choosing the export stories.
30.3.1 Checks performed before choosing export stories

The first check performed is your access to the RSS file from which the
RAM Concept floor was imported. The export operation can proceed only if
the RSS file exists, it is not currently open in RSS and you are able to access
and modify it.
Concept also checks the RSS file for changes made to the source story since
importation into the Concept file. If someone has made a major change to
the source story, you must reimport from RSS and recalculate results before
exporting. If someone has made a minor change to the source story,
Concept gives you the option of reimporting. Major changes include adding
or deleting columns or walls. Changing a column size is a minor change.
Concept cannot export the file if someone has added columns or walls after
importing from RSS, or if any springs or rigid supports are present in the
Concept model.
30.3.2 Checks performed after choosing export stories

RAM Concept checks each story you choose to export against the RSS file
in detail. If Concept detects any errors, you may cancel the export operation
or return to the story selection window to deselect the stories with errors. If
Concept issues only warnings, you may continue with the export or return to
the story selection window.
Concept generates warnings for any columns or walls above the Concept
slab that do not have matching columns or walls above the export story
selected. This typically only happens at the highest story of the floor type,
where it transitions to a different floor type or the roof.
Concept also generates warnings if a selected story's height is different from
the source story height.
258
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30.4 Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete

Once you export the column and wall reactions to RSS, they become
available to RAM Concrete for analysis and design purposes, but only if you
inform RSS that you want to use them.
To set RAM Concrete to use RAM Concepts reactions
1 Start RAM Concrete

2 Choose Criteria > Column Forces
Select the button at the top to Use RAM Concept Analysis Forces at
selected levels. Select the levels by checking the box in the Use column.
You can use this dialog to review the RSS levels that have Concept forces
and the Concept file name from which you exported the forces. The Read
column displays the date you imported each level from RSS into Concept.
The Saved column displays the date you exported member reactions from
Concept to that level. The Source Story column indicates the source story
of the RSS file used to import data into the Concept file. If the Source
Story, Saved and Concept File entries are empty, then you have not
exported member forces to that level. If the Read entry is empty, then you
have never imported that level to Concept.
Note: RSS uses Concept wall reactions on all levels where Concept column
reactions are used.
Note: After exporting Concept reactions to RSS, you will need to perform a
RAM Concrete reanalysis of the structure before designing any members or
importing any member forces from RSS to Concept (such as for a mat
foundation).
30.5 How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept

link works
The key to the export of Concept's reactions to RSS are the imported walls
and columns and the imported direct gravity loadings.
RAM Concept
259
Chapter 30
Walls and columns that you import from RSS have special RSS identifiers
tagged to them. These identifiers allow Concept to match its column and
wall elements to the corresponding members in RSS. Concept will even
allow you to move the walls and columns slightly (up to 50mm or 2").
Concept will not allow you to export if you add, delete, or significantly
move imported columns or walls (or do not import walls and columns).
Concept does this to ensure transfer of the full equilibrium gravity load
between Concept and RSS.
Note: If you accidentally delete an imported support, or the supports change

in RSS, you can always reimport the walls and columns.
RSS tracks a fixed set of gravity loadings through the structures. These
loadings are Dead Load, Live Load Reducible, Live Load Unreducible, Live
Load Storage and Live Load Roof (when Concept and RAM Concrete are
used the Hyperstatic loading is tracked as well). To ensure compatibility
with RSS, Concept will not allow you to delete these imported gravity
loadings.
Concept does allow you to modify the imported RSS gravity loading and to
add more gravity loadings. Concept assumes that you are fully aware that it
considers only the loads that appear in the imported RSS loadings in the
reactions it exports back to RSS.
260
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
31 Using Strip Wizard

Strip Wizard is a dialog that automates the initial steps in the process of
creating a model in RAM Concept. When modeling a straightforward slab or
beam, you can efficiently use Strip Wizard to enter the structural data
without having to draw in a plan window. With the wizard, you can enter the
spans, tributaries, loads and post-tensioning in the same way you would with
a conventional two-dimensional program. Since entering the structural data
in Strip Wizard is so quick and easy, it is particularly useful for preliminary
design of slabs, beams, and joists.
Strip Wizard uses the structural information you provide to build a model in
a new RAM Concept file. You can then modify the file by drawing openings,
surface steps, point loads, and such using plan windows. Strip Wizard is
deliberately simple, so use it to create the basic structure, and then modify
the structure in plans if necessary.
The authors intend that Strip Wizard be largely for assessment of twodimensional behavior. The (automatic) design results are only for one
direction (the x-axis). Since RAM Concept is a three-dimensional program,
line supports are automatically included along the edges of the model that
allow deflection but no rotation. This closely simulates two-dimensional
behavior.
31.1 Starting Strip Wizard

When you start Strip Wizard, it prompts you to create a new RAM Concept
file. This file is where the wizard generates your model once you enter all the
structural data. Strip Wizard uses all the generic settings defined in the new
file (such as units, materials, loadings, etc). If you want Strip Wizard to use
your custom settings, create the new file from a template. For example, if
you want certain concrete mixes to be available when specifying general
design parameters, you should create the new file from a RAM Concept
template with these concrete mixes.
After you have chosen options in the New File dialog, the Strip Wizard
dialog appears. At this point, you can load previously saved Strip Wizard
settings if you want (see Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings on
RAM Concept
261
Chapter 31
page 271 for more information). To start defining your strip, proceed to the
next page in the wizard by clicking Next.
To start Strip Wizard:
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard.

2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click OK. The Strip
Wizard dialog appears.

3 Click Next to proceed or you can load Strip Wizard Settings (see Loading
and saving Strip Wizard settings on page 271 for more information).
31.2 Specifying general parameters

Specify the structure type, spans and concrete mixes on the General
Parameters page of the Wizard.
Structure Type
Decide what type of structure you want Strip Wizard to create and whether
to use post-tensioning. The floor can be set up as post-tensioned or
reinforced and can be one of the following systems:
Two-way slab
One-way slab
Beam
Joist
Spans
Enter the number of spans for the strip (not including cantilevers). Decide if
you are using start or end cantilevers. Check Asymmetric to allow the
model to have different tributaries on either side of the columns.
262
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
Concrete Mixes
Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for the supports.
Note: The concrete mixes available are the mixes in the new file created
when you started Strip Wizard. If you want to use specific mixes, use a
template when creating the new file.
31.3 Entering span data

The table you see on the Span Data page depends on the information you
entered on the General Parameters page. The cantilevers and spans appear as
rows in the table. The table columns depend on whether you are modeling a
one-way or two-way system, beam system, or joist system.
For this table and subsequent pages, the top data rows name is Typical.
Data entered here automatically copies to the rows below. You can overwrite
the copied data.
31.3.1 One-way and two-way systems

Span length, slab thickness and tributary width define these systems. They
can vary span by span.
Length
The span length from center to center of supports.

Thickness
The slab structural depth.

Start Width
The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For
asymmetric strips, L Start Width is the left start width, and R Start Width is
the right start width.
RAM Concept
263
Chapter 31
End Width
The slab width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L End Width is
the left end width, and R End Width is the right end width.
31.3.2 Beam systems

Span length, beam depth, beam width, slab thickness and tributary width
define these systems. They can vary span by span.
Length

W Depth
The beam web structural depth (including the flange depth).

W Width
The beam web width.

F Depth
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).

Start Trib Width
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the beginning (or left hand end) of
the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib Start Width is the left tributary start
width, and R Trib Start Width is the right tributary start width.
End Trib Width
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span. For asymmetric
strips, L Trib End Width is the left tributary end width, and R End Width is
the right tributary end width.
31.3.3 Joist systems

Span length, web properties (depth, width, spacing and number), slab
thickness and tributary width define these systems. They can vary span by
span. This system does not allow asymmetry.
264
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
Length

W Depth
The joist web structural depth (including the flange depth).

W Width
The joist web width.

F Depth
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).

Pan Start Offset
The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the span to the pan (or
void former).
Pan End Offset
The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the end of the span.
Additional Web Properties
The following properties determine the tributary width for the whole model.
The width cannot vary span by span.
Spacing
The center-to-center spacing of the webs.

Number
The total number of webs.
31.4 Entering support data

The Support Data page is for entering supports above and below. You must
specify supports below but they are optional above.
RAM Concept
265
Chapter 31
31.4.1 Support (above and below) properties

Depth, width, height, bottom fixity and top fixity define the supports. They
can vary span by span.
Strip Wizard interprets a support with a width four or more times the depth
as a wall. Otherwise, it is a column.
Depth
The support dimension parallel to the span.

Width
The support dimension perpendicular to the span (enter zero for round
columns).
Height
The supports height from its base to mid-depth of the floor.

Bottom Fixity
The moment connection at the base of the support.

Top Fixity
The moment connection between the support and the floor.
31.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels

The Drop Caps and Drop Panels page is for entering drop caps and drop
panels for two-way slabs. The page is not available for one-way slabs, beams
or joists.
Strip Wizard uses drop caps for punching shear only; it ignores them for
flexural design. Some codes provide guidance on what dimensions are
required to consider a thickening as a drop panel. Strip Wizard does not
check such rules.
266
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
31.5.1 Drop cap and drop panel properties

Thickness, width, before length and after length define the drops. They can
vary span by span.
It is possible to have drop caps and drop panels at the same support. The
drop cap should be the thicker of the two.
Thickness
The total thickness (structural depth) of the drop. This is not the incremental
increase in thickness.
Width
The drop dimension perpendicular to the span.

Before Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the beginning of the drop to the
support center.
After Length
The dimension parallel to the span from the support center to the end of the
drop.
31.6 Entering the loads

The Loads page is for entering area and line loads in the z-direction for two
standard loadings.
31.6.1 Load properties

Area and line loads can be input for two different loadings on each span.
Dead Area Load
The area load over the entire span.
RAM Concept
267
Chapter 31
Dead Line Load
The line load from the first support center to the second support center for
each span.
Live Area Load
The live load over the entire span.

Live Line Load
The live load from the first support center to the second support center for
each span.
Loadings to use
The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the loads as belonging to
any of the Standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
Dead
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
Live
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file
(except for that used for Dead).
31.7 Specifying the post-tensioning

The Post-Tensioning page is only available if you checked Post-Tensioned
in the Structure Type section of the General Parameters page.
Most of the data entered on this page relates to minimum precompression,
load balancing and tendon cover. Strip Wizard uses this data in conjunction
with data for spans, depths and loads to generate a single profiled tendon.
31.7.1 General PT information

You specify the type of tendon and information that helps to determine the
number of strands.
268
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
PT System
Specifies the size and type of strands for the tendon (as defined in the
Materials Specification of the RAM Concept file).
Stressing
Specifies the stressing (jack) locations. RAM Concept calculates tendon

friction and other losses if jacks are located at one or both ends.
Min P/A
The minimum average precompression required for the concrete. Following

the code minimum does not usually result in the most economical design.
31.7.2 Balance load

Balance load refers to the amount of uplift provided by the tendons. The
industry has traditionally expressed this as a percentage of gravity loads.
Min Balance Load Percentage:
The percentage of the specified load balanced by tendons.

Balance Load Considers:
Specifies the loadings that the balance loading is based upon. The choices
are self-weight of concrete, self-weight plus dead, or total load.
31.7.3 Profiling
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
Straight Profile Distance at Supports
The length of tendon that is horizontal at a support. The dimension is the

total flat distance, not the distance each side of the support.
Round Profiles to Nearest
The profile distance increment. This allows rounding of tendon high and low
points to convenient values. If this value is too large it may cause cover
violations.
RAM Concept
269
Chapter 31
31.8 Specifying reinforcement

The Reinforcement page is for specifying reinforcement bars and general
covers.
31.8.1 Reinforcing bar

You specify the bars from those available in the RAM Concept file.
Top
Name of reinforcement bar used in the top face for flexural design.
Bottom
Name of reinforcement bar used in the bottom face for flexural design.
Shear
Name of reinforcement bar used for one-way shear design.
31.8.2 Reinforcement clear cover

The covers are for bars and tendons. Rounding of tendon profiles could
override the tendon covers.
Top
Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars and tendons.
Bottom
Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars and tendons.
31.9 Completing Strip Wizard

The Completing Strip Wizard page is the final page in the wizard dialog. At
this point, you can choose to save the information you have just entered so
270
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
that you may load it into the wizard later. See Loading and saving Strip
Wizard settings on page 271 for more information.
When you click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page, Strip Wizard
draws your model in the RAM Concept file based on the data you have
provided. The leftmost support of your model is located at the origin (0,0).
Open plans on the Mesh Input, Banded Tendon, and Design Strip layers to
view your model. You cannot view the finite element mesh, however, until
you generate the mesh.
To complete the wizard:
1 Click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page.
31.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results

After completing Strip Wizard, you are ready to generate the mesh and run
an analysis calculation on your model. See the Generating the Mesh and
Calculating chapters for further information.
31.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings

The data you entered into the Strip Wizard can be saved as a Strip Wizard
Settings file (with a filename extension of .cptstrip) and reloaded into the
wizard later. The Strip Wizard Settings file contains only the information
you entered into the wizard pages. Save your Strip Wizard Settings before
you click Finish on the final page of the dialog.
Loading Strip Wizard Settings just sets the values in the Strip Wizard dialog
to the values stored in the Settings file. After you load your Strip Wizard
Settings, you then page through the dialog as usual by clicking Next. You
can change the data in the wizard to create a different strip. This does not
affect the Settings file you loaded. You must save a new Strip Wizard
Settings file if you want your changes to be stored for later use.
RAM Concept
271
Chapter 31
To load strip wizard settings:
1 Click Load on the Welcome to Strip Wizard page.

2 Select the Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename extension of .cptstrip)
and click Open.

To save strip wizard settings:
1 Click Save on the Completing the Strip Wizard page (before you click
Finish).
2 Enter the name of your Strip Wizard Settings file and click Save.
272
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
32 Simple RC Slab Tutorial

This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a single panel
two-way flat plate with uniform loads. Alternative metric values and units
are identified in square brackets [] next to the US units. The metric values
are not exact conversions. The code used is ACI 318-99.
For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files on
page 5.
32.1 Define the structure

You start by drawing the structure and generating the element mesh.
Draw the slab area:
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan.

2 Right click over the plan and choose Grid.
3 In the Grid Setup dialog box:
Set x and y to 1 foot [0.25 meters].

Click OK.
4 Turn on Snap to Grid (
).
5 Double click the Slab Area tool (
) to edit the default properties.
6 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [35 MPa].

Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm].
Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
Click OK.
7 With the Slab Area tool (
) selected, define the four corners of the slab

by entering the following coordinates in the command line or clicking at the
locations:
0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m.]
21, 0 ft. [7.5, 0 m.]
RAM Concept
273
Chapter 32
21, 25 ft. [7.5, 8.5 m.]
0, 25 ft. [0, 8.5 m.]
0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m.] (Or type c in the command line and hit Return).
Hatch the slab area:
).
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.

2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas, and then click OK.
Objects command.
Define the column locations and properties:
1 Double click on the Column tool (
).
2 In the Default Column Properties dialog box:

Set Width to 24 inches [500 mm].
Set Depth to 24 inches [500 mm].
3 Click OK.
4 Define the column locations by entering the following coordinates in the
command line or clicking at the locations:

1, 1 ft. [0.25, 0.25 m.]
20, 1 ft. [7.25, 0.25 m.]
20, 24 ft. [7.25, 8.25 m.]
1, 24 ft. [0.25, 8.25 m.]
You have now defined the slab but the element mesh does not yet exist.
274
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-1 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab area
(hatched), and the columns.
Generate the mesh:
).
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 2 feet [0.6 m].
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still produce
reasonable results, but will significantly improve when we regenerate it later
on.
RAM Concept
275
Chapter 32
Figure 32-2 Element: Standard Plan.

View the structure:
1 Choose Layers > Element > Structure Summary Perspective.

2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
276
) to rotate the floor.
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-3 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
32.2 Define the loads

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically. There is no
limit to the number of loadings than can be specified but this example just
defines Live Loading.
Define live loads:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading > All Loads Plan.
2 Double click the Quad-Area Load tool (
).
3 In the Default Quad-Area Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 50 psf [2.5 kN/m2].

Click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 50 psf [2.5 kN/ m2].
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a
quadrilateral. This shape need not match the slabs exact dimensions, but
should cover the slab.
RAM Concept
277
Chapter 32
Figure 32-4 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
32.3 Create the design strips

Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept because they link finite
element analysis with concrete design. Their properties include
reinforcement bar sizes, cover, and parameters that RAM Concept uses to
determine which code rules are applicable for cross-section design. There
are two directions named Banded and Distributed. These names reflect
common terminology for post-tensioned design, but are also used in RAM
Concept for RC design.
It is normal practice to design two-way RC flat plates with column and
middle strips in two orthogonal directions, and that practice is used here.
278
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Draw banded design strips (column strips):
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Banded Design Strips Plan.
2 Turn on the following snaps:
Snap to Point (
Snap Orthogonal (
).
).
3 Double click the Design Strip Segment tool (
).
4 In the Default Design Strip Segment Properties dialog box:
Set Support Width at end 1 to 24 inches [500 mm].

Click the Reinforcement tab
Change Top Bar to #6 [19M].
Change Bottom Bar to #5 [16M].
Click OK.
5 With the Design Strip Segment tool selected, draw the design strips:
Click at the center of the bottom left column, and then click at the
center of the top left column.
Click at the center of the bottom right column, and then click at the
center of the top right column.
RAM Concept
279
Chapter 32
Figure 32-5 Design Strip: Banded Design Strips Plan (with hatching turned on).
Widen the design (column) strips:
1 Select the two design strips with the Selection tool (

).
).
The design strips expand to meet each other. You now have two design strips
that cover the entire width of the slab. This is generally not satisfactory for
two-way RC design and so a middle strip has to be drawn.
280
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-6 Design Strip: Banded Design Strips Plan (after auto-widening of column strips).
Complete the banded design strips (middle strip):
1 With the Design Strip Segment tool selected, draw the middle strip:
Click at the lower point where the two column strips meet, and then
click at the upper point where they meet.
RAM Concept
281
Chapter 32
Figure 32-7 Design Strip: Banded Design Strips Plan (after drawing middle strip).
Widen the design strips:
1 Select the three design strips with the Selection tool (

).
).
The design strips adjust to meet each other. You now have three design strips
that cover the entire width of the slab. The design strips are two column
strips and a middle strip.
282
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-8 Design Strip: Banded Design Strips Plan (after auto widening of column and middle
strips).
Note: An alternative method is to draw a construction line (using the Line

tool (
)) between the centers of the two lower columns and use Snap to
Midpoint (
) to locate the start point of the middle strip (the Snap
Orthogonal assists in creating a design strip that is parallel to the two already
drawn). This method only requires using the Auto Strip Width tool (
) once,
but we believe the method detailed above is easier.
Draw distributed design strips:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Distributed Design Strips Plan.
2 Double click the Design Strip Segment tool.
3 Click the Reinforcement tab.
RAM Concept
283
Chapter 32
The defaults set up in the Banded Design Strip Plan will have remained the
same. Since the cover cannot be the same for both directions, change it for
the distributed direction.
4 Change the top cover to 2.25 inches [60 mm] and bottom cover to 1.63
inches [40 mm].

5 You should take the same steps to draw distributed design strips as for the
banded direction.
Note: Code rules usually define the width of column and middle strips.
Strictly speaking, a column strip width should not exceed half of the span, and
so in the example we have violated that condition in the short span direction.
You could use the Auto Strip Width with Options tool (
) to comply with
such requirements for column and middle strips.
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much more regular
mesh.
Regenerate the mesh:
).
2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element Standard Plan.
284
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-9 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.

Check for punching shear:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan.

2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool.
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog box:
Change cover to 2.25 inches [60 mm] (the average cover).

Click OK.
4 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing all the columns with
the Punching Shear Check tool.
RAM Concept
285
Chapter 32
Figure 32-10 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan.
32.4 Calculate and view the results

After you run the model, the slab design is complete and you can check the
results of the analysis calculation.
Calculate:
1 Click Calc All (
).
2 On the Calc all dialog box check Dont show this again and click Calc.
Look at reinforcement and design status:
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations
of code limits for ductility, flexural stress (only relates to PT design and so is
286
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
not applicable for this example) and one-way shear. Note that status does not
flag excessive deflections.
Figure 32-11 Design Summary: Status Plan.
RAM Concept
287
Chapter 32
Figure 32-12 Design Summary: Reinforcement Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the six design
strips. It is possible to view all design results on the one plan, but this is
generally discouraged (it can be done by checking Show All in the Visible
Objects dialog box). In fact, designs can often suffer from information
overload if you try to view all reinforcement on the one plan. For this
reason, you can access plans in the Design Summary layer that separate
reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom), direction (banded or
distributed), type (flexural or shear).
3 Decide which plans best convey the results without too much clutter.
288
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-13 Design Summary: Banded Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
You can see that the stress ratio is less than 1.0 and hence punching shear
capacity is satisfactory.
RAM Concept
289
Chapter 32
Figure 32-14 Design Summary: Punching Shear Status Plan.
32.4.1 Deflection
Usually you will be interested in deflections for Service (Dead and Live
Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term (Creep and Cracking Factors
used).
RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours. You can
investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking with ECR plots.
See Chapter 43, Estimating deflectionsfor more information.
View service deflection:
The service deflection contours should be visible (if they are not, check that
you have calculated).
290
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
Figure 32-15 Service LC: Deflection Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot (
) to change Plot Type from
Color Contour to Contour.

Similarly, you can view the Long Term Deflection from the Long Term
Deflection LC layer.
32.4.2 Bending Moments

While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can be useful,
especially for irregular structures. Even though principal moments are
important, the default moment contours plans are for Mx (moment about the
x-axis) and My. This is because most designers detail reinforcement
orthogonally, and the directions are usually the x- and y-axes. You can view
moments about any axes, including the principal axes.
RAM Concept
291
Chapter 32
It is not particularly easy to assess the moment contours. This is why Plot
Distribution Tools are so useful.
View Factored LC Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC > Mx Plan.
The Mx contours should be visible.

2 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
3 Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool (
).
4 Click first at the top of the structure and again on the bottom side.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn.
5 Now click from left to right across the structure.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel. If you do it near midspan, you
will see that the column strips have higher positive moments than the middle
strip. If you do it through the column centers, you will see how the columns
strip has negative moments but the middle strip has a small positive moment.
Figure 32-16 Factored LC: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
292
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
33 PT Flat Plate Tutorial

This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a post-tensioned
two-way flat plate with uniform loads. The floor is irregular enough to
warrant the use of an AutoCAD drawing.
Alternative metric values and units are identified in square brackets [] next
to the US units. The metric values are not exact conversions. The code used
is ACI 318-99.
This is not a particularly aggressive design. After you have completed the
tutorial, you may wish to make the slab thinner to investigate the
ramifications.
page 5.
33.1 Import the AutoCAD drawing

The AutoCAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept program
directory
Import the AutoCAD file:

2 Select the AutoCAD drawing file flat_plate.dwg [flat_plate_metric.dwg].

3 Select Inches [Meters] (the units used in the AutoCAD file) and click OK.

To use the AutoCAD file you need to make it visible on the Mesh Input
layer.
RAM Concept
293
Chapter 33
Show the drawing on the mesh input layer:

).
Objects command.
3 Click the Drawing Import tab.
4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
Draw the slab area:
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection (

) and Snap to Point (
).

Click OK.
) selected, define the 11 vertices of the slab

outline by snapping to the imported drawings slab corners.
Note: There are two vertices near each other at (86, 27) ft [(26.05, 8.2) m]
and (86, 29) ft [(26.05, 8.8) m]. Cursor plan coordinates display next to the
command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point (or type c in the
command line and hit Return).
294
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
Change Thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].

Change the Priority to 2.
Click OK.
) selected, define the four drop caps with four
or five vertices as appropriate.

Draw the balcony slab area:
Change Thickness to 8 inches [200 mm].
RAM Concept
295
Chapter 33
Change Surface Elevation to -2 inches [-50 mm], and leave Priority
as 2.
Click OK.
) selected, define the six vertices of the

balcony outline by clicking at each vertex, and then click at your starting
point.
Figure 33-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the opening:
1 Select the Slab Opening tool (
).
2 Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and
then click at your starting point.
296
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-3 The opening on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.

Hatch the slab areas:
).
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.

2 Check Hatching under Slab Areas.
3 Check Hatching under Slab Openings, and then click OK.
Objects command.
1 Turn on Snap to Center (
).
).

Set Depth to 24 inches [600 mm].
RAM Concept
297
Chapter 33
4 Click OK.
5 Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on the imported
drawing.
Define the wall location and properties:

2 Double click on the Wall tool (
).
).
3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:

4 Click OK.
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on the centerline.
6 Place the cursor near (29.5, 87) ft [(8.8, 26.2) m] and it will snap to where
the center of the wall intersects the edge of the slab, and click.
7 Place the cursor near the column at C-2 (and it will snap orthogonally) and
click.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
298
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and
opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Generate the mesh:
).
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 3 feet [1 m].
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:
reasonable results, but will significantly improve when you regenerate it
later on.
RAM Concept
299
Chapter 33
Figure 33-5 Element: Standard Plan.

View the structure:

Figure 33-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
300
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
33.3 Define the post-tensioning

RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called banded and distributed. In a
number of countries, it is common to use the banding technique for
detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding means concentrating the
tendons over support points in one direction, and distributing them
uniformly in the orthogonal direction.
Note: Distributed is also referred to as the uniform direction.

Note: Many instructions reference grid intersections. You may choose to
make the AutoCAD drawing visible on the appropriate plans, as explained in
the Define the structure section.
Note: The next tutorial explains the use of Strip Wizard to establish an
estimate of the number of strands required for the critical band.
Define the banded tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Banded Tendon > Standard Plan.

2 Double click the Tendon Polyline tool (
) to edit its default properties.
3 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
Set Strands per Tendon to 9.

Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches [220 mm].
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand determines these
profiles.
4 With the Tendon Polyline tool (
) selected, draw a tendon at the bottom
edge:
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1.
Click at the center of the column at A-2.
Right click, and then click Enter.
).
) selected, draw a tendon at the top
edge:
RAM Concept
301
Chapter 33
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection D-4.
Click at the center of the column at D-3.
Click at the center of the wall at (29.38, 86) ft [(8.825, 26) m].
7 Turn off Snap Orthogonal (
).
8 Double click the Tendon Polyline tool (
) to edit its default properties.

) selected, draw the next series of
tendons:
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1.
Click at the center of the column at B-2.
) selected, draw the next series of
tendons:
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1.
Click at the center of the column at C-2.
The banded tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile
points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of
the 10-inch [250 mm] slab.
12 With the Selection tool (
), select all of the terminated tendon segments,

other than those over a drop cap, by:
Double clicking at grid intersection B-1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.8-1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4.
302
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4.
13 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup
menu.
14 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 5 inches [125 mm] and
click OK.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments
over a drop cap, by:

Double clicking at grid intersection A-1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
menu.
click OK.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 10-inch
[250 mm] slab, rather than the centroid of the drop cap.
), double click the tendon segment at B-2.
menu.
20 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75 inches [470
mm].and click OK.

), double click the tendon segment at C-2.
menu.
23 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6.75 inches [170
mm].and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location.

), select the tendon segments between C-2 and
C-3.
RAM Concept
).
303
Chapter 33
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box will appear and report the current
balance load (-2.578 kips/ft / -39.11 kN/m).
), select the tendon between C-3 and C-4.
).
28 Input the desired balance load as -2.6 kips/ft [-40 kN/m] in the Calc Tendon
Profile dialog box and click Calc.

The low point (end 2) will adjust to 5.01 inches [120 mm].
), select all the end span tendons between grids
3 and 5.
menu.
click OK.
Note: Steps 24 through 31 first use the Calc Profile tool to determine a low
point that produces a similar average uplift in an end span as the adjacent
span, and then manually changes the low points for practical reasons.
304
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-7 Banded Tendon: Standard Plan

Define the distributed tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Distributed Tendon > Standard Plan.

2 Double click the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
) to edit its default
properties.

Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand determines these
profiles. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to
avoid a clash with banded tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
4 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected, draw tendons in the
bottom left panel:

RAM Concept
305
Chapter 33
5 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.

Set Spacing to 6 feet [2 m], and click OK.
Note: This spacing exceeds some code maxima, but the tendon layout is for
design purposes and not necessarily for detailing.
next panel:
Click at the center of the column at B.8-1.
Set Auto Connect, and click OK.

8 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point (
) and Snap Orthogonal (
).
9 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
balcony:
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1.
Click at the edge of the slab at (0, 59) ft [(0, 17.8) m].
Click at the tendon profile point at (24, 56.6) ft [(7.2, 17.1) m].
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to (24, 59 [(7.2, 17.8) m].
Click at the tendon profile point at (24, 56.6) ft [(7.2, 17.1) m].

menu.
Profile at end 2 to 4 inches [100 mm], and click OK.
306
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
), select the two shortest of the half-span
(cantilever) tendon segments.

menu.
15 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 4 inches [100 mm], and
click OK.
Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat.

next panel:

Set Spacing to 6 feet [2 m].
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
next panel:
19 In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the last choices (alter-
natively, you could select Auto Connect).

next panel:
Note: This sequence is counterclockwise.

Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3.
Enter (31, 86) feet [(9.25, 26) m].
RAM Concept
307
Chapter 33
Turn off Snap Orthogonal (
).


next panel:
Set Layout to Splayed.

Set Spacing to 4.5 feet [1.4 m].
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
next panel:
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3.
Set Auto Connect.

Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click because there
are already two tendon segments connected at that point.
The panel in the top right has two many tendons and some should be deleted.
26 Select the second, fourth and sixth tendons in this panel and press Delete.
308
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
27 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected, draw tendons that
terminate in this panel:

Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
Click at the profile point at (62.67, 58) ft [(18.83, 17.5) m]

Type r0,7 [r0,2.1].
Click at the last tendon profile point at (73.33, 58) ft [(22.17, 17.5)
m].
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to (73.33, 65) ft [(22.17, 19.6)
m].
Click at the last tendon profile point at (73.33, 58) ft [(22.17, 17.5)
m].

menu.
click OK.
The distributed tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile
points. Any profile point at the end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of
the 10-inch [250 mm] slab.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments,

other than those over a drop cap and in the balcony, by:
Using two clicks, place a selection rectangle around the ends of
tendons.
Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure until you have
selected all applicable end tendon segments.
menu.
click OK.
), select all of the terminated tendon segments
over a drop cap, by:

RAM Concept
309
Chapter 33
Double clicking at grid intersection A-1.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3.
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
menu.
click OK.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 10-inch
[250 mm] slab, rather than the centroid of the drop cap.
), double click the tendon segment at B-2.
menu.
39 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75 inches [470 mm]
and click OK.

Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the opening.
), select the tendon segment that passes
through the opening.

41 Choose the Move tool (
).
42 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-1.5,0 [r-.5,0].

), select the tendon segment above the moved
tendon.
44 Choose the Stretch tool (
).
45 Stretch the end of the tendon segment to meet the end of the moved tendon.
46 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.
310
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-8 Distributed Tendon: Standard Plan

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically. There is no
limit to the number of loadings than can be specified.
Since RAM Concept uses superposition of loads, the easiest way to define
areas with increased area loads is to draw a blanket area load over the
entire floor, and then draw the additional loads.
Define the typical live load:
).
Change Fz to 40 psf [2 kN/m2] and click OK.

This tool will now draw area loads of 40 psf [2 kN/ m2].
RAM Concept
311
Chapter 33
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a
should cover the slab.
Define the balcony live load:
).
Change Fz to 60 psf [3 kN/ m2] and click OK.

This tool will now draw area loads of 60 psf [3 kN/ m2].
3 Define two quad areas by snapping four corners of a quadrilateral. In this
situation, it is best for the shapes to match the balconys exact dimensions.
Figure 33-9 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing a preferred balcony load arrangement).
Figure 33-10 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing a satisfactory balcony load
arrangement).
312
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-11 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
Define the other dead loading:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > All Loads Plan.
2 Select all of the loads.
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan,
ready for editing.
6 Select the blanket load.
menu.
8 In the Properties dialog box, change 40 psf [2 kN/ m2] to 20 psf [1 kN/ m2],
and click OK.

9 Hold down Shift, and select the balcony loads.
RAM Concept
313
Chapter 33
The blanket load should be deselected.
menu.
11 In the Properties dialog box, change 60 psf [3 kN/ m2] to -20 psf [-1 kN/
m2], and click OK.
The balcony dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 33-12 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).

determine which code rules are applicable for section design. There are two
directions called Banded and Distributed.
314
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Draw banded design strips:
2 Turn on Snap to Point (
).
3 Double click the Design Strip Polyline tool (
).

Click the Design Parameters tab.
Set the Min. Reinforcement Location to Elevated Slab.
Check the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
Click OK.
5 With the Design Strip Polyline tool selected, draw the first design strip:
Click at the center of the bottom left column at grid A-1.

Click at the center of the bottom middle column at grid A-2.
Click at the center of the bottom right column at grid A-3.
6 Repeat for the second row of columns: B-1, B-2, B-3, B-5.
7 Repeat for the third row of columns: B.8-1, C-2, C-3, C-4.
) and Snap to Midpoint (
).
9 With the Design Strip Polyline tool selected, draw the last design strip:
Click at the center of the top right column at grid D-4.

Click at the center of the top middle column at grid D-3.
Click at the center of a wall segment line.
The Snaps will guide the last point to (29.42, 86) ft [(8.83, 26) m].
Some of the design strips include spans with drop caps. Exclude the drop cap
thickening so that RAM Concept does not use them as part of the flexural
design.
10 Select all the design strips on gridlines A and B.
RAM Concept
315
Chapter 33
menu.
12 Set Bottom Ignore Depth to 10 inches [250 mm] and click OK.
The design strip that terminates at the wall at D2 has a different support
width.
13 Select the design strip segment from D2 to D3.
menu.
15 Set support width at End 2 to 10 inches [250 mm].
Note: If you drew this design strip from left to right, it will be End 1. End
numbers can be made visible with Visible Objects (
).
1 Select the four design strips (10 design strip segments) with the Selection
tool (
316
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
).
The design strips expand to meet each other. You now have four design
strips that cover the entire width of the slab.
Figure 33-14 Design Strip: Banded Design Strips Plan after auto widening.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Distributed Design Strips Plan.
).
The defaults set up in the Banded Design Strip Plan will have remained the
same. Since the cover cannot be the same for both directions, change it for
the distributed direction.
3 Change the top cover to 2.125 inches [55 mm] and bottom cover to 1.5
inches [40].
4 Turn on the Snap to Point (
Snap Orthogonal (
), Snap Nearest Snapable Point (
) and
) snaps.
Click at the center of the bottom left column at grid A-1.

RAM Concept
317
Chapter 33
Click at the center of the middle left column at grid B-1.
Click at the center of the top left column at grid C-1.
Click at the edge of the balcony slab (0, 59) ft [(0, 17.8) m].
6 Repeat for the second column grid: A-2, B-2, C-2 and (30, 87) ft [(9, 26.3)
m]; there is no column for the last coordinate - just snap to the edge of slab.
7 Repeat for the third column grid: A-3, B-3, C-3 and D-3.
8 Turn off Snap Orthogonal (
).
9 Repeat for the last column grid: B-5, C-4 and D-4.
Some of the design strips include spans with drop caps. Exclude the drop cap
thickening so that RAM Concept does not use them as part of the flexural
design.
10 Select the five design strip segments that are partially located over a drop
cap.
menu.
12 Set Bottom Ignore Depth to 10 inches [250 mm], and click OK.
318
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Figure 33-15 Design Strip: Distributed Design Strips Plan (with hatching turned on).
1 Select the four design strips with the Selection tool (

).
).
The design strips expand to meet each other. You now have four design
strips that cover the entire width of the slab.
RAM Concept
319
Chapter 33
Figure 33-16 Design Strip: Distributed Design Strips Plan after auto widening.
mesh.
).
2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element: Standard Plan.
320
RAM Concept
Chapter 33

Check for punching shear:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan.

2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool.
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog box:
Change cover to 1.81 inches [48 mm] (the average cover).

Click OK.
4 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing all the columns with
the Punching Shear Check tool (
RAM Concept
).
321
Chapter 33
Figure 33-18 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan.

Calculate:
1 Click Calc All (
).
2 On the Calc all dialog box check Dont show this again and click Calc.
of code limits for ductility, flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that
status does not flag excessive deflections.
322
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
RAM Concept has noted Non-standard section at five column locations and
Failed at one column. Non-Standard Section is a warning, not an error.
What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept
is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three ACI
318-99 cases: interior, edge and corner. RAM Concept still calculates a
stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Figure 33-19 Design Summary: Status Plan.
RAM Concept
323
Chapter 33
Figure 33-20 Design Summary: Reinforcement Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the eight
design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there is not much
reinforcement. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the
one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Summary layer that separate
reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (banded or
distributed).
324
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
You can see that two stress ratios exceed 1.0 and hence punching shear
capacity is not satisfactory. Design the punching shear reinforcement by
hand or with a proprietary punching reinforcement program.
RAM Concept
325
Chapter 33
Figure 33-22 Design Summary: Punching Shear Status Plan.
33.6.1 Concrete stresses

ACI 318-99 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial
loads. The code bases the rules upon averaging rather than peak values.
Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available in RAM
Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these plots because, in
following the code, RAM Concept does not use the contours directly in
design.
What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the concrete stresses
plotted along the design strips. These are the average stresses based upon the
design strip widths.
View top stress plan:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Top Stress Plan.
).
3 In the Plot Settings dialog box:
Uncheck Minimum Demand and Minimum Capacity.

326
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
Change Max Strip Number to 4.
Click OK
Figure 33-23 Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan.
33.6.2 Deflection
Usually you will be interested in deflections for the Service LC (dead and
live load plus post-tensioning if applicable) and Long Term Deflection LC
(load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage).
See Chapter 43, Estimating deflections for more information.
RAM Concept
327
Chapter 33
The service deflection contours are visible.
Figure 33-24 Service LC: Deflection Plan.

Similarly, you can view the Long Term Deflection from the Long Term
Deflection LC layer.

328
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L > Mx
Plan.
).
4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid intersection D-3.
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-1, and then click
at grid intersection B-3.

This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate
nature of the ACI318-99 post-tension design method.
Figure 33-25 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
RAM Concept
329
Chapter 33
View the balanced load percentages:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Banded Design Strips Plan
).
3 Choose Balanced Load Percentages in the Visible Objects dialog box
and click OK.

See Calculating the balanced load percentages on page 393 for more
information.
330
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34 Mat Foundation Tutorial

This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a mat foundation.
is ACI 318-99.
page 5. You should ensure that you select mat foundation in the new file
dialog box.
Most mats support columns and walls. You may choose to model the
columns and walls but you should be aware that this could affect the mat
behavior. In particular, if there are lateral loads then you should be very
careful in defining the supports above as having no horizontal restraint.
Otherwise, the supports above rather than the soil (springs) below could
resist some lateral moment and shear.
A mat need not have columns and walls modeled above. The reasons to
model columns and walls above include improving the appearance of the
model, and providing snap points for point and line loads. Additionally, a
wall above will stiffen the mat in a beneficial way.
34.1 Import the AutoCAD drawing

The AutoCAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept program
directory.
Import the AutoCAD file:

2 Select the AutoCAD drawing file mat_tutorial.dwg
[mat_tutorial_metric.dwg].
3 Select Inches [Meters] (the units used in the AutoCAD file) and click OK.
RAM Concept
331
Chapter 34

To use the AutoCAD file you need to make it visible on the Mesh Input
layer.
Show the drawing on the mesh input layer:

).
Objects command.
3 Click the Drawing Import tab.
4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
Draw the slab area:
) and Snap to Point (
).

Click OK.
) selected, define the four corners of the slab

by snapping to the imported drawings slab corners.
Note: You can type c to close the polygon instead of entering the last
point.
).
).

Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
332
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Set Support Set to Above.
Set Diameter to 30 inches [750 mm].
Check Roller at Far End.
Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
4 Click OK.
5 Click at the center of all 11 column locations shown on the imported
drawing.
Define the wall location and properties:
).
2 Double click on the Wall tool (
).
3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:

Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
Set Support Set to Above.
Uncheck Shear Wall.
Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
4 Click OK.
5 Define each wall by snapping to the start and end points of the wall center-
lines defined by the AutoCAD drawing.

Define the area spring location and properties:
1 Double click on the Quad-Area Spring tool (
).
2 In the Default Area Spring Properties dialog box:
Set an r-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001 N/mm3].

Set an s-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001 N/mm3].
Set a z-force constant of 250 pci [0.07 N/mm3], and click OK.
Note: You need horizontal springs (r and s) with very small stiffnesses since
there are lateral loads.
RAM Concept
333
Chapter 34
3 Define an area spring over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a
should cover the entire slab.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
Figure 34-1 Mesh Input: Standard Plan

Generate the mesh:
).
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 2 feet [0.7 m].
3 Click Generate.
334
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
View the mesh:
reasonable results, but will significantly improve when you regenerate it
later on.
Figure 34-2 Element: Standard Plan

View the structure:

RAM Concept
335
Chapter 34

Mat loads could consist of point, line and area loads for a number of
loadings (such as live, other dead, north seismic, east seismic, north wind
and east wind). For simplicity, this tutorial will not use area loads (except for
the automatic calculation of self-weight) and will adopt loads belonging only
to live, other dead and ultimate seismic east loadings.
Note: The following instructions are necessarily long to explain each point
load. You may find it easier to look at each of the loadings plans at the end of
each set of instructions to see what loads should be input.
Define the live loads:
2 Right click on the plan and choose Visible Objects (
). Go to the
Drawing Import tab and click Show All.

3 Double click the Point Load tool (
).
4 In the Default Point Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 35 Kips [160 kN].

Click OK.
) and Snap to Intersection (
).
6 Define point loads by snapping to column centers at the following
locations:
A-1
A-3
D-1
D-3
7 Double click the Point Load tool (
).
8 In the Default Point Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 85 Kips [380 kN].

Click OK.
9 Define point loads by snapping to column centers at the following
locations:
A-2
336
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
B-1
B-2
B-3
C-1
C-3
D-2
10 Select the point load at B-2.
11 Choose Edit > Selection Properties (or right-click on the plan to reveal a
popup-menu with the Selection Properties command) to reveal the Point Load
Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 165 Kips [730 kN] and click OK.
12 Select the point load at C-3.
13 Choose Edit > Selection Properties (or right-click on the plan to reveal a
popup-menu with the Selection Properties command) to reveal the Point Load
Change Fz to 65 Kips [290 kN] and click OK.
14 Double click the Line Load tool (
).
15 In the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
Change Fz to 16 kips/ft [230 kN/m].

Click OK.
16 Define a Line Load by snapping to the wall endpoints at the following
locations:
(29.25, 60.75) ft [(8.78, 18.23) m]
(46.25, 60.75) ft [(13.57, 18.23) m]
) and in the Default Line Load

Change Fz to 1.6 kips/ft [23 kN/m].
Click OK.
locations:
(29.25, 50.75) ft [(8.78, 15.18) m]
RAM Concept
337
Chapter 34
(46.25, 50.75) ft [(13.57, 15.18) m]

Click OK.
locations:
(29.25, 40.75) ft [(8.78, 12.13) m]
(46.25, 40.75) ft [(13.57, 12.13) m]

Click OK.
locations:
(46.25, 40.75) ft [(13.57, 12.13) m]
(46.25, 43.25) ft [(13.57, 12.88) m]

Click OK.
locations:
(46.25, 48.25) ft [(13.57, 14.43) m]
(46.25, 53.25) ft [(13.57, 15.93) m]

Click OK.
locations:
(46.25, 58.25) ft [(13.57, 17.48) m]
338
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
(46.25, 60.75) ft [(13.71, 18.23) m]

Click OK.
locations:
(29.25, 40.75) ft [(8.78, 12.13) m]
(29.25, 60.75) ft [(8.78, 18.23) m]
Figure 34-3 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
RAM Concept
339
Chapter 34
Figure 34-4 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan [METRIC]

Define the other dead loading:
2 Select all of the loads.
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan,
ready for editing.
Note: The other dead loads in this tutorial are approximately 15% larger
than their companion live loads. You might choose to use the same values for
the other dead loads as for the live loads. If so, instead of editing the dead
loads, just skip to the east seismic loading.
340
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
). Go to the

7 Select the point loads (hold the Shift key down as you click to add items to
a selection) at:
A-1
A-3
D-1
D-3
menu.
9 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 40 Kips [178 kN], and click OK.
10 Select the point loads (hold the Shift key down as you click to add items to
a selection) at:
A-2
B-1
B-3
C-1
D-2
menu.
12 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 100 Kips [450 kN], and click
OK.
13 Select the point load at B-2.
menu.
15 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 200 Kips [890 kN], and click
OK.
16 Select the point load at C-3.
menu.
18 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 75 Kips [330 kN], and click OK.
RAM Concept
341
Chapter 34
19 Select the line load from (29.25, 60.75) to (46.25, 60.75) ft; [(8.78, 18.23)
to (13.57, 18.23) m].
menu.
21 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 20 kip/ft [290 kN/m], and click
OK.
to (13.57, 15.18) m].
menu.
OK.
to (13.57, 12.13) m].
menu.
OK.
to (13.57, 12.88) m].

menu.
OK.
to (13.57, 15.93) m].

menu.
OK.
to (13.57, 18.23) m].

menu.
342
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
36 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 1.6 kip/ft [23 kN/m], and click
OK.
37 Select the line load at (29.25, 40.75) to (29.25, 60.75) ft; [(8.78, 12.13) to
(8.78, 18.23) m].

menu.
39 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 5.5 kip/ft [80 kN/m], and click
OK.
Figure 34-5 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
RAM Concept
343
Chapter 34
Figure 34-6 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan [METRIC]

Define the ultimate seismic east loading:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Ultimate Seismic East Loading > All Loads
Plan.
). Go to the

).

Set the elevation above the slab surface to 360 inches [9000 mm].
Set Fx to 4.1 kip/ft [60 kN/m].
Set all other items in the dialog box to 0.
Click OK.
344
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
5 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall endpoints:
(29.25, 60.75) to (46.25, 60.75) ft; [(8.78, 18.23) to (13.57, 18.23)

m].
(29.25, 50.75) to (46.25, 50.75) ft; [(8.78, 15.18) to (13.57, 15.18)
m].
(29.25, 40.75) to (46.25, 40.75) ft; [(8.78, 12.13) to (13.57, 12.13)
m].

Set the elevation above the slab surface to 360 inches [9000 mm].
Set Fy to -12.8 kip/ft.
Set all other items in the dialog box to 0.
Click OK.
(29.25, 60.75) to (29.25, 40.75) ft; [(8.78, 18.23) to (8.78, 12.13)

m].

Set Fy to 12.8 kip/ft (+).
Click OK.
(46.25, 60.75) to (46.25, 40.75) ft; [(13.57, 18.23) to (13.57, 12.13)

m].
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a five-storey building. The
load elevation is the average floor height (third storey).
Note: The loads in the y-direction cancel the couple about the mat centroid.
RAM Concept
345
Chapter 34
Figure 34-7 East Seismic: All Loads Plan
346
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Figure 34-8 East Seismic: All Loads Plan [METRIC]

determine which code rules are applicable for section design. There are two
directions called Banded and Distributed.
Draw banded design strips:
).
Check Hatching under Banded Design Strip Segments.

RAM Concept
347
Chapter 34
Go to the Drawing Import tab and click Show All.
Mid Point (
), Snap Orthogonal (
), and Snap to
).
4 Select the Line tool (
) and draw construction lines at the following
locations:
A-3 to B-3
B-3 to C-3
C-3 to D-3
).
Set Support Width at ends 1 and 2 to 30 inches [750 mm].

Click the Design Parameters tab.
Set the Min. Reinforcement Location to Tension Face.
Click the Reinforcement tab.
Set the Top Bar and Bottom Bar to #8 [25M].
Set the Top Cover and Bottom Cover to 2 inches [50 mm].
Click OK.
Click at A-3, A-2, A-1, then snap to the slab area line at (-3, 0) ft [(1, 0) m].
Right click, and choose Enter from the popup menu.
8 Repeat for the second row of columns: B-3, B-2, B-1, and snap to the slab
area line at (-3, 30) ft [(-1, 9) m].

9 Repeat for Grid C: C-3, snap to the line at the center of the wall at (46.25,
60) ft [(13.57, 18) m], snap to the line at the center of the wall at (29.25, 60)
ft [(8.78, 18) m], C-1, and snap to the slab area line at (-3, 60) ft [(-1, 18) m].
10 Repeat for the fourth row of columns: D-3, D-2, D-1, and snap to the slab
area line at (-3, 81) ft [(-1, 24.25) m].
). Go to the
Drawing Import tab and click Show Nothing.

12 With the Design Strip Polyline tool selected, draw the first set of middle
strips:
348
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Snap to the mid point of the construction line from A-3 to B-3.
Snap orthogonally to the column at A-2, A-1 and snap to the slab
area line at (-3, 15) ft [(-1, 4.5) m].
13 Repeat for the middle strip between grids B and C:
Snap to the mid point of the construction line from B-3 to C-3.
Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the first wall, and snap
orthogonally to the centerline of the wall near grid 2.
Snap orthogonally to the column at B-1 and snap to the slab area
line at (-3, 45) ft [(-1, 13.5) m].
14 Repeat for the middle strip between grids C and D: snap to the mid point
of the construction line from C-3 to D-3, snap orthogonally to the columns at
D-2 and D-1 and snap to the slab area line at (-3, 70.5) [-1, 21.13].
RAM Concept
349
Chapter 34
1 Select all of the design strips with the Selection tool (
), being careful
not to select the construction lines (if necessary, make the construction lines
invisible with the Visible Objects (
) command.)
).
The design strips expand to meet each other. You now have design strips that
cover most of the slab (add cantilever strips on the right hand side if you
wish). A few design strips require modification.
350
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Figure 34-10 Design Strip: Banded Design Strips Plan

Edit banded design strips:
).
Check End Numbers under Banded Design Strip Segments.

2 Select all the cantilever strips on the left hand side.
Right-click and choose Selection Properties.

Change Support Width at End 2 to 0.
Change the Internal Divisions for Design to 2.
Uncheck Consider End 2 as Support.
Click OK.
3 Select all of the middle strips (along A.5, B.5 and C.5).

RAM Concept
351
Chapter 34
Click OK.
4 Select the four strips that terminate at the wall near and parallel to Grid 2.

Change Support Width at End 1 to 12 inches [300 mm].
Click OK.
5 Select the four strips that terminate at the wall parallel to Grid 2.5.

Click OK.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Distributed Design Strips Plan.
).
Check Hatching under Distributed Design Strip Segments.

Go to the Drawing Import tab and click Show All.
Mid Point (
), Snap Orthogonal (
), and Snap to
).
4 Select the Line tool (
) and draw construction lines at the following
locations:
A-1 to A-2.
A-2 to A-3.
5 With the Design Strip Polyline tool (
) selected, draw the first design

strip (defaults will remain those of the Banded Design Strip Segments):
Click at A-1, B-1, C-1, D-1, then snap to the slab area line at (0, 84)
ft [(0, 25.25) m].
6 Repeat for the second line of columns:
Click at A-2, then B-2.

Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the first wall.
352
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the middle wall.
Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the last wall (near grid C).
Click at D-2, then snap to the slab area line at (30, 84) ft [(9, 25.25)
m].
7 Repeat for the third line of columns:
Click at A-3, B-3, C-3, D-3, then snap to the slab area line at (60,
84) ft [(18, 25.25) m].
). Go to the
Drawing Import tab and click Show Nothing.

9 Turn on Snap to Mid Point (
).
10 With the Design Strip Polyline tool selected, draw the first set of middle
strips:
Snap to the mid point of the construction line from A-1 to A-2.
Snap orthogonally to the column at B-1, C-1, D-1 and snap to the
slab area line at (15, 84) ft [(4.5, 25.25) m].
11 Repeat for the middle strip between grids 2 and 3:
Snap to the mid point of the construction line from A-2 to A-3.
Snap orthogonally to the column at B-2.
Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the first wall.
Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the middle wall.
Snap orthogonally to the centerline of the last wall (near grid C).
Snap orthogonally to the column at D-2, then snap to the slab area
line at (45, 84) [13.5, 25.25].
1 Select all of the design strips with the Selection tool (
), being careful
not to select the construction lines (if necessary, make the construction lines
invisible with the Visible Objects (
) command.)
).
The design strips expand to meet each other. You now have design strips that
cover most of the slab (add cantilever strips at the bottom of the model if you
wish). A few design strips require modification. In particular, depending on
RAM Concept
353
Chapter 34
whether you have done the tutorial in US or metric units, you may have to
stretch design strips near the walls to meet adjacent design strips (this is a
function of the actual dimensions used in the examples, not the units).
Figure 34-11 Design Strip: Distributed Design Strips Plan

Edit distributed design strips:
):
Check End Numbers under Banded Design Strip Segments.

2 Select all the cantilever strips at the top:

Uncheck Consider End 2 as Support.
354
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Click OK.
3 Select all of the middle strips (along 1.5 and 2.5):

Click OK.
4 Select the six short strips near the walls (bounded by (22.5, 30), (22.5,
60.75), (52.5, 60.75) and (52.5, 30) ft; [(6.75, 9), (6.75, 18.23), (15.75, 18.23)
and (15.75, 9) m]):
Click OK.
5 Select the six strips near the walls (bounded by (22.5, 40.75), (22.5, 81),
(52.5, 81) and (52.5, 40.75) ft; [(6.75, 15.18), (6.75, 24.25), (15.75, 24.25)
and (15.75, 15.18) m]):
Click OK.
mesh.
).
2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept
355
Chapter 34

Calculate:
1 Click Calc All (
).
2 On the Calc all dialog box:
Uncheck Auto-stabilize structure in x- and y-directions.

Check Dont show this again.
356
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Click Calc.
1 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Total Status Plan.
of code limits for ductility, and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag
excessive deflections.
Figure 34-13 Design Summary: Total Status Plan.
2 Choose Layers > Design Summary > Total Reinforcement Plan.
RAM Concept
357
Chapter 34
Figure 34-14 Design Summary: Total Reinforcement Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design
strips. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one plan, or
you can access plans in the Design Summary layer that separate
reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (banded or
distributed).
358
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34.5.1 Bearing stresses

Maximum bearing stress is a critical consideration when designing a mat.
Contour plots of the bearing stresses are available in RAM Concept. These
will vary according to the load combination. Note that the minimum and
maximum bearing values often occur for different load combinations.
View bearing stress plans:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Soil Bearing
Pressure Plan.
RAM Concept
359
Chapter 34
Figure 34-16 Service LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
2 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service Seismic D + L + 0.7E
(Ultimate Seismic East) LC > Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
360
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Figure 34-17 D + L + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic East) LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Note: This load combination has the highest bearing stress.

3 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > 0.6D + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic
East) LC > Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
RAM Concept
361
Chapter 34
Figure 34-18 0.6D + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic East) LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Note: There is effectively zero bearing under part of the mat for this load
combination.
34.5.2 Deflection
You may be interested in deflections for the Service LC (dead and live load).
See Chapter 43, Estimating deflectionsfor more information.
362
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC: D + (1.0/0.0)L >
Deflection Plan.
The service deflection contours are visible.
Figure 34-19 Service LC: Dead + (1.0/0.0)L: Deflection Plan.

RAM Concept
363
Chapter 34
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L > Mx
Plan.
).
4 Click first at grid intersection A-2, and then click at grid intersection D-2.
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection D-1, and then click
at grid intersection D-2.

This shows how Mx varies across the panel.
Please see About plot sign convention on page 44 for more information on
plot signs.
364
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Figure 34-20 Factored LC:1.4D + 1.7L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
RAM Concept
365
Chapter 34
366
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
35 Strip Wizard Tutorial

This chapter walks you through the steps for using Strip Wizard to provide a
preliminary design for the slab (grid B) in the PT Flat Plate Tutorial.
is ACI 318-99.
For more information, see Using Strip Wizard on page 261.
35.1 Start Strip Wizard

When you choose File > Strip Wizard, the New File dialog automatically
opens before the Strip Wizard dialog box is opened. After you create the new
RAM Concept file, the Strip Wizard dialog appears.
Start the Strip Wizard:
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard.

2 In the New File dialog box, set the Structure Type to Elevated and the Code
and Units to ACI 318-99 (US or SI), and click OK.
3 The Strip Wizard dialog box appears; click Next to proceed to the General
Parameters page.
35.2 Set the general parameters

On the General Parameters page, you define the structure type, number and
type of spans, and concrete mixes.
Set the general parameters as follows:
1 Choose Two-Way as the structural system.

2 Check Post-tensioned.
3 Set the number of spans to 3.
RAM Concept
367
Chapter 35
4 Check Asymmetric strip.
5 Set the concrete mix for slabs and beams to 5000 psi [35 MPa].
6 Set the concrete mix for supports to 5000 psi [35 MPa].
7 Click Next to proceed to the Span Data page.
35.3 Enter the span data

Enter the span dimensions and data on the Span Data page. (The type of data
entered depends on which structural system you chose on the General
Parameters page.)
Set the span data as follows:
1 Set the length of Span 1 and 2 to 30 ft [9 m].

2 Set the length of Span 3 to 25 ft [7.75 m].
3 Set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
Note: To set all the values in a column at once, enter the value in the
Typical row (first row) of that column. For example, for the step above, you
can simply type 10 [250] in the Typical row of the Thickness column to
set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
4 Set the left start width of Span 1 to 11.5 ft [3.5 m].
5 Set the left start width of Span 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
6 Set the right start width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
7 Set the right start width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
8 Set the left end width of Spans 1, 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
9 Set the right end width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
10 Set the right end width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
368
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
Figure 35-1 The Span Data page.
11 Click Next to proceed to the Support Data page.
35.4 Create the supports below

Add the four supports in the Supports Below table on the Support Data page.
Set the supports below as follows:
1 Set the depth of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 mm].
2 Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 mm].
3 Set the height of all four supports below to 10 ft [3 m].
4 Leave the bottom and top fixity of all supports below as Fixed.
5 Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels page.
RAM Concept
369
Chapter 35
35.5 Add drop caps

Enter the dimensions for a drop cap at Supports 2 and 4 in the Drop Caps
table (top table) on the Drop Cap and Drop Panels page.
Set the drop cap data as follows:
1 For Support 2 in the Drop Caps table set the following values:
Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].

Set the left width to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
Set the right width to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
Set the before length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
Set the after length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
2 For Support 4 in the Drop Caps table set the following values:
Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].

Set the left width to 33 inches [900 mm].
Set the right width to 12 inches [300 mm].
Set the before length to 33 inches [900 mm].
Set the after length to 0 inches [0 mm].
3 Click Next to proceed to the Loads page.
35.6 Specify the loads

Enter the area loads on the Loads page.
Set the loads as follows:
1 Set the typical Dead Area Load to 20 psf [1 kN/m2].

2 Set the typical Live Area Load to 40 psf [2 kN/m2].
3 Click Next to proceed to the Post-Tensioning page.
Note: You can leave the Dead Line Load and Live Line Load fields blank (no
need to enter zero).
370
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
35.7 Define the post-tensioning

Enter the post-tensioning parameters on the Post-Tensioning page.
Set the post-tensioning as follows:
1 Uncheck the stressing Start and End check boxes.

2 Set the minimum P/A to 140 psi [1 MPa].
3 Set the minimum balance load percentage to 65%.
4 Click Next to proceed to the Reinforcement page.
35.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters

Enter the reinforcement parameters on the Reinforcement page.
Set the reinforcement as follows:
1 Set the top reinforcing bar to #5 [16M].

2 Set the bottom reinforcing bar to #4 [13M].
3 Set the top and bottom reinforcement clear cover to 1 inch [25 mm].
4 Click Next to proceed to the Completion page.
Note: Strip Wizard does not differentiate between cover to tendons and
reinforcement bar, so the strip it creates is not totally consistent with the PT
Flat Plate Tutorial which had 1 inch [25 mm] cover to tendons but 1.5 inch
[40 mm] cover to the top reinforcement.
35.9 Complete the Strip Wizard

Completing the Strip Wizard is the final page of the Strip Wizard dialog box.
You can save the data you just entered in a Strip Wizard Settings file by
clicking Save. When you click Finish, Strip Wizard creates your strip in the
open RAM Concept file.
RAM Concept
371
Chapter 35
Complete the strip:
1 Click Save and name the file in the Save Strip Wizard File As dialog box
that appears.
2 Click Finish.
35.10 Proceed with RAM Concept

After you have completed Strip Wizard, you can proceed with RAM
Concept. After you have created your strip, generate the mesh (with a 3-foot
[1 m] mesh) and run a calculation analysis. Refer to the manual chapters or
the PT Flat Plate tutorial for further instruction.
View your strip:
Figure 35-2 The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Figure 35-3 The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip after the mesh has been
generated.
372
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
Figure 35-4 The completed strip on the Banded Tendon: Standard Plan.
35.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial

The results of the Strip Wizard analysis are similar but not the same as the
PT Flat Plate Tutorial. The reasons for different results include:
Strip Wizard does not automatically consider transverse continuity
effects.
Increased balcony loads not considered by Strip Wizard.
Strip Wizard automatically modified the drapes in spans 2 and 3 (you can
change these if you wish).
Distributed tendons not considered by Strip Wizard.
35.12 Conclusion
Strip Wizard allows you to perform a preliminary or final design for a strip
within a floor. The results are similar to those generated by any strip
program, but not as accurate as a RAM Concept model that considers all of
the irregularities within a floor.
RAM Concept
373
Chapter 35
374
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
36 Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on FEM plate analysis as well as
specific information on how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
36.1 Review of plate behavior

In RAM Concept, slab areas are modeled as plates. Engineers have
historically used approximate methods for designing plates; these
approximate methods assume that the plate behaves in a beam-like manner
in two perpendicular directions. Because engineers have used these
approximate methods for so long, RAM Concepts true elastic plate analysis
results can sometimes be confusing. This section will review plate analysis
theory, so engineers can better understand RAM Concepts results.
36.1.1 In-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Slabs are subject to both in-plane and out-of-plane forces.
In-plane forces stretch and shear the slab, but do not cause it to deviate from
the plane defined by the slab centroid. For horizontal slabs (like those in
RAM Concept), in-plane forces cause stretching, compressing and shearing
of the centroid plane in plan view only.
Out-of-plane forces cause the slab to bend and twist, moving it perpendicular
to the plane defined by the slab centroid. For horizontal slabs (like those in
RAM Concept), out-of-plane forces cause the slab to deflect vertically from
the original centroid plane.
In a horizontal slab that has one continuous centroid elevation, the
equilibrium equations of in-plane and out-of-plane forces are totally
separate. However, if there is a shift in the centroid, the two sets of forces
become interrelated due to equilibrium considerations and must be solved
for simultaneously; RAM Concept handles this interrelation automatically.
For slabs that are not made of a linear-elastic material, the strains due to the
in-plane and out-of-plane forces can no longer be linearly superimposed, so
RAM Concept
375
Chapter 36
the equilibrium equations of the two force systems become indirectly related
through their strains.
This interrelation of the two force systems strains for non-linear elastic
materials can be seen in the simple example of a flat concrete slab that is
subject to transverse loads that cause out-of-plane forces and deflections. If a
uniform in-plane compression force is applied to the same slab, the slab will
have less cracking, smaller out-of-plane displacements and a somewhat
different out-of-plane force pattern.
RAM Concepts global analysis of structures assumes that the concrete
behaves like a linear-elastic material. However, the following discussion of
the in-plane and out-of-plane forces is based purely on equilibrium
considerations, and therefore is valid for any material.
36.1.2 In-plane behavior

In-plane forces can be quantified as an axial stress in two perpendicular
directions, along with a shear stress. For a differential element (with no loads
applied) the stresses are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be

shown to be:
Fx/x + Vxy/y = -Px
376
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
Fy/y + Vxy/x = -Py
where Px and Py are applied loads.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms
of these new axes have a Mohrs circle relationship to the forces in terms of
the original axes:
Fr = Fx cos2 + Fy sin2 + 2Fxy sin cos

Fs = Fx sin2 + Fy cos2 2Fxy sin cos
Vrs = Vxy (cos2 sin2 ) + (Fy Fx) sin cos
This Mohrs circle relationship is based on equilibrium considerations, so it
is valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular principal
axes where the shearing stresses are zero and the forces in the two
perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The
angle between the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point
to point in the slab.
RAM Concept
377
Chapter 36
36.1.3 Out-of-plane behavior

Out-of-plane forces can be quantified as a bending moments about two
perpendicular axes, a torsional moment and vertical shears on the two
perpendicular faces. For a differential element the moments and shears are
shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can

be shown to be:
Vxz/x + Vyz /y = -Pz
Mx/y + Txy/x = -Vyz
378
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
My/x + Txy/y = -Vxz
where Pz is an applied load.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in
terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle relationship to the forces in
terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like
relationship:
Mr = Mx cos2 + My sin2 - 2Txy sin cos

Ms = Mx sin2 + My cos2 + 2Txy sin cos
Trs = Txy (cos2 sin2 ) + (Mx My) sin cos
Vrz = Vxz cos + Vyz sin

Vsz = -Vxz sin + Vyz cos
Again, these relationships are based on equilibrium considerations, so they
are valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular principal
axes where the torsion moments are zero and the bending moments about
the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values.
RAM Concept
379
Chapter 36
The angle between the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from
point to point in the slab.
36.1.4 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Where the centroid plane of a slab changes elevation, there is an interaction
of in-plane and out-of-plane forces. The interaction of the two sets of forces
is simple and is defined purely by moment and force equilibrium. A simple
centroid step is shown in elevation view below:
Fx = Fx
Vxy = Vxy
380
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
Vxz = Vxz
My = My - Fx d
Mxy = Mxy - Vxy d
36.1.5 RAM Concept plotting and relevant axes

RAM Concept can plot its results relative to the x-axis, the y-axis, some
specified axis (specified with an angle) or a maximum or minimum axis. The
minimum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the
minimum value for the quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will
vary from point to point in the plot. Similarly the maximum axis is defined
as the axis at each and every point that gives the maximum value for the
quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to
point in the plot.
36.2 Finite element formulation

RAM Concept uses a linear-elastic finite element formulation based on gross
section properties for its global analysis.
36.2.1 Slab elements

RAM Concept uses a hybrid stress element formulation for its slab elements.
The elements consider both in-plane and bending deformation. 5 degrees of
freedom are used per node. The bending portion of the formulation is similar
to those derived by Cook [Two Hybrid Elements for Analysis of Thick,
Thin and Sandwich Plates, page 287; Some Elements for Analysis of Plate
Bending, page 1463].
36.2.2 Walls above slab

RAM Concept considers walls above the slab to act as beams. It
appropriately analyzes the influence of these walls on the slab, but it does
not report the wall-beam forces nor does it design the wall-beams. Design
RAM Concept
381
Chapter 36
strips and design sections that cross walls ignore both the capacity of the
wall-beam in the cross section and the forces in the wall-beam. Wall-beams
interpret some wall properties differently than walls below the slab:
Fixed Near = wall has torsional stiffness
Fixed Far = (ignored)
Shear Wall = beam has axial stiffness
Compressible = (ignored)
Note that while the prediction of the bending behavior of the slab and beam
is accurate, the division of shear between the wall and the slab is not well
predicted. For a combined wall-beam / slab section the proportion of the
vertical shear force carried by the slab will be between the two extremes:
As / Atotal, and
Is / Itotal
Where
As = cross-sectional area of slab in section
Atotal = cross-sectional area of slab and wall together
Is = moment of inertia of slab
Itotal = moment of inertia of slab and wall together
36.3 Deep beam considerations

RAM Concept was originally developed and optimized for the analysis and
design of complex slab systems; some of this original slab focus remains in
RAM Concept. The behavior of deep beams and slabs can differ, so the
engineer should be aware of the effects of the assumptions that RAM
Concept makes that are more appropriate for slabs than for deep beams.
382
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
36.3.1 Analysis of slab and beam elements

RAM Concept currently assumes that beam elements and slab elements
behave the same; there is no difference between a slab element and a beam
element [future versions will not make this simplifying assumption].
The first analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is
that linear sections remain linear; this is analogous to plane sections
remain plane in beam theory.
Figure 36-5 Linear Sections Before Deformation
Figure 36-6 Linear Sections After Deformation
The second analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements
is that the force and stress patterns in the element are that of a typical slab
location. The following table shows the possible slab element forces and
their associated stresses.
Symbol Force
Related Stress
Fx
Axial force on x-face
Uniform axial stress x
Fy
Axial force on y-face
Uniform axial stress y
Vxy
In-plane shear force
Uniform shear stress xy
Vxz
Transverse shear force on x-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress xz
Vyz
Transverse shear force on y-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress yz
Mx
Bending moment about x-axis
Linear (along z-axis) axial stress y
My
Bending moment about y-axis
Linear (along z-axis) axial stress x
Txy
Torsional moment
Linear (along z-axis) shear stress xy
Table 36-1 Relation between force and stress
RAM Concept
383
Chapter 36
Figure 36-7 In-Plane Actions (Plan View)
Figure 36-8 Out-of-Plane Actions (Plan

View)
36.3.2 Analysis and design of deep beams For bending

moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM
Concept will assume a linear distribution of bending stress over the deep
beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
Figure 36-9 RAM Concept Analysis Bending Stresses
384
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
Figure 36-10 True Bending Stresses
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally
ignored.
In design, RAM Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations
that are appropriate only for deep beams and RAM Concept will not provide
any deep beam detailing information. RAM Concepts shallow beam
calculations will generally be conservative for deep beams.
The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The
engineer will also need to provide appropriate detailing for the deep beam.
36.3.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse

bending moments
Concept will over-estimate the stiffness of a deep beam subjected to
RAM Concept
385
Chapter 36
transverse bending moments. RAM Concepts analysis will assume that the
entire beam is effective in resisting the transverse moment.
Figure 36-11 RAM Concept Analysis Bending/Axial Stresses
Figure 36-12 True Bending/Axial Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is

normally ignored.
In design, it is important that RAM Concepts design sections have the
appropriate ignore depth settings, so only the portion of the beam that is
truly effective is used in the capacity calculations.
386
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
Figure 36-13 Before Ignore Depth
Figure 36-14 After Ignore Depth
36.3.4 Analysis of deep beams with torsion

Concept will over-estimate the torsional stiffness of deep beams. RAM
Concepts assumptions lead to a torsional stiffness at the deep beam that is
proportional to bh3, while the true torsional stiffness is proportional to b3h.
RAM Concept
387
Chapter 36
Figure 36-15 RAM Concept Analysis Torsion Shear Stresses
Figure 36-16 True Torsion Shear Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness can be important and must be

investigated. The torsion in the beam may be necessary for a complete
structural load path. RAM Concept provides four options of considering this
torsion in design. See Torsion Considerations on page 416 for more
information.
388
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
36.3.5 Analysis and design of moment transfer through

step-beams
Concept will not consider that a step beam could bend about its longitudinal
axis. RAM Concepts assumption that linear sections remain linear
prohibits this type of bending and will cause RAM Concept to over-estimate
the stiffness of the step-beam for moment transfer.
Figure 36-17 RAM Concept Step-Beam Bending Stresses
Figure 36-18 True Step-Beam Bending Stresses
RAM Concept
389
Chapter 36
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is
normally ignored. However, it is up to the engineer to assure that step-beam
has the capacity and detailing to transfer the analyzed moment.
36.4 Post-tensioning loadings

36.4.1 Hyperstatic loading
RAM Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects
(elements, springs, support, design sections, design strip segment cross
sections and punching checks) by using the following vector relationship:
Fh = Fb - Fp
where
Fh = the hyperstatic forces and moments
Fb = the balance loading forces and moments (tendon forces on real
structure)
Fp = the primary forces and moments in the object (forces in
object due to PT if the object was not restrained, but still contained tendons
if any)
For objects that do not contain tendons (walls, columns, springs, rigid
supports, design sections without tendons and design strips without
tendons), Fp is zero, so:
Fh = Fb
For slab elements the calculation of Fp for every element is not performed,
as there is no clear definition of Fp for anything except a cross section. RAM
Concepts slab analysis plots assume Fp = Fb (Fh = 0), but these plotted
values are NOT used in the slab design and checking. RAM Concept
calculates design section and design strip cross section forces (without the
assumption of Fp = Fb) as follows:
Fh = Fb - Fp
390
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
RAM Concept bases the calculation of Fp on the tendons at each cross
section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use RAM Concepts slab

analysis plots for cross-section design values in PT structures. (It is not
recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because
design strips and design sections provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to Complete Secondary
(Hyperstatic) Effects by A. Bommer; PTI Journal, January 2004, Vol 2 No.
1).
36.5 Design strip and design section forces

36.5.1 Design section axes and sign convention
Design sections have a local coordinate system, with r, s and z axes:
R-axis is collinear with the design section and is positive in the direction
from end 1 to end 2. This direction is also referred to as Lateral.
S-axis is 90 degrees counter-clockwise to the r-axis (still in the x-y plane)
and goes through the design centroid (see below). This direction is also
referred to as Axial
Z-axis is parallel to the global z-axis and goes through the design
centroid. This direction is also referred to as Vertical
Forces for the design section are considered as the forces that the structure in
the positive-s region applies to the structure in the negative-s region.
A design section drawn from point B to point A will have the same forces as
a design section drawn from point A to point B except that the following two
forces will have opposite signs:
Vz (vertical shear on the s-face)
Mz (moment about the z axis)
RAM Concept
391
Chapter 36
36.5.2 Design strip segment axes and sign convention

Design strip segments have a local coordinate system for each internal cross
section. An internal cross section is perpendicular to the design strip segment
spine and extends from the left tributary boundary to the right tributary
boundary. Each internal cross section is treated exactly like a Design Section
with its own r, s and z axes (see above).
All of a DSSs cross sections will have coordinate systems that are parallel,
but for certain structure geometries the s-axes of each cross section will not
be collinear. This is due to each cross section determining its own design
centroid (see below).
36.5.3 Design centroids

Each design section and design strip segment cross section determines its
own design centroid location. The location is determined as follows:
2 A final cross section is determined by considering the top and bottom
ignore depths.
3 The centroid z-elevation of this final cross section is the design centroid z
coordinate.
4 A cross section core is determined (see Concrete Core Determi-
nation on page 415). For a T shaped section the core will be the stem from
the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section,
the core will be the entire section.
5 The cores x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroids x and y
coordinates.
6 You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the
first page of an audit. See Chapter 26, Using the Auditor for more information.
36.5.4 Calculating the forces on the cross section

RAM Concept calculates the cross section forces about the design centroid
of the cross section (after Ignore Top of Section and Ignore Bottom of Section
values have been taken into account).
392
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
For each of the same slab elements that make up the initial concrete cross
section (before Ignore Top of Section and Ignore Bottom of Section values
have been taken into account), the elements nodal forces (for all the
elements nodes on one side of the design section) are transformed to the
centroid of the final concrete section and added to the design section forces.
For slab elements that contain the end of the design section, only a fraction
(proportional to the length of the design section in the element divided by the
length across the element along a line collinear with the design section) of
the nodal forces are included.
Nodal forces are used in place of integrations of slab stresses because slab
stress results may have local spikes caused by odd-shaped elements. These
local spikes can significantly alter the total integrated value. The nodal
forces used by RAM Concept are not affected by the local stress spikes and
always give results that will be in equilibrium with the nodal loads.
36.5.5 Calculating the balanced load percentages

RAM Concept calculates the percentage of load that is balanced by the posttensioning within design strips. See Viewing balanced load percentages on
page 212 for instructions on accessing this information.
Each design strip segment reports two values:
xx% DL Balanced
xx% DL + RLL Balanced
The values reported are valid for the last Calc All (tendon changes after that
are not reflected).
The values are calculated based on the total static moment for the span, for
the balanced loadings and the dead and live loadings.
For a cantilever span, the effective load is:
w = 2M L
where:
M = moment at first cross section
L = clear span
RAM Concept
393
Chapter 36
For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is:
w = 8M L
where
M = (M1 + M2)/2 - M3
M1 = moment at first cross section
M2 = moment at last cross section
M3 = moment at cross section closest to midway between first and
last cross sections
L = clear span
The percentage is defined as:
% = -100 Wb/Wl
where
Wb = effective load due to balance and transfer balance loadings
Wl = effective load due to load combination under consideration
(DL or DL + RLL)
There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of
a span. These have an undefined balance load percentage.
The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation
available in the tendon plans. The difference are due to:
diversion of PT effects
clear span vs total span
moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines
In the calculations, DL is based on the dead loading types, and means:
Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
394
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
In the calculations, RLL is based on the new loading types, and means:
Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (roof) + Live
(reducible)(transfer) + Live (unreducible)(transfer) + Live
(storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer)
All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before
addition to the total.
36.6 Result categories in RAM Concept

RAM Concept keeps track of 2 categories of results: standard and
envelope.
36.6.1 Standard results

Standard results - loadings
Standard Results for a loading are the results due to the application of all
loads of the loading with no patterns considered. These results consists of the
results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab
and the Standard context results for the Strip tab.
Standard results - load combinations
Standard Results for a load combination are the linear combination of

loading standard results using the standard load factors. These results consist
of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction
tab and the Standard context results for the Strip tab.
Note: Standard results also include all of the results for items other than
design strip segments, design sections and punching checks. Items such as
slab bending moments, column reactions and soil reactions are included in
the standard (non-enveloped) results.
Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope
results are calculated.
RAM Concept
395
Chapter 36
36.6.2 Envelope results

Envelope results are kept for only 3 object types - design strip segments,
design sections and punching checks. Envelope results fully consider pattern
loadings and alternate envelope factors (as well as standard factors).
For design strip segments and design sections all of the cross-section forces
are calculated, and there are six envelope result sets kept:
Max M (forces in place at time of maximum M)
Min M (forces in place at time of minimum M)
Max V (forces in place at time of maximum V)
Min V (forces in place at time of minimum V)
Max P (forces in place at time of maximum P)
Min P (forces in place at time of minimum P)
Note: Min refers to the minimum signed value, not the minimum
absolute value.
For punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6
envelope result sets kept:
Max Fz (reaction forces at time of maximum Fz reaction)
Min Fz (reaction forces at time of minimum Fz reaction)
Max Mx (reaction forces at time of maximum Mx reaction)
Min Mx (reaction forces at time of minimum Mx reaction)
Max My (reaction forces at time of maximum My reaction)
Min My (reaction forces at time of minimum My reaction)
36.6.3 How RAM Concept calculates envelope results

Envelope Results - Loadings
Envelope results for a loading are determined by comparing the results for
the full loading and the results of all of the pattern loadings (considering the
396
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
pattern factors). Envelope results consist of a subset of results which occur
simultaneously with minimum and maximum values of certain resultants.
For example, for a design section, all of the pattern results would be
compared, and the pattern result with the largest bending moment would
become the Max M result for that design section; other design sections Max
M results might be determined by other patterns.
If the loading is not patterned, then all of the envelope results are identical to
the standard results.
Envelope Results - Load Combinations
Envelope results for a load combination are determined by comparing all the
permutations of standard and alternate load factors multiplied by all
envelopes for each loading in the load combination. For each location and
envelope type, the chosen load factors are those that create the most extreme
envelope.
In mathematical terms:
There are 2n(p+1) results for n loadings and p patterns.
These 2n(p+1) results are enveloped together.
The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2n(p+1) load
combinations, but the result of the RAM Concepts calculations is the same
as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets
Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes
for all of the load combinations that use the rule set. For each location and
envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously with
the most extreme envelope.
Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results
on the Reaction tab and Strip tab except for those with the Standard
context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as the
standard envelope, but technically it is not an envelope at all.
RAM Concept
397
Chapter 36
Note: RAM Concepts enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and
complicated models. It would be possible, however, for the six envelopes to
miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in the
envelopes may be critical for the design, you can manually create additional
loadings (without patterning) and/or additional load combinations (without
alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single load combination) to ensure that the force set of concern is considered in the design.
398
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
37 Section Design Notes

This chapter explains RAM Concepts general approach to the analysis and
design of cross sections. The specific handling of each codes requirements
are detailed in the chapters that follow.
37.1 General Design Approach

37.1.1 Strip and Section Design A 3 Step Process
RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its Phase 1 selection of reinforcement. For
most rule sets this is the entire design.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its Phase 2 selection of reinforcement
needed in addition to that summarized in step 1b. For most rule sets nothing
happens in this step, but for some rule sets such as shear design and
ductility design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be known
before the design can be performed.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in
this step) and final analysis.
37.1.2 Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain

Curves
RAM Concept considers mild steel reinforcement to be a perfectly
elastic/plastic material as defined by the modulus of elasticity and the yield
stress.
RAM Concept
399
Chapter 37
37.1.3 Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a post-tensioning steel stress-strain curve base on a
standard power formula that has been used in various forms for 25 years:
fp = p [A + B/{1 + (C p)D}1/D] fpu
Where A, B, C and D are coefficients chosen to best fit the experimental
stress-strain curve data.
RAM Concept uses coefficients A, B, C and D based on an analysis of
prestressing steel stress-strain curves included a paper by Develapura and
Tadros [Develapura, R. K. and Tadros, M. K.,Critical Assessment of ACI
318 Eq. (18-3) for Prestressing Steel Stress at Ultimate Flexure, ACI
Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, September-October 1992, pp. 538-546].
RAM Concepts values are:
A = 0.0311 Ep
B = Ep - A
C = 0.958 Ep/fpy
D = 7.36
These values provide exact correspondence with the recommended
parameters for 270 ksi (1860 MPa) strand with fpy of 0.9 fpu. For other
prestressing materials, there may be small differences (a few percent) from
the theoretical curves in the region between the start of yield and ultimate
strength.
400
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
300
Fp(strain)
300
200
Fpu
Fpy
100
0.005
0.01
0.00
0.015
0.02
0.025
0.03
0.035
strain
0.04
37.1.4 Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to

Cross-Section Strains
The strains in a cross section can be determined using the plane sections
remain plane assumption. However, due to the effects of prestressing and
the sequence of construction, the strains in the post-tensioning in a cross
section are not equal to the strains in the adjacent concrete.
Conceptually, to calculate the strain in a bonded tendon at that corresponds
to the adjacent concrete strain is simple:
p = c + (pi ci)
Where
p = strain in tendon
c = strain in concrete adjacent to tendon
pi = strain in tendon at time of bonding
ci = strain in adjacent concrete at time of bonding (typically
negative)
RAM Concept
401
Chapter 37
RAM Concept uses the following procedure and assumptions when
calculating the pi and ci values for each tendon in each design cross
section:
All tendon long-term losses (relaxation, elastic shortening, creep and
shrinkage) occur before bonding.
The formwork applies an upward force on the concrete exactly the same
as the weight of the concrete. The only forces in the concrete are those due
to the balance loading.
The concrete strains can be determined using gross section properties and
the initial concrete modulus.
37.1.5 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves

General Theory
RAM Concepts treatment of the effect of cross section strains on ultimate
unbonded tendon stresses is loosely based on a paper by Naaman, Burns,
French, Gable and Mattock [Naaman, A. E. et. al, Stresses in Unbonded
Prestressing Tendons at Ultimate: Recommendation, ACI Structural
Journal, V. 99, No. 4, July-August 2002, pp. 518-529]. In the paper the
authors, who are members of the Subcommittee of Stresses in Unbonded
Tendons of Joint ASCE-ACI committee 423, Prestressed Concrete,
recommend code modifications for ACI 318.
The paper provides an equation for estimating tendon stresses at ultimate
bending strength of a cross section. The proposed equation is shown to have
a correlation with test results that is 2.5 times better than the ACI equations
18-4 and 18-5. The equation is:
fps = fse + u Ep cu(dp/c 1)(L1/L2) 0.80fpu
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
fse = effective prestress in prestressed reinforcement
Ep = elastic modulus of prestressed reinforcement
cu = failure strain of concrete (typically assumed as 0.003)
402
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
prestressed reinforcement.
c = depth of neutral axis at ultimate strength
L = span under consideration
L1 = sum of lengths of loaded spans
L2 = total length of tendon between anchorages
u = K(dp/L) where K = 3 for uniform or third point loadings and
1.5 for midspan loading
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressed tendons
It can be shown that:
p cu ( d p c 1 )
where
p = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from
effective prestress level to ultimate bending
With this substitution (and the one for u) the equation becomes:
fps = fse + K(dp/L) Ep p (L1/L2) 0.80fpu
L can both realistically and conservatively be assumed to equal L1 as it is
unlikely for two spans to simultaneously have large inelastic deformations.
This simplifies the equation further to:
fps = fse + Ep (Kdp /L2) p 0.80fpu
It is obvious that in the above equations that (Kdp /L2) is a strain reduction
factor that accounts for the distribution of the localized strain over the length
of the tendon. The numerator is a consideration of the length of the yielding
(high strain) region, while the denominator is a consideration of the length
over which this strain is distributed.
RAM Concept
403
Chapter 37
37.1.6 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves

Program Implementation
RAM Concept assumes that unbonded post-tensioning stresses are not
affected by service loading.
For ultimate strength considerations, RAM Concept treats unbonded tendons
as partially bonded tendons:
fps = F(pse + k p) flimit
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
F() = post-tensioning material stress strain curve (described above)
pse = strain in tendon at effective prestress level
p = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from
effective prestress level to ultimate bending
k = strain reduction factor, taken as 0.1
flimit = limit stress as defined by the effective code
For ACI 318-99, flimit is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the
calculation of p used in the ACI equations, RAM Concept assumes the
tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the
same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment
capacity calculations at each cross section).
For AS 3600-2001, flimit is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of
befdp used in the AS equations, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are
placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity
calculations at each cross section).
404
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
37.1.7 Tendons External Load or Internal Force?

Tendons need to be considered as an external load for some purposes and as
an internal force for other purposes. It is important that the tendon treatment
be consistent through out a calculation.
RAM Concept always considers tendons as internal forces in strength
calculations. The full force of the tendon is an internal force, while any
hyperstatic effects generated by the tendons are considered as external
forces. The balance loading should never be included in load combinations
used for strength calculations, while the hyperstatic loading should always
be included (as an external load) in strength calculations.
RAM Concept always considers the initial prestress in tendons as external
forces in service calculations. Changes in the tendons stress (from effective
stress levels) if any are considered as internal forces. For example if a
bonded tendon is stressed with a final effective stress of 175 ksi, but
applying the service loadings to the structure results in a stress increase to
185 ksi, then RAM Concept will consider the 10 ksi stress change as an
internal force, while the 175 ksi initial stress is assumed to be considered in
the applied loads. For this reason, the balance loading should always be
included in load combinations used for service calculations, The hyperstatic
loading should never be included in service calculations.
37.1.8 Concrete Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a parabolic-plastic stress-strain curve for concrete based
on the Portland Cement Associations parabolic stress-strain curve [see
PCAs Notes on ACI 318-99 Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete, Figure 6-8]. This curve is used for both strength and service cross
section analyses. The curve is totally defined by two parameters:
fc = Concrete Cylinder Strength
Ec = Concrete Elastic Modulus (tangent at zero strain)
A third parameter, the strain at which the concrete behavior changes from
parabolic to linear, is calculated:
0 = 2 (0.85 fc)/ Ec
For c < 0 (tension)
RAM Concept
405
Chapter 37
fc = 0
For 0 < c < 0 (parabolic range)
fc = 0.85 fc [2(c/0) (c/0)2]
For c 0
(plastic range)
fc = 0.85 fc
4000
3000
Fc(strain)
0.85fc
2000
1000
0
0.001
0.002
0.003
0.004
strain
37.1.9 Creep and Shrinkage Effects

RAM Concept considers creep and shrinkage in any cross section by
modifying the concrete stress strain curves to be:
= f(( - cs)/kc)
where:
= stress in concrete
kc = concrete creep factor (typically 3.35 = 2.35 + 1.0)
= strain in cross section
cs = shrinkage strain
406
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
f()= concrete material short-term stress-strain curve
This modified concrete stress-strain curve is only used in the ECR calcs. It is
never used for gross-section or cracked-section stress predictions.
37.1.10 Cracked Section Analyses

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a
cross section strain (top strain and bottom strain) that results in the cross
section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment
and axial force.
In the cracked section analyses, RAM Concept considers concrete to have no
tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have some tension strength,
RAM Concepts assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete
has been previously cracked by some other loading condition. RAM
Concepts assumption is conservative. This pre-cracked assumption is used
to determine the cracked cross section stresses and the cracked moment of
inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as Bransons
formula does not consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross
section stresses exceed the modulus of rupture.
When a cross section with no concrete tension strains is analyzed with a
cracked section analysis, RAM Concepts analysis methods result in a
transformed section analysis.
The parameters considered in a Rule Sets cracked section analysis are
For ECR (Effective Curvature Ratio) Calcs Only - The creep coefficient
as specified in the Calc Options window. This coefficient is the value of
(total strain under constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a
typical value is 3.35 (1.0 for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain)
For ECR Calcs Only - The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc
Options window.
The standard instantaneous concrete stress-strain curve as defined above.
All mild steel reinforcement (from all rule sets) in each cross section
this is the value reported by the Design Summary area of steel plots, which
will often be somewhat less than the value of the detailed reinforcement
(number of bars and lengths).
The displacement of concrete by reinforcement is not considered.
RAM Concept
407
Chapter 37
The tendon stress strain curve for the type of rule set (see Tendons
External Load or Internal Force? on page 405). Cracked section analysis is
not available for rule sets such as Minimum Design that do not inherently have a tendon stress-strain curve type associated with them.
37.1.11 Bransons Stress Ratio

The most common method for determining an effective moment of inertia in
concrete members is Bransons Formula:
Ie = (Mcr/Ma)4 Ig + [1 (Mcr/Ma)4] Icr
where
Ie = the effective moment of inertia
Ig = the gross concrete moment of inertia
Icr = the cracked concrete moment of inertia
Mcr = the gross cross section cracking moment
Ma = the applied moment
As Bransons formula does not consider axial forces which may be present
(especially in post-tensioned structures), we have modified it to consider
axial forces:
Ie = (fcr/fa)4 Ig + [1 (fcr/fa)4] Icr
where
fcr = the concrete flexural tensile strength
fa = the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section
properties)
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Bransons
formula. If there are axial forces, this formulation is a reasonable (but not
theoretically identical) extrapolation of Bransons formula.
408
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
We call the value (fcr/fa)4 Bransons Stress Ratio. Its value is always
limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.
Note that you will more commonly see Bransons formula used with a power
of 3 instead of 4. The power of 3 is appropriate when a peak moment in a
span is used to determine an effective moment of inertia for the entire span.
The power of 4 is appropriate for determining a local effective moment of
inertia using local section forces [Branson, Dan E., Instantaneous and
Time-Dependent Deflections of Simple and Continuous Reinforced
Concrete Beams, Report #7, Part 1, Alabama Highway Research
Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August 1963, pp.1-78].
37.1.12 Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio

RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio at every cross
section:
ECR = Ce / Cg
Where
ECR = the effective curvature ratio
Ce = the effective cross section curvature (see calc below)
Ce is calculated by the approximate formula:

Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 BSR) Cccs)
where
kc = the concrete material creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain /
elastic strain
BSR = Bransons Stress Ratio (see Bransons Stress Ratio on
page 408)
Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and
shrinkage (see Cracked Section Analyses on page 407)
RAM Concept
409
Chapter 37
Note that if gross-section stresses are kept below the concrete tensile
strength, then the effective curvature ratio will be equal to the concrete
material creep factor (kc).
If post-tensioning is considered as an internal force (not an external load) for
the active design rules, then the gross-section calculations are performed
with the post-tensioning primary forces added to the calculated cross section
forces.
It is unusual, but possible, for the ECR value to be less than the concrete
material creep factor (kc). These cases occur if the amount of reinforcement
is so large that the cracked stiffness (including concrete creep) is greater than
the gross stiffness (including concrete creep).
37.1.13 Use of ECR

ECR values are defined for curvatures of cross sections - we need to be able
to transform them into a span deflection multiplier for convenient design
use.
The deflection of a span is proportional to the elastic energy in the span.
Considering only bending energy of the gross section:
g = k ( M ) ( M EI )dl
Considering the ECR as softener of the gross section stiffness, this
equation becomes:
ecr = k ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M EI )dl
From these two equations we can create a span deflection multiplier for
convenient design use:
Deflection Multiplier = ecr / g
Deflection Multiplier =
k ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M EI )dl k ( M ) ( M EI )dl
410
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
Deflection Multiplier =
( M ) ( ECR ) ( M EI )dl ( M ) ( M EI )dl

Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate
structures as the bending moments in the structure will become rearranged
(stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce ecr.
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR
value in the span.
Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral. See Using strip based
deflection plots for slabs on page 557.
37.1.14 Crack Width Predictions

Unless the design code in use specifies a calculation for estimating crack
widths, RAM Concept estimates crack widths based on a paper by Frosch
[Frosch, R. J.,Another Look at Cracking and Crack Control in Reinforced
Concrete, ACI Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June 1999, pp. 437442].
In cracked concrete, with the concrete assumed to carry only small tension
stress, the crack width can be calculated as:
wc = c s c
where:
wc = crack width
c = cross section strain at crack elevation
sc = crack spacing
The cross section strain (c) at the crack elevation can be easily calculated in
a cracked-section analysis using the plane sections remain plane
assumption.
The crack spacing (sc) is more difficult to predict.
For reinforcement with no bond to the concrete, the crack spacing can be
shown to be:
RAM Concept
411
Chapter 37
h sc 2 h
where:
h = height of the tension zone
For reinforcement with no-slip with the concrete, the crack spacing can be
shown to be:
d* sc 2 d*
where:
d* = distance from crack to centroid of nearest reinforcement
( c + ( sb 2 ) )
for a single layer of reinforcement
where:
c = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to
reinforcement centroid
sb = spacing of reinforcement
For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has
shown that:
s c = 2 d*
leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept
uses this assumption, but limits d* to a maximum value of h (the crack
height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded
reinforcement. The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width
calculation can be written as:
wc = 2 c d *
(d* h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be

optimally placed such that:
d* =
412
( c i + ( s i 2 ) ) for all reinforcement i

RAM Concept
Chapter 37
w = s i
where:
ci = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to
reinforcement i centroid
si = length along on concrete tension face allocated to
reinforcement i
w = width of concrete tension face
RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded
reinforcement that when considered minimizes the value of d*. When using
bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar
equivalent. Unbonded and external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at
an angle of less than 45 degrees to the cross section are ignored also.
37.1.15 Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations

Many design codes require that cross sections have a minimum moment
capacity of at least some factor (often 1.2) times the cracking load of the
cross section. The cracking load is derived as follows:
fcr = (ML + MB)/S (PL + PB)/A
where:
fcr = the cracking stress
ML = the bending moment due to applied loads at time of
cracking
MB = the bending moment due to the balance loading
(same sign as ML)
S = the section modulus for the direction of bending (Z in
some communities)
PL = the axial compression due to applied loads at time of
cracking
RAM Concept
413
Chapter 37
PB = the axial compression due to the balance loading
A = the section area
Solving for ML results in:
ML = (fcr + (PL + PB)/A)S - MB
Assuming that PL is zero:
ML = (fcr + PB/A)S - MB
Replacing MB with MP + MH and PB with PP + PH:
ML = (fcr + (PP + PH)/A)S (MP + MH)
where:
MP = the primary post-tensioning bending moment
MH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning bending moment
PP = the primary post-tensioning axial compression
PH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning axial compression
(typically negative)
Multiplying by 1.2 to get 1.2 times the cracking load:
1.2 ML = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 (MP + MH)
To get the design bending moment, we add in the hyperstatic
bending moment:
MD = 1.2 ML + MH = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 (MP
+ MH) + MH
Simplifying:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +(PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 MP 0.2 MH
It is common and usually conservative to assume that PH is zero:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +PP/A) S 1.2 MP 0.2 MH
414
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
It is common (although not technically correct) to ignore the 0.2
MH, giving the final design moment equation:
MD = 1.2 (fcr + PP/A) S 1.2 MP
37.1.16 Concrete Core Determination

The core of the cross section is used in various calculations.
The core includes any vertical slice of the cross section that extends from
the top of the cross section to the bottom of the cross section. For example,
in a T-beam, the core would be the stem and the flange immediately above
the stem.
Odd shaped sections may not have any core. RAM Concept will not be
able to calculate some capacity values for these sections.
Odd shaped sections may have multiple separate cores. For an example,
in a double-T-beam, the core will be the two stems and the flange areas
above the two stems. RAM Concept will typically consider this core to be
the same as a single core with the same (total) width.
Tendon ducts in this core are investigated.
Ducts are assumed to have the same heights as their widths and are
assumed to be rectangular in shape. For all standard ducts, these
assumptions give a conservative approximation of overlapping.
Ducts are assumed to be centered on the prestressing steel that they
contain (this is not true in the real structure, but this assumption rarely
has any impact on the calculation result).
Any horizontal line across the core is investigated to determine the
maximum total width of duct across the shear area. Bonded duct
widths and unbonded duct widths are multiplied by factors that differ
for each code. For example, in BS 8110, 2/3 of bonded duct widths
are considered, and full unbonded duct widths are considered. For
ACI, the factors are zero, so the duct width is never excluded.
The web width is equal to the core width minus the maximum total width
of duct across the shear area.
RAM Concept
415
Chapter 37
37.1.17 Torsion Considerations

RAM Concept can consider torsion on a cross section in four different ways,
depending upon the properties of the design strip segment or the design
section. The four approaches are:
No Torsion
Torsion is not considered in any way.
Bending
Torsion is considered by adding the torsion to the bending moment
and designing bending for the combined total Md = M +/- T.
Shear
Torsion is considered by assuming that torsion is carried entirely by
varying shear across the cross section core length L.
The shear force per unit length is v = 6 T / L2
The design shear force is Vd = V +/- 6 T / L
Beam Torsion
Torsion is considered by designing for torsion using code beam
torsion equations.
416
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
38 Live Load Reduction Notes

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of live load reduction.
38.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load

Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of
each column, punching check, design strip segment and design section. For
example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live
(Reducible) Loading than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
38.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per
member), the reductions do not affect the loading analysis. The analysis
results that RAM Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live
load reduction.
38.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets

When RAM Concept combines loadings into load combinations, it considers
the live load reduction of each loading added to the load combination. The
analysis results that RAM Concept displays for load combinations are
always reduced by live load reduction.
Similarly when RAM Concept envelopes load combinations into Rule Sets,
it considers live load reduction as all of the load combinations being
enveloped have already been modified by the reduction factors. The analysis
results that RAM Concept displays for rule sets are always reduced by live
load reduction.
Note: Remember that RAM Concept only reduces live load on columns,
punching checks, design strip segments and design sections.
Note: See Viewing live load reduction results on page 214 for more information.
RAM Concept
417
Chapter 38
38.2 Tributary Area Calculations

When a loading on a structure is uniform, it is common to assign to each
structural member a tributary area that the member (alone) supports. This
assignment is typically performed by a simplistic visual analysis. The
assigned area is not truly supported by only the member to which it is
assigned. The effects of the (true) uniform loading on the member are similar
to the effects if the entire load of the tributary area was applied to the
member. Most design codes use the tributary area as the primary parameter
in the live load reduction calculations.
RAM Concept calculates tributary areas by applying a unit uniform load to
the entire slab and analyzing the flow of the vertical forces. The tributary
areas for the following members are calculated from the unit load as follows:
Columns - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Walls - (not currently reduced).
Punching Checks - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Design Strip Segments - the absolute value of the difference between the
vertical shears at both ends. When multiple segments make up a span, the
segments combined tributary areas are used in calculations.
Design Sections - the absolute value of the shear.
With the above calculations, it is possible (but not common) for the sum of
the tributary areas of walls and columns to exceed the total floor area. This
happens when one or more of the support reactions are negative.
38.3 Influence Area Calculations

ASCE-7 and IBC 2003 use an influence area instead of a tributary area in
their live load reduction calculations. The influence area is defined as the
floor area over which the influence surface for structural effects is
significantly different from zero.
Influence areas are not calculated when BS 6399 or AS/NZ 1170.1 are used.
418
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
RAM Concept uses heuristic methods to calculate influence areas. These
methods tend to define areas that are similar to those of that engineers would
produce visually, but the methods do not calculate areas that are exactly the
same as an engineer might calculate manually. RAM Concept's influence
areas can be shown on the plans so you can inspect the areas that RAM
Concept is using in its live load reduction calculations.
Per ASCE-7 and IBC 2003, RAM Concept limits the influence areas to be
no larger than the following multiple of the tributary area:
Tributary Area
Multiple
Columns
Punching Checks
Beam Design Strips
Slab Design Strips
Figure 38-1 Maximum multiple of influence area to tributary
38.3.1 Example of Influence Areas

Figure 38-2 through Figure 38-6 shows RAM Concept's influence areas and
the influence areas commonly used by engineers for a few slab conditions.
Some engineers might (erroneously) suggest that the tributary area of the
column in Figure 38-2 is 600 square feet, but continuity effects would
obviously increase that value. The results show that the tributary area is
actually 952 square feet.
RAM Concept
419
Chapter 38
Figure 38-2 Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An
engineer would typically deem the influence area to be 2400 square feet.
Figure 38-3 Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
420
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
Figure 38-4 Design strip segments
Figure 38-5 Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
RAM Concept
421
Chapter 38
Figure 38-6 Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
38.4 ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction

ASCE-7 live load reduction is specified in code section 4.8. Live load effects
on members with influence areas of less than 400 square feet are not
modified by live load reduction.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from
passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except that members supporting
two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 4.8.2 and
4.8.3. These two load types must be drawn on a Live (storage) loading to
be considered appropriately.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly
occupancies cannot be reduced per section 4.8.4. These loads must be drawn
on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.8.5.
However, if you limit the design strip width to 1.5 times the span length, and
422
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code
section will be met.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an application factor not a reduction

factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
38.5 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction

IBC 2003 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.9. Live load
effects on members with influence areas of less than 400 square feet are not
IBC 2003 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from
passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except that members supporting
two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 1607.9.1.1
and 1607.9.1.2. These two load types must be drawn on a Live (storage)
loading to be considered appropriately.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly
occupancies cannot be reduced per section 1607.9.1.3. These loads must be
drawn on a Live (unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section
1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never reduce one-way slab loads if IBC 2003
is selected.
Note: IBC 2003 actually defines an application factor not a reduction

factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
38.6 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction

UBC 1997 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.5. Live load
effects on members with tributary areas of 150 square feet or less are not
RAM Concept
423
Chapter 38
Equation (7-2) [R = 23.1 (1 + D/L)] is not considered in live load reduction
calculations. This value needs to be calculated and set by the user in the
maximum reduction property.
UBC 1997 requires that storage loads in excess of 100 psf shall not be
reduced, except that live loads on columns may be reduced up to 20%. These
loads must be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading to be considered
appropriately.
UBC 1997 requires that other live loads in excess of 100 psf or in places of
public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced. These loads must be drawn
on a Live (Unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
UBC 1997 can be used as IBC 2003 alternate live load reduction in
accordance with IBC section 1607.9.2. Because minimum parking loads in
UBC 1997 are higher than IBC 2003 minimum parking loads, it may not be
appropriate to apply UBC 1997 parking garage reduction provisions to IBC
2003 loadings. For this reason, parking garage loads should be drawn on a
Live (Storage) loading and thus will get a maximum 20% reduction on
columns and no live load reduction on other members.
38.7 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction

AS/NZS 1170.1 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.4.2.
When using AS/NZS 1170.1 to perform live load reduction, only live
loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced. Live (Storage)
loadings are assumed to have loads greater than 5 kPa and are therefore not
reducible per 3.4.2(ii).
Loading effects on one-way slabs are not reduced per 3.4.2(v).
For other member types, the reduction is calculated per the formula in
3.4.2(b).
Note: Section 3.4.2 actually defines an application factor not a

reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
424
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
38.8 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction

BS 6399 live load reduction is specified in code sections 6.1 through 6.3.
Only live loadings with the Live (Reducible) type are reduced.
For columns, the Table 2 and Table 3 values from the code are calculated and
the greater of the two reductions is used. For other members, the Table 3
values are used.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same
reduction factor as the axial force values; this is different from what is
specified in the note in Section 6.2 of BS 6399. This does not affect any
design in RAM Concept (or the RAM Structural System), but it does affect
the reported column reaction values.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way and two-ways slabs.
38.9 Mat Foundations

In the design of mat foundations supporting columns (and/or walls)
supporting levels above, the live load reductions need to be applied to the
loads instead of the member forces. The loads need to be reduced instead of
the member forces for two reasons: 1) there is a clear understanding of the
tributary area for the loads while (in most cases) there is not a clear
understanding of the tributary area for the design strips; and 2) the zerotension soil reaction iterations need to be performed with the reduced loads.
For mat foundations, the live load reduction code should always be set to
None. Otherwise the live loads may be reduced twice.
Mat foundation loads that are imported from the RAM Structural System
will be automatically reduced appropriately (by the RAM Structural
System). User-drawn loads will need to be reduced manually.
RAM Concept
425
Chapter 38
38.10 Special Member Considerations

38.10.1 Columns Above the Slab
Columns above the slab will have zero tributary area and zero influence area
assigned to them in the automated area calculations. If you want to have live
load reduction applied to columns above the slab you will need to manually
specify the areas to use.
38.10.2 Columns Above and Below the Slab

When the reactions for columns above and below the slab are reported
together, the live load reduction for the column below the slab is used.
Because of this, the separate reported reactions for the column below and
the column above will not necessarily sum to the reported reaction for the
column above and below.
426
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39 ACI 318-99 Design

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-99.
The six sections outline the following:
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
39.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates
by default when you start a new ACI 318-99 file. As the purpose and use of
most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly
noteworthy are discussed here.
39.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading

This loading type describes a temporary loading that is present during
construction when the contractor stresses the tendons. As it is a temporary
load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load Combination.
If a permanent load is present at stressing, you should define the load on the
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) loading layer as well as the
appropriate permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a
permanent loading present at stressing with appropriate use of load factors.
RAM Concept
427
Chapter 39
39.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations
(technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept creates when you
start a new ACI 318-99 file. The purpose and origin of each load
combination are given. You can remove or modify any of these load
combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations
are from ACI 318-99, unless noted otherwise.
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in
some load combinations.
39.2.1 All Dead LC

This load combination sums all of the dead loadings, with a load factor of
1.0, that act simultaneously in the standard service condition. This load
combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for
design purposes.
39.2.2 Initial Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon
application of prestress. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes a 13% increase for longterm losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM

Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part of the long term loss
lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
428
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state.
This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load
factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
39.2.4 Sustained Service LC

For the purpose of this load combination, 100% of the Live (Storage)
Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent
loading. The load factors used are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
39.2.5 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC
section 1918.9.2.2. This load combination is used by the DL + 0.25LL
Design Rule Set. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept
429
Chapter 39
39.2.6 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The
load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 0.9 (alt)
Live Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
39.2.7 Long Term Deflection LC

This load combination is intended for investigation of long term deflections.
The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) [1.0 initial + 2.35 creep]
Live (Reducible) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
Live (Roof) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
39.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + W (Service Wind Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state
with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section
1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
430
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.2.9 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W (Service Wind Loading)

with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations.
factors used are:
39.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + L + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
39.2.11 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
with applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat
RAM Concept
431
Chapter 39
39.2.12 Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.6W (Service

Wind Loading)
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with
applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
foundations. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.05 (std & alt) [0.75(1.4)]
Live Loading: 1.28 (std & alt) [0.75(1.7)]
39.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.6W (Service Wind

Loading)
applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The
Note: Since directionality factors were introduced in ASCE 7-98, the wind
portion of the Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.6W (Service Wind
Loading) and Factored Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)
load combinations have been increased to 1.6 to account for this effect. The
need for this change is described in detail in ACI-02 9.2.1(b) and
commentary. If directionality factors are not applied to the wind loads, the
wind factors may be reduced in accordance with the original ACI 318-99
combinations.
39.2.14 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L + E (Ultimate
Seismic Loading)
applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
432
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations.
factors used are:
39.3 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors

It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw:
parking garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer
RAM Concept
433
Chapter 39
assembly loads (or live loads in excess of 100 psf) on a Live
(Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw parking loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM
Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of 1.0 in the Sustained Service
LC, and a (conservative) load factor of 3.35 in the Long Term Deflection LC.
39.4 ACI 318-99 material behaviors

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, nonprestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using ACI
318-99.
39.4.1 Concrete Behavior

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can
choose to use code equation 8.5.1 with or without the inclusion of Wc, an
equation from another code, or a specified value.
When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values:
Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses
Ec = value for all other conditions
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (w/ Wc) is selected the following values
are used:
E ci = w c
Ec = wc
1.5
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values
are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
434
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a
perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in
Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 405 of Chapter 37, Section Design
Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other
stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
39.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain
Curves on page 399 of Chapter 37, Section Design Notes.
39.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves
on page 400, and Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to CrossSection Strains on page 401, of Chapter 37, Section Design Notes.
39.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon
stresses are not affected by cross section strains.
For DL + 0.25LL strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded
tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concepts general
approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Unbonded
RAM Concept
435
Chapter 39
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on
page 404 of Chapter 37, Section Design Notes.
For ACI 318-99, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by
equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p, RAM Concept assumes the
tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid
(the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment
39.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which ACI 318-99 code
rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties,
combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
39.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement

The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip
segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, two-way slab).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip
segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement
location selection for the design strip segment or design section:
Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom
near midspan.
Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top
near midspan.
Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design
moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on
both faces).
Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer
discretion advised)
Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab
(Engineer discretion advised)
436
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement
requirement, not a minimum reinforcement requirement (see Service on
page 438).
Section 18.8.3 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded posttensioning, even though the code technically requires it.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.3, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.3, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
Table 39-1 Minimum reinforcement rule mapping
39.5.2 Initial Service

Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is
assumed to be included in the load factors).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope
for the rule set (reinforcement may be required on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Table 39-2 Initial service rule mapping
RAM Concept
437
Chapter 39
39.5.3 Service
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.6.4
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c, 18.9.3.2
Table 39-3 Service rule mapping
39.5.4 Sustained Service

for the rule set (failure could occur on both faces).
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Table 39-4 Sustained service rule mapping
438
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic
loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
See Torsion Considerations on page 416 for how torsion is implemented.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab
10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab
10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Table 39-5 Strength rule mapping
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion

design notes)
39.5.6 Ductility
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other
ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility reinforcement is
added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment
envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be required for both positive
and negative moments).
RAM Concept
439
Chapter 39
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.3
18.8.1
One-Way Slab
10.3.3
18.8.1
Two-Way Slab
10.3.3
18.8.1
Table 39-6 Ductility rule mapping
39.5.7 UBC DL + 0.25 LL

UBC section 1918.9.2.2 is implemented.
Unbonded tendons are assumed to have no stress.
A strength reduction factor () of 1.0 is used in the ACI calculations.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
11.4, 18.7 (=1)
One-Way Slab
(none)
11.4, 18.7 (=1)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
Table 39-7 UBC DL + 0.25LL rule mapping
440
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation

39.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature
Reinforcement
7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented
The gross area of concrete after taking into account the ignore top depth
and the ignore bottom depth is used to determine the reinforcement
specified in 7.12.2.1.
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for
satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not
rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded
up to the next whole number in the reinforcing summary.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement
patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
39.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non

prestressed)
Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
Strain compatibility design is used
RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed
reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-reinforced section. See
Ductility on page 439 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based
on the settings in the design section of design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed
to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are
required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam,
these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment).
RAM Concept
441
Chapter 39
However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for
moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to
ensure a safe design.
User Es values are used
For sections with multiple values of fc, the fc of each concrete block is
used appropriately.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement
calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the amount necessary. This is
because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater
than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone.
The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for axial force
equilibrium in the cross section.
39.6.3 Section 10.3.3 Ductility (Non prestressed)

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see
Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 441
for details).
The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.75) * (0.003 /(0.003 + y)) * d
where
y = tensile reinforcement yield strain
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid (excluding PT)
Due to very large bar covers or other unusual conditions, the
compression bar will be considered when determining d if the
compression bar is in tension.
For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code
criterion, see Unified Design Recommendations for Reinforced.... by
Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, AprilMarch 1992
442
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural

Members (Non Prestressed)
Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented
bw is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on
page 415). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then bw is taken as the
width of the section.

Equation 10-5 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented
A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the
reinforcement.
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the
criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid
areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with stems in tension, this will
typically be the sum of the stem widths.
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An
additional bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar.
Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked
section calculations).
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two
circumstances:
The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked
section analysis.
Compression reinforcement added later in the design process
lowers the reinforcement demands.
39.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non

Prestressed)
See Concrete Core Determination on page 415.
RAM Concept
443
Chapter 39
For sections with multiple values of fc, the minimum fc is used
Equations 11-5, 11-13, 11-15 are implemented.
Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
Lightweight concrete is not considered.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if
the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a.
Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on
page 445 for further requirements.
39.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams

(Prestressed)
For sections with multiple values of fc, the minimum fc is used
If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the
larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth; otherwise the depth
is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
Equation 11-9 is used if the 40% criterion of section 11.4.1 is met;
otherwise equation 11-5 is used. When equation 11-5 is used, both the
tension mild steel and the PT in the tension zone is used to determine w.
Equations 11-13 and 11-15 are implemented.
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if
the member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
444
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design.
If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are
performed for an average rib:
rib width = total core width / num ribs
with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs)
and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs
(* num ribs).
To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design
section or design strip for each rib.
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the lesser of the top cover and
the bottom cover.
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used
to determine fcp.
The minimum fc of the cross section is used in the unusual situation
where a cross section contains multiple concrete mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal
reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal
A 1 f y1 = 5 fc A cp ( 25psi ) p h b w
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
RAM Concept
445
Chapter 39
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement
and reported as being due to both designs:
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will
report the reinforcement in terms of the number of legs specified (by
the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing
reported by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number
of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear
capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this can make
shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and
11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other
longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective depths and
other bending parameters that affect shear design.
39.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems)

This chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
Figure 13.3.8 (Minimum extensions for reinforcement in slabs without beams)
This figure is not considered.

Section 13.5.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)
This section is not considered.
39.6.10 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive

Stress Limit
0.6 fci is the limiting value.
446
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete
strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber
stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
39.6.11 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress

Limit
3 fci is the limiting value.
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is
added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no section will fail this
criterion.
Bonded tendons that are in the tension zone are used to satisfy section
18.4.1; rebar is added as necessary: The available tendon stresses are the
smaller of:
30,000 psi
0.6 fpy
fpy - fse
Bonded tendons that are at an angle (vertical or horizontal) to the cross
section will only have their component perpendicular to the cross section
considered.
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
39.6.12 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress

Limit
0.45 fc is the limiting value.
Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used.
RAM Concept
447
Chapter 39
39.6.13 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit

0.60 fc is the limiting value.
39.6.14 Section 18.4.2c Service Tensile Stress Limit

6 fc is the limiting value.
39.6.15 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance

(Prestressed)
See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on
page 441. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design
span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces
into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design
sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
448
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see
detailed description Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to
Cross-Section Strains on page 401).
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon
stresses are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor
(see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves
Program Implementation on page 404).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the
compression reinforcement, a solution may not be possible.
39.6.16 Section 18.8.1 Ductility (Prestressed)

The strain distribution used in section 18.7 calculations is used (see
Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed) on page 448 for
details).
The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.36/0.85) * d
where
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid
To be rational (instead of literally following the code), d is taken as the
depth of the total tension reinforcement, not just the depth of the PT
For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code
criterion, see Unified Design Recommendations for Reinforced.... by
Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, AprilMarch 1992
39.6.17 Section 18.8.3 Cracking Moment

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the
design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is
outside of L/3 of the support.
RAM Concept
449
Chapter 39
For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the
design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in
one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed
that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of
a span to crack;
This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the
code technically requires it.
The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive
moment) based on the Min. Reinforcement Pattern selected in the design
strip segment or design section.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 413 for
a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment.
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 fc times the lightweight concrete factor.
The maximum fc for the cross section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The
maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
39.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way

design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in
one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports
in the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement on page 436 for details regarding which
slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the
reinforcement added.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to
ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-way slabs that do not
have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2000 and ACI 318-02 this criterion
need not be used for any two-way slabs.
450
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted in the requirement. Vector components are taken of bonded posttensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section.
39.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum

Reinforcement
inside of L/3 of the support.
design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location closer
than L/6 from a support.
in the design strip segment), this criterion is never applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which
For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for
two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM Concept uses it for all slabs
declared as two-way; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that
do not have a uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is
acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.)
stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and reported.
If 2 fc is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded
reinforcement.
Bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted in the
requirement. Vector components are taken of bonded post-tensioning that is
not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are
limited to the minimum of (fpy fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
RAM Concept
451
Chapter 39
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30
ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 fc , the
minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not considered.
39.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum

Reinforcement
design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location further
than L/6 from a support.
in the design strip segment), this criterion is never applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which
For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for
two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM Concept uses it for all slabs
declared as two-way; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that
do not have a uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is
acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.)
Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross
section depth times the span length. This will not always exactly match the
code requirement
Bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid is
The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not
checked.
The number of bars (4 bars or wires) is not checked.
452
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40 ACI 318-02 Design

This appendix details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-02.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
40.1 ACI 318-02 default loadings

by default when you start a new ACI 318-02 file. As the purpose and use of

RAM Concept
453
Chapter 40
40.2 ACI 318-02 default load combinations

start a new ACI 318-02 file. The purpose and origin of each load
are from ACI 318-02 / IBC 2003, unless noted otherwise.
The load and strength reduction factors changed significantly in the ACI
318-02 code. In general, the load factors were reduced and are now in
agreement with the strength design of other materials. The strength reduction
factors were generally reduced in order to provide similar design results as
the previous code (ACI 318-99).
some load combinations. The factor on L in ACI 318-02 equations (9-3),
(9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for
Live (Unreducible) Loading and 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading.
40.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for longterm losses, which have normally not occurred at this stage)

lump sum.
454
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

40.2.4 Sustained Service LC

For the purpose of this load combination, 100% of the Live (Storage)
Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent
loading. The load factors used are:
40.2.5 Factored LC: 1.4D

RAM Concept
455
Chapter 40
40.2.6 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
40.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr

Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)

456
RAM Concept
Chapter 40

with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
40.2.10 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W (Service Wind Loading)

with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations.
40.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + L + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
RAM Concept
457
Chapter 40
40.2.12 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
with applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat
40.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W

(Service Wind Loading)
458
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W (Service

Wind Loading)
40.2.15 Factored Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.6W (Service Wind

Loading)
applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The
40.2.16 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ E (Ultimate

Seismic Loading)
applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat
RAM Concept
459
Chapter 40
40.2.17 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The
40.3 ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors

parking garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer
assembly loads (or live loads in excess of 100 psf) on a Live
(Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw parking loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM
Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of 1.0 in the Sustained Service
LC, and a (conservative) load factor of 3.35 in the Long Term Deflection LC.
40.4 ACI 318-02 material behaviors

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, nonprestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using ACI
318-02.
460
RAM Concept
Chapter 40

choose to use code equation 8.5.1 with or without the inclusion of Wc, an
equation from another code, or a specified value.
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (w/ Wc) is selected the following values
are used:
E ci = w c
Ec = wc
1.5
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values
are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
Notes.
RAM Concept
461
Chapter 40
40.4.2 Nonprestressed Reinforcement Behavior



For ACI 318-02, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by
equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p, RAM Concept assumes
that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section
centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative
moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
40.5 ACI 318-02 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which ACI 318-02 code
rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section properties,
combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
462
RAM Concept
Chapter 40

near midspan.
near midspan.
both faces).
discretion advised)
Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement
requirement, not a minimum reinforcement requirement (see Service on
page 464).
Section 18.8.2 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded posttensioning, even though the code technically requires it.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
RAM Concept
463
Chapter 40

Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
40.5.3 Service
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is
used to determine the class of post-tensioned members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
464
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
Design System RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.3, 18.4.2b, (not applicable) (not applicable)

18.9.3.2
40.5.4 Sustained Service

Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Table 40-4 Sustained service rule mapping
40.5.5 Strength
RAM Concept
465
Chapter 40
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab
10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab
10.2, 11.3, 11.6*
11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion

design notes)
40.5.6 Ductility
added.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
466
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.6 ACI 318-02 code implementation

40.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature
Reinforcement
7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented.
The gross area of concrete after taking into account the ignore top depth
and the ignore bottom depth is used to determine the reinforcement
specified in 7.12.2.1.
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for
satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not
rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded
up to the next whole number in the reinforcing summary.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with
10.5.4.
In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is
utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever span (as determined by the
declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span
locations are those within L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as
determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan
location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is
utilized.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement
patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is assumed.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.
RAM Concept
467
Chapter 40
40.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non

prestressed)
There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural
members according to the 318-02 Code. Axial/flexural members are
classified as compression controlled or tension controlled in accordance
with 10.3.3 and 10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme
tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions (when the concrete
compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently
large as to provide ample ductility, the section is defined as tension
controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When the tensile
strain is at or below the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as
compression controlled and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is used.
Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is
used.
RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the
resultant tensile force (rather than the depth of the extreme tension steel) to
calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the
results will be identical to using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For
sections with multiple layers of reinforcement (including post-tensioning),
this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be
conservative. In determining the compression-controlled strain limit, RAM
Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and fy / Es. The tension-controlled
strain limit is 0.005.
Strain compatibility design is used.
Ductility on page 466 for more information on applying ductility
requirements.
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on
the settings in the design section of design strip segment under
consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is
designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given
axial force.
468
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant
tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for
moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces
will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a
cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section
may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium;
designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or
design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
For sections with multiple values of f c , the f c of each concrete block is
used appropriately.
40.6.3 Section 10.3.5 Ductility (Non prestressed)

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see Section
10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on page 468 for
details).
The ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force is
limited such that the section strain at the location of the resultant tensile
force is a minimum of 0.004.
Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load
(compression) less than 0.10fcAg, in accordance with section 10.3.5.

Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented
RAM Concept
469
Chapter 40
bw is taken the core width (see Concrete Core Determination on
page 415). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then bw is taken as the
width of the section.
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically
sized beams, this limit will not control the amount of reinforcement.
The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.

Equation 10-4 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented
A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the
reinforcement.
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria.
A non-integral number of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid
areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with stems in tension, this will
typically be the sum of the stem widths.
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An
additional bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar.
Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section
calculations).
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two
circumstances:
The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked
section analysis.
Compression reinforcement added later in the design process
lowers the reinforcement demands.
470
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non

Prestressed)
For sections with multiple values of f c , the minimum f c is used.
Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50bws/fy), 11-15 are implemented.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the
member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a.
Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections
11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3.
40.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams

(Prestressed)
For sections with multiple values of f c , the minimum f c is used
If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger
of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth; otherwise the depth is
considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity.
Equations 11-13 (including 50bws/fy) and 11-15 are implemented.
RAM Concept
471
Chapter 40
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the
member is a slab, then this requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a.
40.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design.
If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are
performed for an average rib:
rib width = total core width / num ribs
with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs)
and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the number of ribs
(* num ribs).
To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design
section or design strip for each rib.
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the
bottom cover.
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to
determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to
section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where
a cross section contains multiple concrete mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
472
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal
At
A 1 f y1 = 5 fc A cp ------ p h f yv
s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and
reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will
report the reinforcement in terms of the number of legs specified (by
the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing
reported by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number
of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is
reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this can make shear capacity
negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other
longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective depths and other
bending parameters that affect shear design.
RAM Concept
473
Chapter 40
40.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems)

This chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
Figure 13.3.8 (Minimum extensions for reinforcement in slabs without beams)
This figure is not considered.

Section 13.5.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)
This section is not considered.
40.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit

A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design
strip segment or design section property Environment. The limiting tensile
stress values are outlined in the following table.
Class U
Class T
Class C
Assumed behavior Uncracked
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calculation
Gross section
Cracked section
Tensile stress limit ft 7.5 fc
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
No limit
Deflection calcula- Gross section

tion
Consider effects of crack- Consider

ing
effects of
cracking
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 /
18.4.4
Computation of fs
for crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
Cracked section analysis
Gross section
Table 40-7
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses
are within the Class T limits, the provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be
applied.
474
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.6.11 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive

Stress Limit
0.6 f ci is the limiting value.
40.6.12 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress

Limit
3 fci is the limiting value.
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added
to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no section will fail this
criterion.
Bonded tendons that are in the tension zone are used to satisfy section
18.4.1; rebar is added as necessary: The available tendon stresses are the
smaller of:
30,000 psi
RAM Concept
475
Chapter 40
0.6 fpy
Bonded tendons that are at an angle (vertical or horizontal) to the cross
section will only have their component perpendicular to the cross section
considered.
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
40.6.13 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress

Limit
0.45 f c is the limiting value.
40.6.14 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit

0.60 f c is the limiting value.
476
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for

Class C Members
The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of
18.4.4.
See Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non
Prestressed) on page 470.
The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing:
The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded
tendons in the tension zone and all bar positions.
For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated:
540
432
2
w i = min --------------- 2.5cci, --------------- --- numberofducts
maxf s
maxf s 3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar
spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and
compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated
stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width,
the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar
will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is
deemed ineffective for controlling crack width and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension
zone, no rebar will be added.
40.6.16 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance

(Prestressed)
See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) on
page 468. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design
RAM Concept
477
Chapter 40
span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces
into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design
Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed
description Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to CrossSection Strains on page 401).
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under
consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the
tendon stresses are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see
detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves
Program Implementation on page 404).
40.6.17 Section 18.8.2 Cracking Moment

For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design
strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the
two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these
regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to
crack;
This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code
technically requires it.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 413 for a
theoretical discussion of the cracking moment.
478
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 fc times the lightweight concrete factor.

The maximum f c for the cross section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The
maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
40.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way

strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is in one of the
two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in
the design strip segment), this criterion is always applied.
See Minimum Reinforcement above for details regarding which slab/beam
face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will have the reinforcement
added.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI
318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-way slabs that do not have a
uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not
be used for any two-way slabs.
Bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is counted
in the requirement. Vector components are taken of bonded post-tensioning
that is not orthogonal to the cross section.
RAM Concept
479
Chapter 40
40.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum

Reinforcement
design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location is inside
of L/3 of the support.
strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location closer than L/6
from a support.
the design strip segment), this criterion is never applied.
added.
stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and reported.
If 2 fc is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded
reinforcement.
Bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted in the
requirement. Vector components are taken of bonded post-tensioning that is
not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are
limited to the minimum of (fpy fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 fc , the
minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not considered.
480
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
40.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum

Reinforcement
strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the section location further than
L/6 from a support.
the design strip segment), this criterion is never applied.
added.
Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross
section depth times the span length. This will not always exactly match the
code requirement
Bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid is
The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
The number of bars (4 bars or wires) is not checked.
RAM Concept
481
Chapter 40
482
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
41 AS 3600-2001 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of AS 3600-2001.
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
41.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings

by default when you start a new AS 3600-2001 file. As the purpose and use
of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly

RAM Concept
483
Chapter 41
41.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations

start a new AS 3600-2001 file. The purpose and origin of each load
are from AS/NZS 1170.0, unless noted otherwise.
some load combinations. For the short-term case the factor will be equal to
1.0 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage) and 0.7 for all other live
loadings. For the long-term and combination cases, the factor will be equal
to 0.6 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible),
and 0.0 for Live (Roof).
41.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.


lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
484
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
41.2.3 Service LC: D + L

Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
41.2.4 Max Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

41.2.5 Ultimate LC: 1.35D

41.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L

RAM Concept
485
Chapter 41

Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.64 (std & alt) [0.4(3.35) + (0.7-0.4)]
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + (1.0-0.6)]
Live (Storage) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + (1.0-0.6)]
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std & alt) [0.0(3.35) + (0.7-0.0)]
41.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + W (Service Wind

Loading)
with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
486
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
41.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + W (Service Wind Loading)

with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
41.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + L + E (Service Seismic

Loading)
with applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat /
raft foundations. The load factors used are:
Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
41.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + E (Service Seismic

Loading)
with applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
RAM Concept
487
Chapter 41
Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
41.2.12 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + L + W (Service Wind

Loading)
applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
Ultimate Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
41.2.13 Ultimate Wind LC: 0.9D + W (Ultimate Wind

Loading)
applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations.
Ultimate Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
41.2.14 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + L + E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
applied seismic and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
488
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
41.2.15 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + E (Ultimate Seismic

Loading)
applied seismic loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
41.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors

car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer
assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
roof loads used for floor type activities on a Live (Reducible) layer or Live
(Unreducible) layer
RAM Concept
489
Chapter 41
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM
Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of 1.0 in the Service LC, a
(conservative) load factor of 0.6 in the wind and seismic load combinations
(both service and ultimate), and a (conservative) load factor of 2.41 in the
Long Term Deflection LC.
Note: If you draw assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer, however,
RAM Concept applies a load factor of 2.41 in the Long Term Deflection LC.
41.4 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, nonprestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using AS
3600-2001.

choose to use code equation 6.1.2, an equation from another code, or a
specified value.
When the AS 3600-2001 code section 6.1.2 is selected the following values
are used:
E ci =
Ec =
1.5
1.5
0.043 f cmi
0.043 f cm
Where
490
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing
fcm = mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
Notes.
41.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behaviour



For AS 3600-2001, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined
by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp, RAM Concept assumes the
tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid
(the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment
RAM Concept
491
Chapter 41
41.5 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which AS 3600-2001
code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section
properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under
consideration.

near midspan.
near midspan.
both faces).
discretion advised)
492
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2

Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
8.1.4.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.4.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.4.2
41.5.3 Service
RAM Concept
493
Chapter 41
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
8.6.2
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
41.5.4 Max Service

This is intended for service load combinations where = 1.0.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
(none)
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
Table 41-4 Maximum service rule mapping
41.5.5 Strength
494
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
See Torsion Considerations on page 416 for an explanation how torsion
is implemented.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
One-Way Slab
8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
Two-Way Slab
8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
Note: * - 8.3 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design
notes)
41.5.6 Ductility
added.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.3
8.1.3
One-Way Slab
8.1.3
8.1.3
Two-Way Slab
8.1.3
8.1.3
RAM Concept
495
Chapter 41
41.6 AS 3600-2001 code implementation

41.6.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of elasticity for concrete is calculated per 6.1.2(a).
The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear
interpolation is used between the table values. Values outside the range of
the table are interpolated conservatively (if fc < 20 MPa, fcm = 1.2 fc; if
fc > 50 MPa, fcm = fc + 6.5 MPa).
This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
41.6.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength

The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 6.1.1.2(a).
41.6.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves

The bonded post-tensioning stress-strain curves are used, but altered as
detailed below.
For service level (elastic) analysis, unbonded tendon stresses are assumed
to be independent of section strains.
The tendon stress is never reduced below p.ef.
The tendon stress is never exceeds fpy.
The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.6 equation (a) or (b) as
appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that
unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the engineer needs to take
this into account before starting the design.
41.6.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending
Strain compatibility design is used. See General Design Approach on
page 399 for a description of RAM Concepts strain compatibility design.
496
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 405 and for tendon,
concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain curves
For sections with multiple values of fc, the fc of each concrete block is
used appropriately.
Ductility on page 495 for applying ductility requirements.
If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then posttensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based
on the settings in the design section or design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed
to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are
required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam,
these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment).
However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for
moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to
ensure a safe design.
The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions
of the structure) will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many cross
RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that
unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the engineer needs to take
this into account before starting the design.
RAM Concept
497
Chapter 41
Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not
implemented.
The standard strength reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
41.6.5 8.1.4 Minimum Flexural Strength

Cross sections within 1/6 span from supports or 1/6 span from midspan
are considered at critical sections.
If the design section is not declared as post-tensioned in the design section
or design strip segment, then the P/Ag and Pe terms of 8.1.4.1 are assumed
to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons).
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 413 for
a theoretical discussion of the cracking load.
41.6.6 8.1.4.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits

The second clause in 8.1.4.2 is implemented.
The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more
conservative than the gross section calculation suggested in the code.
The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp.
If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to
limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending moment and axial
forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both
will be added.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress
is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress limit of all of the
individual concrete areas.
41.6.7 Section 8.1.3 Ductility of Beams in Bending

See General Design Approach on page 399 for general information on
cross section calculations.
498
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
The neutral axis depth (ku) is limited to 0.4 per section 8.1.3.
Reinforcement is added to minimise the neutral axis depth.
If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside
of the 0.4 d zone, then a solution may not be possible.
In certain circumstances it may not be possible to simultaneously provide
positive moment ductility and negative moment ductility. This most
commonly happens if there is a large post-tensioning tendon near the center
of the cross section.
41.6.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design

See Concrete Core Determination on page 415 for the web width (bw)
calculations.
Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts
that are located in the shear core are deducted from the bw width to
determine the bv width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the
core, the elevation with the maximum effective duct width is used to
determine bv.
If the section is declared as post-tensioned, d0 is taken as the maximum
of the depth of all tension reinforcement or 0.8D. No check is made to verify
that the structure actually is post-tensioned.
If the section is not post-tensioned d0 is taken as the maximum depth of
all tension reinforcement.
Ast is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that
is in the tension zone for the cross section forces under consideration.
The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, Pv, is ignored
(taken as zero).
Flexure-shear Vuc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed
members the Apt and V0 evaluate to zero).
V0 is calculated as M0/(M*/V*) for both determinate and indeterminate
structures.
2 is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered).
3 is taken as 1.0.
RAM Concept
499
Chapter 41
Apt is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in
the tension zone. Vector components of the tendon areas are used for
tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section.
Web-shear Vuc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and nonprestressed members). The calculation is performed at the centroid of the
member, but the net web width (bv) is used to determine the shear stress at
the centroid. The balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section
properties are used to determine the axial stress at the centroid.
Vus is calculated per 8.2.10 (a).
No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to
supports.
If beam torsion is selected, torsion design is also performed (see
Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design on page 500). Maximum shear capacity
is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then
Section 8.3.4(b) is used to reduce available shear capacity.
Stirrup spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c).
41.6.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design

Section 8.3 is followed.
Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are
met [T* < 0.25 Tuc]. The requirements of 8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored.
All torsion is assumed to be taken by the core. See Concrete Core
Determination on page 415 for calculation of the core.
Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an
average rib (and then factored up by the number of ribs).
Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity.
In calculating At and ut, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal
bar is assumed to be the maximum of the top cover and bottom cover to the
centroid of their respective longitudinal bars.
Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not
reduced by the flexural compression force [8.3.6(a) is used for both tension
and compression faces]
500
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Torsion capacity is not reported; instead shear capacity is reduced by the
fitments, etc. that are used to provide the required torsion capacity.
When shear acts simultaneously with torsion, Section 8.3.4(b) is
considered when designing the transverse closed ties.
Transverse closed ties (Asw) are provided for the lesser of T* and Tu,max.
If T* is greater than Tu,max, then the section will be reported as failing
sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(a) are also met.
Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the Asw value calculated
for the lesser of T* and Tu,max.
Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if
the cross section is in pure torsion (no shear).
41.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control

If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is
provided.
A critical tensile zone is considered as any cross section that has gross
section stresses that equal or exceed 3 MPa for the cross section forces under
consideration (slightly different and less conservative - than the code M*s.1
definition). Axial compression (or tension) is considered in this stress
calculation.
The cross section is considered as a tension member if both faces are in
tension based on gross section stresses for the cross section forces being
considered. (The code uses the term primarily tension.).
Reinforcement is only fully designed on the face of the member with the
highest tension stress (based on gross section stresses). In the rare case of a
tension member, reinforcement may be added to the compression face in
order to satisfy equilibrium, but that compression face reinforcement will
not be sized to satisfy sections (i) and (ii).
Section (i) In the service design, this section is used if the cross section is a
tension member or is a critical tensile zone. For the max service design, this
section is only used for critical tensile zones. This section never used in
protected environments.
The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast,min = 3ks Act / fs
RAM Concept
501
Chapter 41
A ks value of 0.8 is used for tension members; otherwise a ks value of 0.6
is used.
fs is determined from Table 8.6.1(A). The bar diameter is used in the table
is calculated from the area of the bar on the tension face; this results in a bar
diameter that is slightly different from the nominal diameter.
Section (ii) This section is always used in the service design, but never
used in the max service design.
The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast = Asb * bt / 300 mm,
where
Ast = required tension-most-face reinforcement area
Asb = area of a single bar
bt = tension face section width
Section (iii) This section is used if the cross section is a tension member
and the environment is not protected.
For the service design:
Tension face reinforcement is provided to keep the reinforcement
stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A).
The bar diameter is calculated from the area of the bar on the
tension face; this results in a bar diameter that is slightly different
from the nominal diameter. This calculated diameter is used in Table
8.6.1(A).
For the max service design:
stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
Section (iv) This section is used if the cross section is not a tension
member and the environment is not protected. The second code option (the
one beginning with Alternately,) is used.
For the service design:
stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(B).
The bar spacing is calculated as bt Ast / Asb. A non integral number
of spaces may be used.
502
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
For the max service design:
stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
41.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control

If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 fc then there is
no need for crack control reinforcement and none of the following applies.
Section (a) with the 0.6 fc limit is ignored because it does not give any
guidance on how much reinforcement is necessary. Section (b) is always
used instead.
Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the
tension face within the 200 MPa as the moment changes from decompression to service level.
In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement
stress in compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds
0.25 fc ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will
reduce the compression (increase the tension) making it impossible to
satisfy the criterion by increasing the reinforcement.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross
section strains, while the service reinforcement stress is calculated
using cracked section strains.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre
reinforcement spacing of 200 mm or less.
For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension
zone (based on gross-section stresses) is considered to be equivalent
to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the
spacing calculation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be
optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars
required the plan layout of the ducts is ignored.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified
to meet the spacing requirement.
RAM Concept
503
Chapter 41
41.6.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending

Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any
reinforcement required is reported as being due to 8.1. See Section 8.1
Strength of Beams in Bending above for details on the 8.1 implementation.
41.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control

A critical tensile zone is considered as any cross section that has gross
section stresses that equal or exceed 3 MPa for the cross section forces under
consideration. Axial compression (or tension) is considered in this stress
calculation.
Reinforcement is only fully designed on the face of the member with the
highest tension stress (based on gross section stresses). In the rare case of a
tension member, reinforcement may be added to the compression face in
order to satisfy equilibrium, but that compression face reinforcement will
not be sized to satisfy sections (ii) and (iii).
Section (i) This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is
implemented in the minimum reinforcement design via clause 8.1.4.1.
Section (ii) In the service design and max service design, this section is
used if the cross section is in a critical tensile zone and is not in a protected
environment.
The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast,min = 3ks Act / fs
ks = 0.6
fs is determined from Table 9.4.1(A). The bar diameter is used in the table
is calculated from the area of the bar on the tension face; this results in a bar
diameter that is slightly different from the nominal diameter.
Section (iii) This section is always used in the service design, but never
used in the max service design.
The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast = Asb * bt / spacing,
where
spacing = maximum of 300 mm or two times the cross section
depth
Ast = required tension-most-face reinforcement area
504
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Asb = area of a single bar
bt = tension face section width
Section (iv) This section is only used for service design, but is not used in
protected environments. The second code option (the one beginning with
Alternately,) is used.
Tension face reinforcement is provided to keep the reinforcement stresses
within the limits of Table 9.4.1(B).
The bar spacing is calculated as bt Ast / Asb. A non integral number of
spaces may be used.
Section (v) This section is only used for max service design, but is not used
in protected environments.
Tension face reinforcement is provided to keep the reinforcement stresses
less than 0.8 fsy.
41.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control

If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 fc then there
is no need for crack control reinforcement and none of the following
applies.
Section (a) with the 0.5 fc limit is ignored because it does not give any
guidance on how much reinforcement is necessary. Section (b) is always
used instead.
Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the
tension face within the 150 MPa as the moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service
reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress
exceeds 0.25 fc ) this criterion is skipped.
The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining
gross section decompression cross-section strains and applying the strains
to the reinforcement.
Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre
reinforcement spacing of 500 mm or less. For this requirement, each bonded
tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross section stresses) is
considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from
the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are
RAM Concept
505
Chapter 41
assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel
bars required. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be
specified to meet the spacing requirement.
41.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature

This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer
as it is independent of the magnitude of forces upon a cross section.
This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application
to beams is not required by AS 3600.
Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject
to both positive and negative moments and the tension face reinforcement
location is chosen.
The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b))
times the amount specified by either 9.4.3.4(a)(i) or 9.4.3.4(b)(i)
For protected environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is
As = (0.75)(1.75 2.5 cp)(Ag)/1000
For other environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is
As = (0.75)(3.5 2.5 cp)(Ag)/1000
For non-PT design strips and design sections, cp is taken as zero.
41.6.16 Punching Shear Design

Punching Shear checks are currently implemented using the ACI code.
See Chapter 44, Punching Shear Design Notes.
506
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42 BS 8110: 1997 Design

This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of BS8110: 1997
(including Amendments 1 and 2) and Technical Report 43 (known as TR
43).
Default loadings
Live load factors
Material behaviors
42.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings

by default when you start a new BS 8110 file. As the purpose and use of
42.1.1 Default Pattern Loading Factors

To fulfill the requirements of considering Adverse and Beneficial
loadings required in code section 2.4.3.1, RAM Concept uses pattern loading
factors. For dead loadings, RAM Concept uses pattern factors of 1.0 and
1.0/1.4, or 0.71. For live loadings, RAM Concept uses Pattern factors of 1.0
and 0. See About load pattern on page 59 for further information.

RAM Concept
507
Chapter 42
42.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations

start a new BS 8110 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination
are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You
can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from BS8110-1:
1997 (including Amendments 1 and 2), unless noted otherwise.
42.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.


lump sum.
508
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

42.2.4 Ultimate LC: (1.4 | 1.0)D + (1.6 | 0.0) L

Live Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)

The load factors are:
Live (Storage) Loading: 2.76 (std & alt) [0.75(3.35) + 0.25(1.0)]
RAM Concept
509
Chapter 42

with applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
42.2.7 Service Wind LC: D + W (Service Wind Loading)

with applied wind loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
42.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2W (Service Wind

Loading)
applied wind and live loads. It is currently only generated for mat / raft
510
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42.2.9 Ultimate Wind LC: D + 1.4W (Service Wind Loading)

42.2.10 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.4D + 1.4W (Service Wind

Loading)
42.2.11 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section
2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4. The load factors used are:
Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt)
This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.
42.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors

RAM Concept
511
Chapter 42
car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer
assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM
Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of 2.76 in the Long Term
Deflection LC.
42.4 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, nonprestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement when using BS
8110 / TR 43.
42.4.1 Concrete Behaviour

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials
window. The user can choose to use the code equation of BS8110 Figure 2.1,
an equation from another code, or a specified value.
When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be
specified:
When the BS 8110 code equation is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 5500 ( f cui 1.5 )
E c = 5500 ( f cu 1.5 )
Where
fcui = cube strength at stressing
fcu = 28 day cube strength
512
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a
For detailed cross section analyses four different stress strain curves are
used. All four stress-strain curves are parabolic-linear curves as detailed in.
The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 2fc/Ec, where
fc is the peak stress and Ec is the elastic modulus at zero strain.
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is
0.67fcui .
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu / 1.5
For accident (localised damage) strength conditions, the peak stress in the
stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.3.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.0035. The
other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
For ECR calculations, the maximum tension stress in concrete is assumed to
be 0.6 f cu .
Note: If the BS 8110 code equation is chosen for Ec, then the strength stressstrain curve is identical to Figure 2.1 in the code.
Note: Elastic modulus calculations in Section 7.2 of Part 2 are not

considered.
42.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour
Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material,
as is shown in code figure 2.2. The elastic modulus is that specified by the
user in the materials window instead of the code-specified 200,000 N/mm2.
For strength considerations, a m of 1.05 is used.
RAM Concept
513
Chapter 42
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a m of 1.0 is used.
42.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is
defined by four parameters:
Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)
Fpy = the yield stress of the reinforcement (from materials
window)
Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials
window)
m = partial safety factor for materials
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for
the power formula, as described in Chapter 37, Section Design Notes. The
three parameters are:
E ps' = E ps
F py' = F py m
F pu' = F pu m
For strength considerations, a m of 1.05 is used.
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a m of 1.0 is used.
42.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

For accident strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded
tendons have no stress.
514
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general
approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is detailed in Chapter 37,
Section Design Notes. For BS 8110-1997, the maximum unbonded tendon
stress (fpb, called flimit in Chapter 37, Section Design Notes) is defined by
equation 52 and 0.7fpu.
When equation 52 is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons,
the following terms are used in the calculation:
l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
fpu Aps = sum of all the individual tendons' fpu multiplied by the
vector component of their Aps.
fcu bd = minimum concrete cube strength multiplied by the
compression face width and the depth to the centroid of the vector
component tendon area
For BS 8110: 1997, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded
tendons is: k = 5d / L
where
L = length of the unbonded tendon.
d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from furthest concrete
face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and zone of
inelasticity of ten times this length [see BS 8110 code text that accompanies
equation 52].
In equation 52, RAM Concept needs to determine d and b. RAM
Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of
the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both
positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon
as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section centroid, the
stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly
compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
The tendon length l in equation 52 is (conservatively) not modified to
assume multiple simultaneous inelastic zones.
RAM Concept
515
Chapter 42
42.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which BS 8110 / TR 43
code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or design section
properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under
consideration.

near midspan.
near midspan.
both faces).
discretion advised)
516
RAM Concept
Chapter 42

Design System
RC
PT - bonded
tendons
PT - unbonded
tendons
Beam
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4
4.12.2
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4,
4.12.2,
TR43/6.10.6
One-Way Slab
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7
4.12.2
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7,
4.12.2,
TR43 / 6.10.6
Two-Way Slab
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7
TR43 / 6.10.6
TR43 / 6.10.6
42.5.2 Initial Service (Transfer)

RAM Concept
517
Chapter 42
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
42.5.3 Service
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is
used to determine the class of post-tensioned members as follows:
Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Corrosive: Class 2
Very Corrosive: Class 1
518
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
One-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
42.5.4 Strength
RAM Concept
519
Chapter 42
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if beam torsion is selected
(see torsion design notes)
42.5.5 Ductility
added.
520
RAM Concept
Chapter 42

Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
One-Way Slab
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
Two-Way Slab
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
42.5.6 Accident
Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2
and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are performed if appropriate.
Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress.
Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in
flexure, m = 1.3 and for reinforcement, m = 1.0. Note that for shear
reinforcement calculations, the 0.95fyv values are changed to 1.0fyv.
RAM Concept
521
Chapter 42
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced m )
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced m )
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
Table 42-6 Accident rule mapping
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion

design notes)
42.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation

42.6.1 Section 3.2.2.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility
Check)
Included code sections - 3.2.2.1 (item b).
Excluded code sections - 3.2.2.1 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies
Condition 2 as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth.
42.6.2 Section 3.4.4 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.4.1.
522
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Excluded code sections - 3.4.4.2 through 3.4.4.5 (these are optional
simplifications of section 3.4.4.1).
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 3.4.4.1 are followed.
The optional 0.1fcu clause at the end of section 3.4.4.1 is not followed
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is
0.0035. The simplified stress block of Figure 3.3 is not used.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( m = 1.5 for
concrete; m = 1.05 for reinforcement).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of
each concrete block is used appropriately.
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on
the settings in the design section or design span under consideration. If axial
forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the
required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant
tension and compression forces (at different elevations) that are required for
moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces
will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a
cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam, then the section
may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium;
designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or
design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
RAM Concept
523
Chapter 42
42.6.3 Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.5.1 to 3.4.5.4, 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.12
Excluded code sections - 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.6 - 3.4.5.11, 3.4.5.13
(considered separately)
See Concrete Core Determination on page 415 for calculation of bv.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength
designers is considered in the determination of As used in the calculation of
vc.
100As / bvd is taken as 0.15 minimum, to follow the =0.15 in table 3.8.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used.
The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the
bending moment and axial force in place at time of the shear being
investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in
compression, then the effective depth is calculated as the distance from the
compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case
100As / bvd is taken as 0.15).
vc is calculated as the minimum of Equation 6a and Equation 6b, but never
less than zero.
fyv is limited to 460 N/mm2.
Links are provided per Table 3.7
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole
length of the beam.
Maximum allowed shear stress is the smaller of 5 N/mm2 and 0.8 f cu .
524
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Spacing of links along the span is 0.75 d. The spacing across the span is not
considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Net axial forces are considered if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is
checked.
42.6.4 Section 3.4.5.13 Torsion

Included code sections - 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.4 (part) to 2.4.8
Excluded code sections - 2.4.3, 2.4.4 (part), 2.4.9, 2.4.10
Note: All code references in this section refer to BS 8110, Part 2

Only the core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete
Core Determination on page 415.
Torsional shear stress vt is calculated using section 2.4.4.1 equation 2.
Maximum combined shear stress vtu is calculated by Table 2.3, note 2
including the y1 modification factor and compared to vt. Any remaining
capacity is used to calculate maximum remaining shear capacity.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with Table 2.4.
Area of torsion links and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in
accordance with section 2.4.7.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, y1 /2 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum links will be provided at all
locations.
Note: Assume in equations in table 2.3, note 2 is a misprint, and should

instead be
RAM Concept
525
Chapter 42
42.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.4
Excluded code sections - none
See section 3.4.4 for additional details.
42.6.6 Section 3.5.5 Shear resistance of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.5.1 to 3.5.5.3
Excluded code sections - none
Section 3.4.5 for is used to determine the shear resistance of solid slabs,
except that Table 3.16 (with bv determined using the shear core) is used in
place of Table 3.7.
42.6.7 Section 3.12.5 Minimum areas of reinforcement in

members
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned members that are primarily
bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections
on page 531 for discussion.
Included code sections - 3.12.5.1 through 3.12.5.3
Excluded code sections - 3.12.5.4
Reinforcement is provided per Table 3.25, assuming that sections are
rectangular and subject to flexure.
Reinforcement is provided such that:
2
A s f y ( 0.0013 ) ( 460N mm )A c
A s ( 0.0013 )A c
For sections that are not declared as post-tensioned, all post-tensioned
reinforcement is ignored.
526
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
For post-tensioned beams and post-tensioned one-way slabs, bonded posttensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is
within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered
to be equivalent to un-tensioned 460 N/mm2 reinforcement, and will reduce
the amount of un-tensioned reinforcement necessary. Bonded tendons at an
angle to the cross section will have vector components of their reinforcement
areas considered toward the requirement. This interpretation is somewhat
more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
Note: This section is never used for post-tensioned two-way slabs.

42.6.8 Section 3.12.11.2.1 Bar spacing
For all RC structures, and PT beams and one-way slabs, crack checks are
performed per Part 2, 3.8.2 and crack widths are limited to 0.3 mm. This
crack width design supersedes the other requirements in this section.
RAM Concepts implementation of the crack width calculations are detailed
in Part 2, Section 3.8.3.
42.6.9 Section 3.12.11.2.4 Beam Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams that are primarily
In beams, the clear distance between bars is limited to 300 mm. This code
section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are
controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In post-tensioned beams, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on
the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross
section depth of the centroid elevation, and are at an angle of more that 45
degrees to the cross section are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned
bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more
conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
RAM Concept
527
Chapter 42
42.6.10 Section 3.12.11.2.7 Slab Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned slabs that are primarily
In RC slabs and PT one-way slabs, the clear distance between bars is limited
to the smaller of 750 mm or 3 d. This code section is applied even though it
is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In one-way slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the
tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross
section depth of the centroid elevation, and are at an angle of more that 45
degrees to the cross section are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned
bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more
conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
42.6.11 Section 4.2.3.1 Redistribution of Moments

(Ductility Check)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item c
as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby ensuring ductility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.5 times the effective depth.
42.6.12 Section 4.3.4.2 Compressive stresses in concrete

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the
concrete section, are limited to 0.33fcu. The increase to 0.40fcu for certain
portions of continuous members is not implemented.
concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to 0.25fcu.
Two-way slab compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete
sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to 0.24fcu in the support
zone and 0.33fcu in the span zone [TR 43 Table 2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to
determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported may be approximate.
528
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
Note: Assume the
in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
42.6.13 Section 4.3.4.3 Flexural tension stresses in

concrete
The interaction of the BS 8110 requirements, the TR 43 requirements, the
different classes and the use of bonded and unbonded tendons makes
describing the service tensile stress limits and requirements in text form very
confusing. In some circumstances, BS 8110 and TR 43 conflict, while in
other circumstances neither one explicitly considers a particular
configuration.
Our implementation of these requirements is detailed in the table below. For
each combination of tendon type, structure type and class, two limit stresses
and a reinforcement calculation are listed. The first limit stress is the
maximum stress allowed if no supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is
used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The
reinforcement calculation details how to calculate the required supplemental
reinforcement when stresses exceed the first stress limit.
Tendons Member
Type
Class
Tension limit Absolute

without sup- tension
plementary limit
reinforcement
Reinforcement calculation
Bonded
Beam
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Table 42-7 Flexural tension limit rule mapping
RAM Concept
529
Chapter 42
Tendons Member
Type
Class
Tension limit Absolute

without sup- tension
plementary limit
reinforcement
Bonded
One-way
3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu
Bonded
Two-way
All
TR 43 Table 2
TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
0.36 f cu
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
3 / 0.1 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
3 / 0.2 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
0.36 f cu
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
3 / 0.1 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
3 / 0.2 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Two-way
All
TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,
6.10.5
TR 43 Table 2
Reinforcement calculation
4.3.4.3 (c)
Table 42-7 Flexural tension limit rule mapping
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values
for grouted post-tensioned tendons and a 0.1mm crack width are used.
530
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross

Sections
For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being with
bonded tendons if the majority of the tendons in the cross section (based on
vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not qualify as
with bonded tendons are considered as being with unbonded tendons. A
cross section without tendons is therefore considered as being with
unbonded tendons.
42.6.15 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned

Reinforcement
Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the unreinforced stress
limits are exceeded, even for the structure types and classes where it is not
anticipated by BS 8110. For example, if a class 1 beam has tension stresses
exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be marked as having failed the 4.3.4.3 criterion;
supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the class 1 beam even
though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
42.6.16 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per

4.3.4.3(c)
The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per 4.3.4.2(c) is as follows:
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit
Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)]
where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
42.6.17 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR

43, 6.10.5
0.625Asfy = F1 for support regions of two-way slabs
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for span regions of two-way slabs
RAM Concept
531
Chapter 42
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for all regions of beams and one-way slabs
where
F1 = tensile force in concrete
As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement added
fy = yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement
Aps = vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in
tension zone
fp = tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the
tension zone if a very large concrete cover is specified.
Note: For span regions of two-way slabs, and all regions of one-way slabs,
this implementation is somewhat different from a literal code interpretation
as it considers the possibility of a mix of bonded and unbonded tendons in a
cross section. It also may require additional un-tensioned reinforcement for a
cross section with bonded tendons, which the code does not require.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to
determine the limit stresses and the peak stress reported may be
approximate.
42.6.18 Section 4.3.5.1 Design compressive stresses

(Transfer)
concrete section, are limited to 0.5fci.
concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to 0.4fci.
For two-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete
section, are limited to 0.24fci in the support region and 0.33fci in the span
region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
532
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned
Note: Assume the
in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
42.6.19 Section 4.3.5.2 Design tensile stresses in flexure

(Transfer)
For beams and one-way slabs, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the
concrete section, are limited to:
Class 1: 1 N/mm2
Class 2: 0.36 f ci .
Class 3: 0.36 f ci .
For Class 2 and 3 beams and one-way slabs, where the stresses above are
exceeded, bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43,
6.10.2/6.10.5]: As = Fi / (0.625fy)
For two-way slabs without supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile
stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0 in the
support region and 0.15 f ci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For two-way slabs with supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile
stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.45 f ci .
Bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]:
As = Fi / (0.625fy)
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to
RAM Concept
533
Chapter 42
Two way slabs can never exceed 0.45 f ci , while there is no limit for beam
and one-way slabs that are class 2 or 3.
Note: Clause 4.3.5.2 is unclear on this stress limit for Class 2, as it states
that additional reinforcement should be provided if necessary. This is
interpreted as reinforcement is only necessary if the tensile stress exceeds
0.36 f ci (since this stress is less than the cracking stress). Hence the stress
may exceed this limit if the additional reinforcement is provided.
42.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in
flexure
Included code sections - 4.3.7.1, 4.2.7.2, 4.3.7.3 (partial)
Excluded code sections - 4.3.7.3 (partial), 4.3.7.4
See section 3.4.4 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included
in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the
diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic
(secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See Post-tensioning Material StressStrain Curves on page 400 for tendon stress-strain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility.
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under
consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the
tendon stresses are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor
approach (see detailed description in Unbonded Post-tensioning StressStrain Curves General Theory on page 402).
Equation 51 and Table 4.4 are not used.
42.6.21 Section 4.3.8 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.8, 4.3.8.10
534
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Excluded code sections - 4.3.8.9
Vco is calculated per equation 54. The flange/web intersection is not
checked.
Vcr is calculated per equation 55
The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table.
Moment
Vc Implementation
M < Mo
Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bvh
M > Mo
Vc = min (Vco, Vcr)
and tension is on the Vc = (stress)bvh

tension face *
M > Mo
Vc = min (Vco, Vcr)
and no tension on
the tension face *
Vc = (stress)bvh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in tension zone)
Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Table 42-8 Vc rule mapping
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress.
This can produce the rare case where the section is in reality uncracked and
has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case
of M > Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full
prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are made.
d is defined as the depth to centroid of the tension force in the tension
zone, slightly different (and likely more rational) than the depth to the
centroid of the tension reinforcement area in the tension zone as specified in
the code
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
RAM Concept
535
Chapter 42
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in
calculations.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength
designers is considered in the determination of As used in the calculation of
vc.
bv is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of
unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds of the width of bonded
tendons is deducted from bv.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the
calculations are averaged.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term, with
(Aps + As) used in place of As. See section 3.4.5 for detail of the
implementation of this table.
When unbonded tendons are used, the value of vc is reduced by a factor of
0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1].
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 4.3.8.6 to 4.3.8.8.
Link spacing is calculated per 4.3.8.10, with lateral spacing requirements
ignored. The web thickness used in the calculations is the same as the
shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of
multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be
used; each containing only one web.
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole
length of the beam.
42.6.22 Section 4.3.9 Torsion

See section 3.4.5.13 for details.
536
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
42.6.23 Section 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 Slabs (shear)

One-way shear (not punching shear) design of prestressed slabs is calculated
per section 4.3.8 with one exception. Links are not required unless V is
greater than or equal to Vc.
42.6.24 Section 4.12.2 Limitation on area of prestressing

tendons
Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity
greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging
Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span
length from midspan are checked, as these are considered as the likely
locations of first cracking of concrete.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 413 for a
theoretical discussion of the cracking moment (note that the 1.2 factor is not
used in BS 8110)
The cracking stress is 0.6 f cu . For cross sections with multiple concrete
mixes, the maximum fcu for the cross section is used.
42.6.25 Part 2, Section 3.8.3 Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement
stresses remain below 0.8fy.
Crack widths are calculated per BS 8110 Part 2, equation 12. Concrete is
assumed to have no tensile capacity (the 1 N/mm2 residual capacity in Figure
3.1 is not considered). Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below
0.3mm (per 3.2.4.2).
RAM Concept
537
Chapter 42
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but equation 12 will not provide
accurate crack width predictions for two way slabs when wide design strip
segments or wide design sections are used.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded posttensioning tendons are considered, and the balance loading will be
considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, equation 12 can be
manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrm) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]
= msc
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed
horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and tendons that - due to
their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht ] where ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone
sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin) ]
sc [ht +2(acr - cmin) ] = 3acr ht
sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht
sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr
sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc)
acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc)
2
However, a cr = s b + c min , where sb = half the horizontal spacing

between reinforcement
2
s b + c min = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c )
538
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
2
s b + c min = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c )
2
s b = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) c min
sb =
( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) c min
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar
or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling cracking. RAM Concept
iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face
width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid
of the tendon, and the bar diameter is assumed to be zero. Both of these
assumptions are conservative.
42.6.26 TR 43 / Section 6.10.6 Minimum un-tensioned

reinforcement
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs
that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded
Cross Sections on page 531 for discussion.
For post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 3.12.5 and
3.12.11.2 are also applied. (Note that Table 3.27 in TR 43 refers to the
1985 BS 8110 - this table has been renumbered 3.25 in the 1997 edition).
This interpretation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of
the code requirements.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs with bonded or unbonded tendons, untensioned reinforcement is provided in support regions as follows:
As = 0.00075Ac within 0.2 times the span length of the support (0.4 times for
cantilevers)
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
RAM Concept
539
Chapter 42
540
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
43 Estimating deflections
Note: This chapter presents various methods of estimating deflections that
vary in accuracy and complexity. Although we suggest you read the whole
chapter, you will probably find Detailed deflection predictions using strip
based deflection plots on page 554, and Using strip based deflection plots
for slabs on page 557 the most useful for a quick and reasonably accurate
estimation of long term deflections. The various methods are summarized in
Summary of RAM Concepts deflection capabilities on page 564.
The calculation of concrete floor deflections is complicated. There are many
issues to consider, and even with adequate consideration and calculation, any
deflection prediction should only be considered an estimate.
Deflections are affected by:
member size (section properties)
concrete modulus of elasticity
reinforcement (unstressed and post-tensioning)
applied loads
load history
cracking
shrinkage
creep
dynamic effects
Historically, designers have usually calculated deflections of concrete
members using elastic methods with modifications made for some of the
factors listed above.
Most post-tensioned floors have been designed to minimize cracking and so
elastic deflection calculation methods have generally been acceptable. The
increasing usage of partial prestress methods has made deflection
calculations more important for post-tensioned design. Reinforced floors
usually undergo more extensive cracking than post-tensioned floors, which
is one reason why they need more concrete section, and more consideration
of deflection issues.
RAM Concept
541
Chapter 43
More aggressive designs (that is, with shallower or thinner concrete
sections) require a more rigorous analysis to determine that the deflection
limit states are satisfactory. RAM Concept allows the use of simplistic
methods in addition to more detailed and accurate methods for determining
deflections. The aggressive designer must, however, have a thorough
understanding of the methods and issues to ensure satisfactory deflections.
43.1 About RAM Concepts deflection calculations

RAM Concept analyses the concrete floor with a linear elastic analysis. All
deflection contour plans are representative of the elastic analysis and the
particular load combinations load factors. RAM Concept does not consider
cracking, shrinkage and creep in these contour plots.
RAM Concept calculates ECR (effective curvature ratio) values. You can
investigate the effects of cracking, shrinkage and creep with these ECR
values. RAM Concept calculates ECR values based upon the user defined
creep and shrinkage values, and section reinforcement (that calculated by
RAM Concept to comply with various design criteria) for each design strip
cross section.
Load history is not considered, but it might affect the choice you make for
the creep coefficient for the ECR calculations. Dynamic effects are not
considered.
43.1.1 RAM Concepts deflection methodologies

RAM Concept can be used to investigate deflection in a number of ways.
These include:
Simplified deflection predictions using load factors and deflection
contour plans (no consideration of cracking) [Method 1]
Detailed deflection predictions using deflection contour plans and ECR,
assuming all live load is permanent [Method 2]
Detailed deflection predictions using deflection contour plans, ECR and
consideration of transient nature of live load [Methods 3 and 4]
542
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Detailed deflection predictions using strip-based plots of long term
deflection incorporating integration of the elastic deflection and ECR
[Method 5].
43.1.2 About creep calculations

Creep can be defined as an increase in strain over time under a permanent
stress. Creep is thus related to permanent load.
Creep factors can be defined as the ratio of long term strain to instantaneous
strain, due to permanent load. This is the definition used in RAM Concept.
Permanent live loads have creep factors similar to that of dead loads. Live
load is usually not 100% permanent, but either transient or partly transient.
Thus, live load creep factors are often less than that for dead load.
The live load creep factor can be calculated as: creepLL = creep*permLL%
+ (1 - permLL%)
where
creepLL is the live load creep factor
creep is the basic creep factor
permLL% is the permanent live load as a percentage of the total live load
The formula assumes that the total live load deflection is the sum of the
permanent live load deflection multiplied by the basic creep factor, plus the
transient live load deflection.
The following tables show calculation of live load creep factors.
Live Load
Permanent
LL
Basic creep
factor
Calculate creep
factor
Live load
creep factor
25%
3*0.25+(1-0.25)
1.5
50%
3*0.5+(1-0.5)
100%
3*1
Figure 43-1 Calculation of live load creep factor (with basic creep factor of 3)
RAM Concept
543
Chapter 43
Live Load
Permanent
LL
Basic creep
factor
Calculate creep
factor
Live load
creep factor
25%
3.35
3.35*0.25+(1-0.25)
1.59
50%
3.35
3.35*0.5+(1-0.5)
2.18
100%
3.35
3.35*1
3.35
Figure 43-2 Calculation of live load creep factor (with basic creep factor of 3.35)
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM
Concept files adopt this value as a default.
43.2 About detailed deflection predictions using ECR

RAM Concept calculates the effective curvature ratio (ECR) as a means for
the designer to investigate the effects of cracking, shrinkage and creep on
deflection. This is useful for RC floors, and PT floors with service stresses
exceeding the concrete rupture stress.
Depending upon the method used, you can use ECR values as multipliers of
short term deflection, or as load factors for a Long term deflection LC.
ECR is described as:
ECR = Ce / Cg
where
Ce = the effective cross section curvature (considering the effect of creep,
shrinkage and cracking)
For additional information, refer to Calculation of Effective Curvature
Ratio on page 409.
It is generally quick to find an upper bound on deflection by multiplying the
maximum ECR for the floor by the appropriate short term deflection. This is
544
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
conservative, and you could calculate a more reasonable value by using
weighted averages of ECR, or an average based upon integration.
You can plot the ECR for different rule sets.
About Weighted Averages of ECR
Usually a cracked concrete member is uncracked near inflexion points, and
other parts of the span. In addition, the cracking at midspan may be more
significant than at the supports, or vice versa. Unless the span is uncracked,
it is very unlikely that the ECR is the same throughout the span.
A weighted ECR value considers the different amount of cracking
throughout the span.
In the following discussion, this weighted average is calculated considering
only the ECR values at the left support, midspan, and the right support.
The weighting of the ECR values is somewhat subjective. Since the energy
in a beam is proportional to the integral of the moment squared and the
deflection of the beam is approximately proportional to the energy in the
beam, then a weighted average should consider an integral of the moment
squared. Refer to Use of ECR on page 410 for further explanation.
The following plots show integrals of the moment square for a fixed end
span and a propped cantilever (fixed one end, simply supported the other).
The objective of the plots is to calculate the ratios of the integrals of the
moment squares for the different zones (left support, midspan, right
support.).
RAM Concept
545
Chapter 43
Figure 43-3 A plot of the moment squares for a fixed end beam
Note: The maximum moments for a fixed end beam are -wl2/12 and wl2/24
respectively. The moment squares of these are 0.00694(wl2)2 and

0.001736(wl2)2, which correspond to the plot.
Integral
wL5 prefix
Itotal =
Ii / Itotal
I1 + I2 + I3
I1 (left)
0.000427
0.001389
0.308
I2 (mid)
0.000535
0.001389
0.385
I3 (left)
0.000427
0.001389
0.308
Figure 43-4 Determination of weighted factors for fixed end member
546
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Figure 43-5 A plot of the moment squares for a propped cantilever (fixed one end, simply supported the other)
Note: The maximum moments for a propped cantilever are -wl2/8 and
0.0703wl2/12 respectively. The moment squares of these are 0.01563(wl2)2

and 0.00494(wl2)2, which correspond to the plot.
Integral
wL5 prefix
Itotal =
Ii / Itotal
I1 + I2 + I3
I1 (left)
0.001147
0.003125
0.367
I2 (mid)
0.001978
0.003125
0.633
I3 (left)
0.003125
Figure 43-6 Determination of weighted factors for propped cantilever
RAM Concept
547
Chapter 43
43.2.1 Summary of weighted averages

The following table summarizes the weighted average values based on the
preceding discussion. You can use them to calculate a weighted average of
ECR for a particular span. They are only a guide.
Span type
Left multiplier
Middle multiplier
Right multiplier
Continuous both
ends
0.3
0.4
0.3
Simply supported one end
0.37
0.63
Simply supported
Cantilever
Figure 43-7 Factors for weighted ECR
43.3 Using RAM Concept to predict deflections

You can use RAM Concept to predict deflections using the five methods
outlined below. Method 5 is generally considered the best. Their relative
merits are discussed in Summary of RAM Concepts deflection
capabilities on page 564
43.4 Simplified deflection predictions using contour

plans
RAM Concept calculates deflections based upon defined load factors and
uncracked sections. The deflections are plotted for various loadings and load
combinations (default and user-defined).
Using RAM Concepts contour plots is a simple and sometimes adequate
way to predict deflections.
548
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
43.4.1 Method 1: Gross elastic deflections

Many designers are satisfied assessing deflections for post-tensioned floors
using deflection contour plans. The contour plans show load combinations
(some with increased load factors to consider creep) without any explicit
consideration of cracking. This is generally done when gross-section stresses
do not exceed approximately 6 f c (psi units) [ 0.5 f c (MPa units)].
Service LC
The Service LC Deflection Plan uses service loads (as defined in the Service
Load Combination) and reports deflection contours based upon gross
sections without any considerations of creep and cracking.
Long Term Deflection LC
The Long Term Deflection LC uses long term loads (as defined in the Long
Term Deflection Load Combination) and reports deflection contours based
upon gross sections. This could be considered the old-fashioned method
where the effect of creep and shrinkage is estimated by applying a load
factor (of, say, 3) to dead loads and post-tensioning loads, and a different
load factor (of, say, 1.5) to live loads.
As discussed in About creep calculations on page 543, the choice of live
load factor should consider the type of live load.
Note: The Long Term Deflection LC load factors are not automatically
linked to the creep factor parameter in the Calc Options Dialog window.
Note: The Sustained Service LC (used only for ACI 318) is not recommended
for deflection investigation as it is actually provided for the service design
rule 18.4.2(a) that requires compression stresses for permanent live loads to
be less than 0.45*f'c. Its load factors are similar to those used for the Service
LC, not the Long-Term Deflection LC.
43.5 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted

ECR values for permanent live loads
You can use RAM Concepts ECR calculations for a more accurate method
of predicting deflections.
RAM Concept
549
Chapter 43
This method uses a service (short term) deflection plan with a weighted ECR
for critical spans.
43.5.1 Method 2: Modify the maximum deflection with a

weighted ECR value
This method uses the following steps:
Determine maximum deflection from the appropriate service deflection
plan
Multiply this deflection by the weighted ECR for the span
Note: Sometimes the maximum deflection does not occur in the span with the
maximum ECR. You can be conservative and use the maximum deflection and
the floors maximum weighted ECR, or check different spans with the appropriate weighted ECR.
Note: The Long Term Deflection LC deflection plan should not be used to
determine the value that is multiplied by the weighted ECR.
Example: Method 2
A continuous beam has been analyzed with a creep factor of 3.35 (defined in
the calculation options dialog box).
The service deflection is 3.14 mm. The ECR values vary from 3.35 at the left
hand support, to 6.65 at midspan, to 5.72 at the right hand support.
550
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Figure 43-8 Service deflection and ECR plot
The long term deflection can be estimated as:

Weighted average of ECR = 0.3*3.35 + 0.4*6.65 + 0.3*5.72 = 5.38
Deflection = 3.14 *5.38
= 17 mm (0.67 inches)
43.6 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted

ECR values for transient live loads
The live load for most floors is not 100% permanent. That is, some or all of
the live load is transient. For such floors, using ECR values for permanent
loads is conservative.
The creep factor for transient, or partly transient live loads, should be less
than the creep factor for dead load. Refer to Figures 43-1 and 43-2 for a
discussion of live load creep factors.
RAM Concept
551
Chapter 43
Consideration of a lower creep value for live load makes the calculations
more difficult, because it is not sufficient to look at ECR for the reduced live
loads. This is because:
the concrete may be uncracked due to reduced loads, but cracked for
maximum loads.
a uniform creep factor cannot be applied.
Two additional deflection prediction methods are discussed here. These
methods consider transient live loads. Both have merit but you should decide
which is more appropriate.

weighted ECR value that considers the transient nature of
the live load
This method uses the following:
For the Long Term Deflection Load combination
Adopt the value of ECR from Method 2 as the load factor for the
dead loadings and balanced loading.
Adopt a modified ECR value for live loading that reflects the
proportion of live load that is transient.
Example: Method 3
For the same continuous beam as in method 2:

The load factor for the dead loadings and balanced loading is 5.38
The live load is considered to 50% permanent and the remainder is transient.
From Figure 43-2, the live load creep factor is 2.18.
The modified ECR for live loading is 5.38*2.18/3.35=3.50
The Long Term Deflection LC has been changed to factors of 5.38 on all
dead loading and balanced loading, and 3.50 for live load.
552
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Figure 43-9 Long term deflection with load factors based upon ECR
The estimated long term deflection is thus 13 mm (0.52 inches). As

expected, this is less than for example 2.

cracking factor derived from the weighted ECR that
considers the transient live load
This method uses the following procedure:
Determine the effect of cracking for maximum live load by dividing the
weighted ECR by the Calc option creep value to obtain a cracking factor.
Apply this cracking factor to a new deflection LC, called, say, the Creep
but no cracking Deflection LC
Example: Method 4
For the same continuous beam as in method 2, the cracking factor is

estimated as:
Crack factor = ECR / (creep factor)
Thus, crack factor = 5.38 / 3.35 = 1.61
The live load is considered to 50% permanent and the remainder is transient.
From Figure 43-2, the live load creep factor would be 2.18.
RAM Concept
553
Chapter 43
The Creep but no cracking Deflection LC has been changed to factors of
3.35 on all dead loading and balanced load, and 2.18 for live load.
Figure 43-10 The Creep but no cracking deflection
The Creep but no cracking Deflection LC deflection is 8.2 mm.

The estimated long term deflection is thus 8.2 * 1.61 = 13 mm (0.52 inches).
As expected, this is the same as example 3.
43.7 Detailed deflection predictions using strip based

deflection plots
RAM Concept can plot deflection along design strips for all loadings, load
combinations and rule sets. These are available using the plot dialog and
strip tab as shown in Figure 43-11. No default plans are provided with
these plots, but you can create them.
554
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Figure 43-11 Strip deflection setting
More significantly, RAM Concept provides section analysis deflection plots

for rule sets. These are available using the plot dialog and section analysis
tab as shown in Figure 43-12.
Note: Theses section analysis deflection plots are more powerful, as the
ECR values are integrated along the strip and included for long-term
deflection.
Note: The plots show deflection along the strip spines. There is no averaging
across the design strip cross section.
RAM Concept
555
Chapter 43
Figure 43-12 Section analysis deflection setting
43.7.1 Method 5: Strip based long-term deflection plot

This method uses the L.T. deflection plan in the Service (or Maximum
Service) Rule Set.
To view the long-term deflection plot
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection
Plan.
Example: Method 5
For the same continuous beam as in method 2, the L.T. Deflection Plan
shows the plot in Figure 43-13.
556
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Figure 43-13 The (strip based) long-term deflection plot
The strip based long-term deflection is 17.4 mm (0.69 inches). This

compares with Method 2 (17 mm) as neither method considered a reduced
creep factor for live load.
43.8 Using strip based deflection plots for slabs

The calculation of deflections for two-way slabs is more complicated than
that for a beam directly supported by columns. This is because there could be
significantly different degrees of cracking in the two perpendicular
directions. The same is true of one-way slabs supported by beams.
There are generally two considerations:
1 Deflection at midspan of middle strip relative to the ends
2 Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
Sections 43.8.1 and 43.8.2 discuss the deflection analysis of the two-way
slab shown in Figure 43-14.
RAM Concept
557
Chapter 43
Figure 43-14 Flat slab example with the analyzed panel shown in gray
The examples use the L.T. deflection plan in the Service Rule Set (see To
view the long-term deflection plot on page 556 for instructions). Some files
show this plan in the Maximum Service Rule Set (depending upon the code
used).
Note: The elastic deflections were shown on the same plan by changing the
plot.
558
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
43.8.1 Flat slab example 1 - cracking in one strip

Figure 43-15 shows the elastic deflection of the east-west column strips and
north-south middle strip. The deflections are identical where the strips
intersect.
Note: The plots may not show identical results if the middle strip spine does
not intersect the midpoint of the column strips, or maximum deflection is not
at midspan.
Figure 43-15 Flat slab example 1: elastic deflections of selected column and middle strips
RAM Concept
559
Chapter 43
Figure 43-16 shows the long term deflection plots.
The beam strip and middle strip are uncracked and so have identical
deflections where they intersect.
The column strip (east-west) has undergone cracking whereas the middle
strip (north-south) has not. Hence the values where they intersect (point A)
are not the same.
Figure 43-16 Flat slab example 1:long-term deflections of selected column and middle strips
560
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Relative deflection at midspan of middle strip
The relative middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:

= 22.6 - (11.5 + 2.9)/2
= 22.6 - 7.2
= 15.4 mm
Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
The absolute middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:

= 22.6 - (11.5 + 2.9)/2 +(23.1 + 2.9)/2
= 22.6 - 7.2 + 13.0
= 28.4 mm
Note: Clearly the 2.9 mm could be left out of the equations.

43.8.2 Flat slab example 2 - cracking in all strips
This example has an increased live load and a shallower edge beam than
example 1.
Figure 43-18 shows the elastic deflection of the east-west column strips and
north-south middle strip. The deflections are identical where the strips
intersect.
Note: The plots may not show identical results if the middle strip spine does
not intersect the midpoint of the column strips, or maximum deflection is not
at midspan.
The maximum elastic deflection is approximately 10% greater than that of
example 1.
RAM Concept
561
Chapter 43
Figure 43-17 Flat slab example 2:elastic deflections of selected column and middle strips
Figure 43-18 shows the long term deflection plots.

All strips have cracked and so have the deflections values are different
where the strips intersect.
562
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Figure 43-18 Flat slab example 2:long-term deflections of selected column and middle strips
Relative deflection at midspan of middle strip
The relative middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:

=26.8 - (13.2 + 4.9)/2
= 26.8 - 9.1
RAM Concept
563
Chapter 43
= 17.7 mm
Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
The absolute middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:

= 26.8 - (13.2 + 4.9)/2 + (24.6 + 6.3)/2
= 26.8 - 9.1 + 15.5
= 33.2 mm
Note: A deflection analysis using north-south column strips and east-west

middle strips could produce slightly different results.
43.9 Summary of RAM Concepts deflection

capabilities
There are a number of ways to use RAM Concept to estimate deflections.
This chapter outlined five methods. The designer should decide which is the
most appropriate., but method 5 is generally faster and more accurate.
Method
Steps
Pro
Con
Long Term
Deflection LC
Estimate the
long term load
factors based on
creep
(1) Simple
(1) Does not consider cracking
ECR / Service
Deflection
Multiply
weighted ECR
by deflections
in Service LC
deflection plan
(1) Relatively
simple
(1) Requires user to

multiply deflections
from contour plan by
ECR. (2) Overestimates deflection if
live load is not permanent
564
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Method
3
ECR / Long
Term Deflection
(load factors
based on ECR)
ECR / Long
Term Deflection
(load factors
based on creep
factor)
L.T. Deflection Plan

(design strip
based)
Steps
Pro
Con
Calculate load
factors based on
ECR from
method 2 for
dead load factors, and modify ECR for
reduced live
load factors
(1) Relatively
simple. (2) Provides a contour
plan with long
term deflections.
(1) If design is
changed then ECR
may change which
could require load
factors to be
changed. (2) Implies
that the worst
weighted ECR will
be used everywhere.
(3) Thus conservative for all but the
critical span
Calculate load
factors from
method 1, and
modify with
cracking factor rationalized from
method 2
(1) Doesn't
require user to
modify load
factors if ECR
changes
(1) Requires user to

multiply long term
deflections by
cracking factor.
None, other
than to modify
if strip is not
directly supported.
(1) Very simple
(1) Requires some

manual adjustment
for flat slabs to
account for differential cracking.
(2) Doesnt
require manual
weighting of
ECR
ECR can be very useful for more accurately predicting deflections.

The weighted ECR is always less than the maximum ECR value in the span.
The designer should consider modifying the creep value for live load.
It is generally conservative (and quick) to find an upper bound on deflection
by multiplying the maximum ECR for the floor by the appropriate short term
deflection.
RAM Concept
565
Chapter 43
43.9.1 Other Notes

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a
cross section strain (top strain and bottom strain) that results in the cross
section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment
and axial force.
In the cracked section analyses, RAM Concept considers concrete to have no
tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have some tension strength,
this assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete has been
previously cracked by some other loading condition (this assumption is
conservative). This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the cracked
cross section stresses and the cracked moment of inertia. This assumption
does not effect the ECR calculations as Branson's formula does not consider
the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the
modulus of rupture. RAM Concept considers any compression
reinforcement in the calculation of ECR.
If there is no cracking, then shrinkage is irrelevant as gross section properties
are used. If there is cracking, then the reinforcement restrains the shrinkage,
so the side with more reinforcement shrinks less than the side with less
reinforcement. Assuming that the side with more reinforcement is the
tension side, this accentuates the curvature. The calculations do not consider
the effect of restrained shrinkage and the cracking it may cause.
The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options window is for ECR
calculations only.
The creep coefficient as specified in the Calc Options window is used for
ECR calculations only. This coefficient is the value of (total strain under
constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a typical value is 3.35 (1.0
for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain).
Note: For more information, refer to Creep and Shrinkage Effects on

page 406, Cracked Section Analyses on page 407, Bransons Stress
Ratio on page 408 and Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio on
page 409.
566
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
44 Punching Shear Design Notes

Ensuring that a slab will not fail in punching shear is one of the most
important tasks in slab design. This chapter gives an overview of punching
shear design and advice on using RAM Concepts punching shear checking
capabilities. There are also three worked examples of punching shear
calculations.
44.1 What is a punching shear failure?

Large support reactions (or any load) applied over a small area of a slab can
cause the slab to fail near the perimeter of the support in shear-like failure.
This punching shear is different than beam shear because the failure
location is around a perimeter instead of along line across the slab. Bending
moment reactions applied along with the reaction force tend to lower the
amount of load that can be supported without a punching failure. Local
thickenings of a slab may increase the punching shear resistance, or may just
move the punching shear failure location to a perimeter outside of the
thickened area. Punching shear failures are usually brittle and sudden.
44.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching

zone?
The transfer of forces in a punching zone is extremely complex, and the load
path changes with increased cracking in the zone. There are no simple
general models to predict the behavior of the punching zone. Threedimensional truss behavior is probably the simplest model that can be
applied to a punching zone, but even this model is too complex for design
purposes.
RAM Concept
567
Chapter 44
44.3 How do the building codes handle punching

shear?
All building codes approach punching shear by replacing the actual
complicated punching behavior by relatively simple models that do not
reflect the actual behavior of the punching zone. The only reason that these
simple models lead to safe designs is that they have been calibrated with test
results for the standard interior, edge and corner column cases.
It should always be remembered that for situations other than the standard
interior, edge and corner cases, the building code models might produce
results that are illogical and possibly unsafe.
44.4 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear?

In RAM Concept, any column below can be checked for punching shear
considerations. RAM Concept currently uses the ACI 318-99 code approach
for all punching shear checks.
RAM Concept investigates each column in a six-step process:
1 Determine the force envelopes that need to be checked.
2 Determine a number of likely failure locations around the column.
3 Connect the failure locations together into a number of potentially critical
sections.
4 Determine code-model stresses on each potentially critical section.
5 Determine code-allowable stresses for each potentially critical section.
6 Summarize the results.
44.4.1 Determining force envelopes

RAM Concept uses envelopes of the reactions on the column to calculate the
stress envelopes for determining the critical case. The following cases are
considered: Max Fz, Min Fz, Max Mx, Min Mx, Max My, Min My. The
controlling envelope can be displayed by checking controlling criteria in
568
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
the visible objects menu under Punching Checks on any plan that displays
the Design Strip Layer, Rule Set Design Layers, or Design Summary Layer.
44.4.2 Determining likely failure locations

RAM Concept investigates the slab geometry within the punching zone
radius specified to find likely failure locations. RAM Concept assumes that
the top-of-slab elevation is constant in this investigation.
The location d/2 from the face of the column is considered to be a likely
failure area. The location d/2 from a change in section thickness is also
considered to be a likely failure area.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Sector Voids, then any slab edge or
hole found within the punching zone radius creates a sector or zone that
offers no resistance to punching.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Failure Planes, then any slab edge or
hole found within the punching zone radius creates a failure line that offers
no resistance to punching, but failure locations created by the d/2 rules that
are inside of this failure line are still considered.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Ignore Edges, then any slab edge or
hole found within the punching zone radius is ignored, with only failure
locations created by the d/2 rules being considered. It is recommended that
Ignore Edges is only used if the Sector Voids and Failure Planes treatments
do not produce desired critical sections.
RAM Concept
569
Chapter 44
Figure 44-1 Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
44.4.3 Creating potentially critical sections

RAM Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to
determine logical potentially critical sections. The method that RAM
Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find
them. You should always visually inspect the locations of the critical
sections that RAM Concept has checked to see if they are appropriate (this is
usually accomplished by a simple visual review of the Design Summary:
Punching Shear Status Plan).
44.5 About ACI 318-99 code-model punching shear

stresses
RAM Concept calculates the stresses at each point for each potentially
critical section based on the section properties and the reaction force and
moments.
570
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
44.6 About ACI 318-99 code-model allowable

punching shear stresses
RAM Concept calculates the allowable shear stress for each potentially
critical section based on the ACI code equations. The allowable stresses are
dependent upon the column connection type.
44.6.1 About Connection Type

RAM Concept determines whether a column is interior, edge or
corner based on the Connection Type property of the punching check. If
the connection type property is set to Auto, then RAM Concept assigns a
connection type.
RAM Concept attempts to determine the connection type using the total
angle of voids within a punching check radius. A void angle is defined as the
angle between tangent lines to any void contained within the punching
check, or the angle between the intersection points of slab edges and the
punching check perimeter.
RAM Concept assigns the connections as follows:
if the total angle of the voids is greater than 180 degrees: corner
if the total angle of the voids is less than 180, but greater than 90 degrees:
edge
otherwise: interior
Due to the possible complex geometries, RAM Concept will not always
assign the appropriate connection type, so we advise you to use discretion
when using the Auto setting.
The connection type assigned by RAM Concept can be viewed on a plan by
checking the Column Condition box under Punching Checks on any
plan that displays the Design Strip Layer, Rule Set Design Layers, or Design
Summary Layer.
For connections that don't neatly fit into one of the categories, it is
conservative to select an option that has more slab edges (i.e., if a connection
appears to be somewhere between an edge and a corner, it is conservative to
select corner for connection type).
RAM Concept
571
Chapter 44
For post-tensioned slabs, the allowable calculated by RAM Concept may be
smaller than that calculated by 2D frame programs, because RAM Concept
uses an effective prestress value that is an average for the punching zone.
This punching zone average will reflect a lower effective prestress in column
capitals and other thickened areas.
44.7 Summarizing the results

For each critical section the calculated stress is divided by the code
allowable stress to determine a stress ratio. The highest stress ratio is
reported for as the maximum stress ratio for the column. If all of the
potentially critical sections fit the standard interior, edge or corner
condition, then the column is declared to be OK or to have Failed. If one
or more of the potentially critical sections does not fit the standard
conditions, then the column is merely declared to be a Nonstandard
Section which requires further review by the engineer.
44.8 Advice on the selection of punching check

properties
Maximum Search Radius - This radius defines the circular area around a
column that RAM Concept will investigate in its search for potential failure
locations. A punching zone radius that is set to be a very large distance will
always be conservative. However, having a very large radius has two
detrimental effects. First, RAM Concept will need to review a larger area of
the slab, and hence will take longer to check the column. More importantly,
slab holes and slab edges that are far from the column will be considered in
determining the potentially critical sections which may result in a smaller
critical section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS - This is the distance from the top of slab to the centroid
elevation of the top reinforcement. In general this is the distance from the top
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar (or the top of the bar under the top
bar). This distance is subtracted from the slab thickness to determine the d
distance.
572
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Angle - The plan angle of the first ray drawn by RAM Concept. You can
adjust this to fine tune the search for openings, edges etc.
Initial Number of Search Rays - The resolution setting is used to
determine the initial effort that RAM Concept expends trying to find
potential failure locations. A resolution of 30 is typically appropriate, but if
RAM Concept misses a hole or a section thickness change within the
punching zone radius, you may want to increase the resolution setting.
Edge/Hole Treatment - An edge/hole treatment of Sector Voids will
always be conservative. However, for columns near a slab edge, the Sector
Voids setting will stop the critical section before it gets to the slab edge (at a
ray from the column center to the slab edge that has a length equal to the
Punching Zone Radius). An edge/hole treatment of Failure Planes will
probably result in more appropriate potentially critical sections in corner or
edge locations, however, this setting requires more visual review by the
engineer to ensure that all the appropriate sections have been checked. An
edge/hole treatment of Ignore Edges is generally unconservative, however,
you may want to try this setting to see if RAM Concept will find a critical
section that it has missed with the other settings.
Connection Type - Corner, edge, interior or auto. Refer to About
Connection Type on page 571.
44.9 Some final words of advice

RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical
sections; for unusual geometries RAM Concept may not check the
appropriate section and/or may check inappropriate sections that give higher
than appropriate stress ratios.
The ACI code models are only valid for standard interior, edge and corner
conditions.
The engineer must review RAM Concepts selection of potentially critical
sections, and must use engineering judgment to decide if RAM Concepts
selections are appropriate and if the application of the ACI code model is
appropriate.
RAM Concept
573
Chapter 44
44.10 Worked examples of punching shear for ACI

318-99
This section presents the steps required for punching shear calculations for
ACI 318-99 in a format that would be similar to hand or spreadsheet
calculations.
The examples are:
1 Rectangular corner column.
2 Rectangular edge column with moment.
3 Rectangular edge column with no moment.
44.10.1 Notation
A = area of one side of the critical section, in2
bo = total length of the critical section, in.
b1 = width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for
which moments are determined, in.
b2 = width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to
b1, in.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal
tension reinforcement, as outlined in ACI 318, in.
Ixx = moment of inertia for bending about the x-axis for the entire critical
section, in4
Ixx = moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of
the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the critical
section, in4
Iyy = moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical
section, in4
574
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Iyy = moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of
the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the critical
section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia for the entire critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical
section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4
L = length of one side of the critical section, in.
Mox = joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the
x-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a right-hand rule for sign
convention, kip-in
Moy = Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the
y-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a right-hand rule for sign
convention, kip-in
Mux = column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the
critical section, kip-in
Muy = column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the
critical section, kip-in
vu =
shear stress located at some point on the critical section, ksi
axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an

Vu =
upward column reaction being positive, kips
x = x-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
xside = x-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
xcol = x-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.
xpoint = x-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
y = y-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
yside = y-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
ycol = y-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.
RAM Concept
575
Chapter 44
ypoint = y-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
vx = fraction of unbalanced moment about the x-axis transferred by
eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
vy =
fraction of unbalanced moment about the y-axis transferred by
eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318

= angle between a side of the critical section and the positive x-axis
44.10.2 Equations for calculation of shear stress

The equations presented are derived from basic mechanics of materials. A
similar formulation can be found in the article Design of Stud Shear
Reinforcement for Slabs by Ghali & Elgabry, ACI Structural Journal, MayJune 1990.
vu =
a)
(x
)[
y po int y vx M ux Iyy + vy M uy I xy
Vu
+
2
bo d
I xx I yy I xy
po int
)[
x vy M uy Ixx + vx M ux I xy
I xx I yy I xy
b) M ux = M ox + Vu ( ycol y )
c) M uy = M oy Vu ( xcol x)
d) I xx =
e) I =
yy
576
xx
sides =1
yy
sides =1
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
f) I =
xy
xy
sides =1
3
g) I = dL (sin 2 ) + Ld ( y y ) 2
xx
side
12
3
h) I = dL (cos 2 ) + Ld ( x x ) 2
yy
side
12
3
i) I = dL (sin cos ) + Ld ( x x )( y y )
xy
side
side
12
j)
v = 1
1
2 b1
1+
3 b2
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations

for bending in an asymmetric section. If the moments are applied about one
or more axis of symmetry, then Ixy = 0 and equation a) reduces to the more
familiar:
vu =
Vu vx M ux ( y po int y ) vy M uy ( x po int x)
+
bo d
Ix
Iy
44.10.3 ACI 318-99 equations for calculation of allowable

shear stress
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation
from ACI-318 (11-35), (11-36), (11-37), or (11-38).
Equation 11-35 will control in non-prestressed concrete zones with large
column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column gets larger, the
allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear
stress.
RAM Concept
577
Chapter 44
Equation 11-36 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in nonprestressed zones with the ratio bo/d. This equation will generally control in
thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
Equation 11-37 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non
prestressed zones, 4 f c .
Equation 11-38 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to
qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the following criterion:
1 The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 125 psi. The
effective prestress is calculated by averaging the precompression in all the
elements within the punching check radius. Each element is given equal
weight (there is not size-based weighting). This could result in nonprestressed equations being used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the
precompression drops below 125 psi in the cap. Additionally, if large
restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing
force in a region, the non-prestressed equations would correctly be used
where the average precompression is below 125 psi.
2 fc shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi. If a concrete strength is input
greater than 5000 psi, a maximum fc of 5000 psi will be used in prestressed
punching zones, but the allowable shear stress will still be calculated using
equation 11-38.
3 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 11-35 through 11-37
are applied.
44.10.4 Sign convention

The equations presented require the use of the right-hand rule sign
convention. While RAM Concept allows you to set your own sign
conventions for reactions, it will internally apply the correct signs to the
equations.
578
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Figure 44-2 Positive moment reactions derived from the right-hand rule sign convention.
RAM Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The
reactions are the forces and moments that would need to be applied to the
column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the columns were
removed. This can be envisioned by removing the column from the structure
and replacing it with the reported reactions applied at the column centroid.
Refer to Figure 44-3 for clarification.
RAM Concept
579
Chapter 44
Figure 44-3 Column reaction sign conventions
44.10.5 Example 1: Rectangular corner column

Column size = 12" x 24"
Slab thickness =8"
fc = 5000 psi
d = 6.4"
580
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Figure 44-4 Example 1 column reactions
The reactions at the centroid of the column are:

Vux =
26.0 kips
Mox =
-44.4 kip-ft
Moy =
-56.6 kip-ft
For the purposes of these calculations, it is assumed that the centroid of the
column is located at coordinate (0, 0).
The coordinates of the long side of the critical section (from the origin at the
center of the column) are (-12, -9.2) and (15.2, -9.2) and its centroid is
located at (1.6, -9.2). The length of this side is 27.2" and its area is 174.1 in2.
Its angle is 0.
The coordinates of the short side are (15.2, 6) and (15.2, -9.2) and its
centroid is located at (15.2, -1.6). The length of this side is 15.2" and its area
is 97.28 in2. Its angle is 2 .
The points used to calculate stresses are at each end of each side. To
summarize, the long side properties:
End 1: (-12, -9.2)
End 2: (15.2, -9.2)
Centroid: (1.6, -9.2)
RAM Concept
581
Chapter 44
Length, L: 27.2 in
Area, A: 174.1 in2
Short side properties:
End 1: (15.2, 6)
End 2: (15.2, -9.2)
Centroid: (15.2, -1.6)
Length, L: 15.2 in
Area, A: 97.3 in2
Properties of the entire critical section:
(174.1 1.6) + (97.3 15.2)

= 6.48in
(174.1 + 97.3)
(174.1 9.2) + (97.3 1.6)
y=
= 6.48in
(174.1 + 97.3)
bo = 15.2 + 27.2 = 42.4in
x=
Note: These coordinates are referenced from the origin at the centroid of the
column.
To calculate the moment of inertias for the critical section, we need to sum
the inertias of the individual sides.
For the long side:
6.4 27.23
I xx =
(sin 2 0) + 27.2 6.4(6.48 + 9.2) 2 = 1,288in 4
12
6.4 27.23
(cos 2 0)+ 27.2 6.4(6.48 1.6) 2 = 14,878in 4
I yy =
12
6.4 27.23
I xy =
(sin 0 cos 0) + 27.2 6.4(6.48 1.6)(6.48 + 9.2)
12
= 2,311in 4
582
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
For the short side:
6.4 15.23 2
2
4
I xx =
sin 2 + 15.2 6.4(6.48 + 1.6) = 4,190in
12
I yy =
6.4 15.23
12
2
2
4
cos 2 + 15.2 6.4(6.48 15.2) = 7,397in
6.4 15.23
sin 2 cos 2 + 15.2 6.4(6.48 15.2)(6.48 + 1.6)
12

4
= 4,140in
I xy =
Properties for the entire critical section:

I xx = 1,288 + 4,190 = 5,478in 4
I yy = 14,878 + 7,397 = 22,275in 4
I xy = 2,311 + 4,140 = 6,451in 4
Now we need to calculate the moments at the centroid of the critical section:
M ux = 44.4(12) + 26.0 (0 + 6.48) = 364.3kip in
M uy = 56.6(12) 26.0 (0 6.48) = 510.7 kip in
Lastly we need to calculate the gamma factor for moments about each axis:
1
= 0.3326
2 15.2
1+
3 27.2
1
= 1
= 0.4714
2 27.2
1+
3 15.2
vx = 1
vy
Now we are ready to calculate the stresses for each side.

Long side
End 1:
RAM Concept
583
Chapter 44
( 9.2 + 6.48) [0.3326 364.3 22,275 + 0.4714 510.7 6,451]

26.0
+
42.4 6.4
5,478 22,275 6,4512
( 12 6.48) [0.4714 510.7 5,478 + 0.3326 364.3 6,451] = 0.243ksi
5,478 22,275 6,4512
vu =
End 2:
( 9.2 + 6.48) [0.3326 364.3 22,275 + 0.4714 510.7 6,451]

26.0
+
42.4 6.4
5,478 22,275 6,4512
(15.2 6.48) [0.4714 510.7 5,478 + 0.3326 364.3 6,451] = 0.467ksi
5,478 22,275 6,4512
vu =
Short side
End 1:
(6 + 6.48) [0.3326 364.3 22,275 + 0.4714 510.7 6,451]

26.0
+
42.4 6.4
5,478 22,275 6,4512
(15.2 6.48) [0.4714 510.7 5,478 + 0.3326 364.3 6,451] = 0.336ksi
5,478 22,275 6,4512
vu =
End 2:
Same point as End 2 for the long side, resulting in an identical stress.
Comparing the calculations to the resulting output, we see that the results are
correct. Note that the calculated stresses are in ksi, while the graphically
reported stresses are in psi.
584
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Figure 44-5 Example 1 punching stresses
44.10.6 Example 2: Rectangular edge column with moment

Slab thickness =7"
fc = 5000 psi
d = 5.625"

Vux = 41.9 kips
RAM Concept
585
Chapter 44
Mox =
0 kip-ft
Moy =
-84.5 kip-ft
For the purposes of these calculations, we will assume the centroid of the
The properties of the sides of the critical section are:
Side 1
End 1: (-18, 14.81)

End 2: (20.81, 14.81)
Centroid: (1.41, 14.81)
Length: 38.81 in
Area: 218.32 in2
Angle: 0
Side 2
End 1: (20.81, 14.81)

End 2: (20.81, -14.81)
Centroid: (20.81, 0)
Length: 29.63 in
Area: 166.64 in2
Angle: 2
Side 3
End 1: (20.81, -14.81)

End 2: (-18, -14.81)
Centroid: (1.41, -14.81)
Length: 38.81 in
586
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Area: 218.32 in2
Angle:
2(218.32 1.41) + (166.64 20.81)
= 6.77in
(2(218.32) + 166.64)
(218.32 14.81) + (218.32 14.81) + 0
y=
= 0in
(2(218.32) + 166.64)
bo = 38.81 + 29.63 + 38.81 = 107.25in
x=
column.
For side 1:
5.625 38.813
I xx =
(sin 2 0)+ 38.81 5.625(0 14.81) 2 = 47,882in 4
12
5.625 38.813
(cos 2 0) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41) 2 = 33,673in 4
I yy =
12
5.625 38.813
(sin 0 cos 0) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41)(0 14.81)
I xy =
12
= 17,330in 4
For side 2:
5.625 29.633 2
2
4
I xx =
sin ( ) + 29.63 5.625(0 0) = 12,194in
12
2
I yy =
5.625 29.633 2
2
4
cos ( ) + 29.63 5.625(6.77 20.81) = 32,854in
12
2
I xy =
5.625 29.633

sin( ) cos( ) + 29.63 5.625(6.77 20.81)(0 0)
12
2
2
= 0in 4
RAM Concept
587
Chapter 44
For side 3:
5.625 38.813
I xx =
(sin 2 )+ 38.81 5.625(0 + 14.81) 2 = 47,882in 4
12
5.625 38.813
(cos 2 ) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41) 2 = 33,673in 4
I yy =
12
5.625 38.813
(sin cos ) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41)(0 + 14.81)
I xy =
12
= 17,330in 4
I xx = 2(47,882) + 12,194 = 107,958in 4
I yy = 2(33,673) + 32,854 = 100,200in 4
I xy = 17,330 + 17,330 = 0in 4
Now we need to calculate the moments at the centroid of the critical section:
M ux = 0 + 41.9 (0 0) = 0kip in
M uy = 84.5(12) 41.9 (0 6.77) = 730.3kip in
Lastly we need to calculate the gamma factor for moments about each axis:
1
vx = 1
= 0.3681
2 29.63
1+
3 38.81
1
vy = 1
= 0.4328
2 38.81
1+
3 29.63
Now we are ready to calculate the stresses for each side.
Side 1
End 1:
(14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 730.3 0]

41.9
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
( 18 6.77 ) [0.4328 730.3 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.009ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
588
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
End 2:
(14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 730.3 0]

41.9
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
(20.81 6.77 ) [0.4328 730.3 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.114ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
Side 3
End 1:
( 14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 730.3 0]

41.9
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
(20.81 6.77 ) [0.4328 730.3 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.114ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
End 2:
( 14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 730.3 0]

41.9
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
( 18 6.77 ) [0.4328 730.3 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = .009ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
Side 2 points coincide with Side 1, end 2 and Side 3, end 1, with identical
stresses. Comparing the calculations to the resulting output, we see that the
results are correct. Note that the calculated stresses are in ksi, while the
graphically reported stresses are in psi.
RAM Concept
589
Chapter 44
44.10.7 Example 3: Rectangular edge column with no

moment
Slab thickness =7"
fc = 5000 psi
d = 5.625"
If we release the fixity at the top of the column from the previous example,
the corresponding moment reactions are shown below.
Some designers expect that given that there is no moment on the column, the
resulting stress distribution around the critical section would be uniform.
However, it is clear to see that this is not the case from the free body diagram
in Figure 44-9. The diagram is an elevation of the column with the
associated critical section. With a uniform stress distribution, the resultant
force Vu is applied at the centroid of the critical section. Because there is an
eccentricity between the centroid of the critical section and the centroid of
the column, a uniform stress distribution would require a column reaction of:
Mu = Vu e
590
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Figure 44-9 Resultant and reaction for an edge column with uniform shear stress
So, in order to create a situation where the moment reaction on the column is
zero, the resultant force from the stress distribution will need to be applied at
the centroid of the column. This will require a non-uniform stress
distribution with the largest downward shear stress occurring at the free edge
of the slab, as shown in Figure 44-10.
RAM Concept
591
Chapter 44
Figure 44-10 Resultant and reaction for a pinned edge column

Vux = 37.1 kips
Mox =
0 kip-ft
Moy =
0 kip-ft
For the purposes of these calculations, we will assume the centroid of the
The properties of the sides of the critical section are:
592
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Side 1
End 1: (-18, 14.81)

End 2: (20.81, 14.81)
Centroid: (1.41, 14.81)
Length: 38.81 in
Area: 218.32 in2
Angle: 0
Side 2
End 1: (20.81, 14.81)

End 2: (20.81, -14.81)
Centroid: (20.81, 0)
Length: 29.63 in
Area: 166.64 in2
Angle: 2
Side 3
End 1: (20.81, -14.81)

End 2: (-18, -14.81)
Centroid: (1.41, -14.81)
Length: 38.81 in
Area: 218.32 in2
Angle:
RAM Concept
593
Chapter 44
2(218.32 1.41) + (166.64 20.81)

= 6.77in
(2(218.32) + 166.64)
(218.32 14.81) + (218.32 14.81) + 0
y=
= 0in
(2(218.32) + 166.64)
bo = 38.81 + 29.63 + 38.81 = 107.25in
x=
column.
For side 1:
5.625 38.813
I xx =
(sin 2 0)+ 38.81 5.625(0 14.81) 2 = 47,882in 4
12
5.625 38.813
I yy =
(cos2 0) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41) 2 = 33,673in 4
12
5.625 38.813
(sin 0 cos 0) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41)(0 14.81)
I xy =
12
= 17,330in 4
For side 2:
5.625 29.633 2
2
4
I xx =
sin ( ) + 29.63 5.625(0 0) = 12,194in
12
2
I yy =
5.625 29.633 2
2
4
cos ( ) + 29.63 5.625(6.77 20.81) = 32,854in
12
2
I xy =
5.625 29.633

sin( ) cos( ) + 29.63 5.625(6.77 20.81)(0 0)
12
2
2
= 0in 4
594
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
For side 3:
5.625 38.813
I xx =
(sin 2 )+ 38.81 5.625(0 + 14.81) 2 = 47,882in 4
12
5.625 38.813
(cos 2 ) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41) 2 = 33,673in 4
I yy =
12
5.625 38.813
(sin cos ) + 38.81 5.625(6.77 1.41)(0 + 14.81)
I xy =
12
= 17,330in 4
I xx = 2(47,882) + 12,194 = 107,958in 4
I yy = 2(33,673) + 32,854 = 100,200in 4
I xy = 17,330 + 17,330 = 0in 4
Calculation of the moments at the centroid of the critical section:

M ux = 0 + 37.1 (0 0) = 0kip in
M uy = 0 37.1 (0 6.77) = 251.2kip in
Calculation of the gamma factors for moments about each axis:
1
vx = 1
= 0.3681
2 29.63
1+
3 38.81
1
vy = 1
= 0.4328
2 38.81
1+
3 29.63
Calculation of the stresses for each side.
Side 1
End 1:
(14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 251.2 0]

37.1
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
( 18 6.77 ) [0.4328 251.2 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.088ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
RAM Concept
595
Chapter 44
End 2:
(14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 251.2 0]

37.1
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
(20.81 6.77 ) [0.4328 251.2 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.046ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
Side 3
End 1:
( 14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 251.2 0]

41.9
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
(20.81 6.77 ) [0.4328 251.2 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.046ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
End 2:
( 14.81 0) [0.3681 0 100,200 + 0.4328 251.2 0]

41.9
+
107.25 5.625
107,958 100,200 0 2
( 18 6.77 ) [0.4328 251.2 107,958 + 0.3681 0 0] = 0.088ksi
107,958 100,200 0 2
vu =
Side 2 points coincide with Side 1, end 2 and Side 3, end 1, with identical
stresses. Comparing the calculations to the resulting output, we see that the
results are correct. Note that the calculated stresses are in ksi, while the
graphically reported stresses are in psi.
596
RAM Concept

RAM Manual Feb 25 05

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAM Manual Feb 25 05

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAM Concept

February 25, 2005

2005 Structural Concrete Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Comparing with traditional methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 Looking at the Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

About the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3.1 Modeling with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4 Using Plans and Perspectives

5 Drawing and Editing Objects

Precision drawing with snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

5.8 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects . . . . . . . . . . . 29

6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables

8 Choosing Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

9 Specifying Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Viewing the available materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

About default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

11 Specifying Load Combinations

About default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Using rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 Using an AutoCAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . 77

What can be imported from the RAM Structural System . . . . 77

15 Defining the Structure

15.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

15.26 Drawing slab openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

16 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

17 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements

17.1 Using the Element layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

18 Defining Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Using the banded and distributed tendon layers . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

19 Drawing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

About superposition of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 Creating Pattern Loading

20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

21 Defining Design Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

22 Using Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

About Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction

Calculating the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

24 Viewing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Type of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

25 Plotting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Setting the plotted results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

26 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

How the Auditor can assist the design process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

27 Using the Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Viewing the estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

28.1 General printing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Printing the desired perspective viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

30 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . 255

About the export of reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31 Using Strip Wizard

31.1 Starting Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32 Simple RC Slab Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33 PT Flat Plate Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Import the AutoCAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34 Mat Foundation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Import the AutoCAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

35 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

36 Analysis Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Review of plate behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375